Maybach - 62 - Owners Manual - 2006 - 2006 (2)

MAYBACH Order No. 6515 4424 13 Part No. 240 584 76 81 USA Edition A 2006 OPERATOR’S MANUAL OPERATOR’S MANUAL Grafik in der Größe 216x79 mm in den Grafikrahmen importieren! Maybach 57 Maybach 62 Maybach 57 S Our company congratulates you on the purchase of your new Maybach. Your selection of our product is a demonstration of your trust in Maybach Manufaktur. Furthermore, it exemplifies your desire to own an automobile that will be as easy as possible to operate and provide years of service. Your Maybach represents the efforts of many skilled engineers and craftsmen. To help assure your driving pleasure and also the safety of you and your passengers, we ask you to make a small investment of your time:
Please read this manual carefully, then return it to your vehicle where it will be handy for your reference.
Please follow the recommendations contained in this manual. They are designed to acquaint you with the operation of your Maybach.
Please pay attention to the warnings and cautions contained in this manual. They are designed to help improve the safety of the vehicle operator and occupants.
Should you have any questions, please contact your Maybach Studio MRM (Maybach Relationship Manager) or call us at 1-866-FOR-MAYBach (in the USA) or 1-888-881-6611 (in Canada). We extend our best wishes for many miles of safe, pleasurable driving. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC A DaimlerChrysler Company Contents Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Product information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Operator’s Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Service and warranty information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Important notice for California retail buyers and lessees of Maybach automobiles . . . . . . . . . 11 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Roadside Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Change of address or ownership . 12 Operating your vehicle outside the USA or Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Where to find it . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Operating safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Proper use of the vehicle . . . . . . . 16 Problems with your vehicle . . . . . . . . 17 Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . . 18 Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . 18 Vehicle data recording . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Information regarding electronic recording devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 At a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multifunction steering wheel . . . . . . . Front center console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Upper part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lower part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overhead control panel . . . . . . . . . . . Driver’s door control panel . . . . . . . . . Rear passenger compartment . . . . . . . Maybach 57 (vehicles without rear center seat*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maybach 57 (vehicles with rear center seat*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maybach 62 without partition* . . Maybach 62 with partition* . . . . . Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maybach 57 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maybach 62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear center seat* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maybach 57 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maybach 62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear center console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maybach 57 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maybach 62 with power tilt/sliding sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maybach 62 with electrotransparent roof* . . . . . . . . 21 22 24 26 27 27 28 30 31 32 32 34 36 38 40 40 42 44 44 46 48 48 51 54 Rear door control panel . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Maybach 57 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Maybach 62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unlocking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unlocking with the SmartKey. . . . Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO**. . . Starter switch positions . . . . . . . . . Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steering wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fastening the seat belts . . . . . . . . Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . Parking brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Driving off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switching on headlamps . . . . . . . . Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . Problems while driving . . . . . . . . . Parking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parking brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switching off headlamps . . . . . . . Turning off the engine . . . . . . . . . Releasing seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 60 60 61 62 65 65 68 70 72 72 74 77 77 78 79 80 82 83 83 84 84 85 86 Contents Safety and Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Occupant safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Airbags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Children in the vehicle . . . . . . . . . 98 Override switch for rear passenger compartment . . . . . . . 105 Panic alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Activating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Driving safety systems . . . . . . . . . . . 107 ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 BAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 ESP® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Electro-hydraulic brake system. . 112 Anti-theft systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . 115 Tow-away alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Controls in detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Locking and unlocking. . . . . . . . . . . . 120 SmartKey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** . . 124 Opening the doors from the inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Closing the rear doors automatically from the inside (Maybach 62) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Opening the trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Closing the trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Trunk emergency release . . . . . . . 136 Valet trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Power closing assist for doors and trunk lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Automatic central locking . . . . . . 138 Locking and unlocking from the inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Setting front passenger seat position from rear . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Multicontour seats . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Seat ventilation* . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Memory function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storing positions in memory . . . . Recalling positions from memory Storing exterior rear view mirror parking position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exterior lamp switch . . . . . . . . . . Combination switch . . . . . . . . . . . Cornering lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . Interior lighting in the front . . . . Interior lighting in the rear . . . . . Courtesy lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door entry lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trunk lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument cluster illumination . Coolant temperature gauge . . . . Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outside temperature indicator . . Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 153 153 154 155 155 159 159 161 162 163 168 168 168 169 169 170 171 171 171 172 172 Contents Control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multifunction display . . . . . . . . . Multifunction steering wheel . . Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard display menu. . . . . . . . Audio menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Telephone menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigation menu . . . . . . . . . . . . Distronic** menu . . . . . . . . . . . . Trip computer menu. . . . . . . . . . Vehicle status message memory menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . Gear selector lever position . . . . Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gear ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic shift program . . . . . . One-touch gearshifting . . . . . . . Emergency operation (Limp-home Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . Good visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Headlamp cleaning system. . . . . Rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . Power folding exterior rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sun visors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear window defroster. . . . . . . . 173 173 174 176 178 179 181 184 184 185 186 187 197 199 201 202 203 204 205 206 206 206 208 210 211 Automatic climate control. . . . . . . . . Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deactivating the climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating the climate control system in automatic mode. . . . . . Setting the temperature . . . . . . . Adjusting air distribution . . . . . . Adjusting air volume . . . . . . . . . . Front defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maximum cooling MAXCOOL . . . Air recirculation mode . . . . . . . . . Charcoal filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Residual heat and ventilation . . . Temperature-controlled glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating rear passenger compartment settings at the cockpit control panel . . . . . . . . . . Rear passenger compartment . . . Activating the climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating the climate control system in automatic mode. . . . . . Setting the temperature . . . . . . . Adjusting air distribution . . . . . . Adjusting air volume . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 213 215 215 216 216 216 217 217 218 219 221 222 223 223 224 229 229 229 230 231 231 Residual heat and ventilation. . . Solar panel* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening and closing the power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Synchronizing the power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Summer opening feature . . . . . . Convenience closing feature. . . . Power tilt/sliding sunroof . . . . . . . . . Opening and closing the power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 57) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Synchronizing the power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 57) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening and closing the power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 62) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Synchronizing the power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 62) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrotransparent roof* . . . . . . . . . Operating the electrotransparent roof. . . . . . . . 232 232 233 233 235 235 236 237 237 239 240 244 245 245 Contents Driving systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distronic**. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Airmatic DC (Dual Control). . . . . Parktronic system (Parking assist). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parking Assist System (PAS) . . . . Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cargo tie-down hooks . . . . . . . . Loading instructions . . . . . . . . . . Useful features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storage compartments . . . . . . . . Umbrella . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floormats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cigarette lighters . . . . . . . . . . . . Non-smokers package*. . . . . . . . Folding table* (standard on Maybach 62; optional on Maybach 57) . . . . . . 248 248 251 263 267 272 280 280 280 281 281 282 293 294 295 298 299 301 302 Refrigerator** in rear center console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Power outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Battery charge socket. . . . . . . . . . 306 Rear window curtain . . . . . . . . . . 307 Rear door window curtains* . . . . 309 Partition* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Two-way intercom* (Maybach 62: standard with partition*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 External communication (special order equipment) . . . . . . 317 Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . 318 Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Tele Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Garage door opener. . . . . . . . . . . 335 Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The first 1000 miles (1500 km) . . . . . Driving instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drive sensibly – save fuel . . . . . . . Drinking and driving . . . . . . . . . . Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Driving off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hydroplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tire traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tire speed rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . Winter driving instructions . . . . . Standing water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Passenger compartment . . . . . . . Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control and operation of radio transmitters . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . Emission control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coolant temperature . . . . . . . . . . 341 342 343 343 343 343 344 344 346 346 347 347 348 348 349 350 350 350 350 351 351 352 Contents At the gas station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Refueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Check regularly and before a long trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission fluid level . . . . . . . Coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system . . . . . Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Important guidelines . . . . . . . . . Tire care and maintenance. . . . . Direction of rotation . . . . . . . . . Loading the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . Recommended tire inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking tire inflation pressure. Tire labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 353 355 356 356 357 360 361 362 363 364 364 365 367 367 373 375 380 Load identification. . . . . . . . . . . . DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maximum tire load. . . . . . . . . . . . Maximum tire inflation pressure. Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards (U.S. vehicles) . . . . . . . Tire ply material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tire and loading terminology . . . Rotating tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tire speed rating for winter tires Winter tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance service indicator message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calling up the maintenance service indicator display. . . . . . . . Resetting the maintenance service indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning and care of vehicle . . . . 384 385 386 387 387 389 390 393 394 394 395 395 396 396 397 398 399 399 Practical hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What to do if … . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lamps in instrument cluster . . . . Lamp in center console . . . . . . . . Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display . . . . . . Where will I find ...? . . . . . . . . . . . . . First aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle jack, vehicle tool kit, luggage bowl, spare wheel. . . . . Unlocking/locking in an emergency. Unlocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . Locking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . Opening/closing in an emergency . . Power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 57) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 62) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing SmartKey batteries . . . . . Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing bulbs for front lamps . License plate lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 410 410 416 417 451 451 451 452 452 453 454 454 455 456 458 459 460 463 Contents Replacing wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . Removing wiper blades . . . . . . . Installing wiper blades . . . . . . . . Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . Mounting the spare wheel . . . . . Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disconnecting the batteries . . . . Charging and reinstalling the batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reconnecting the batteries . . . . Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Towing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing towing eye bolt. . . . . . Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aids for replacing fuses . . . . . . . Fuse boxes in engine compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse box in passenger compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse box in the trunk . . . . . . . . . 464 464 465 466 466 466 471 473 474 475 476 478 480 481 482 482 483 483 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 Parts service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486 Warranty coverage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487 Loss of Service and Warranty Information Booklet. . . . . . . . . . . 487 Identification labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488 Layout of poly-V-belt drive . . . . . . . . 489 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490 Rims and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491 Same size tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492 Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492 Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493 Main dimensions and weights. . . . . . 494 Main dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494 Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494 Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. . . . . . 495 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495 Engine oils. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496 Engine oil additives . . . . . . . . . . . 496 Air conditioning refrigerant . . . . 496 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496 Premium unleaded gasoline . . . . 497 Fuel requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . 497 Gasoline additives . . . . . . . . . . . . 498 Coolants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499 Windshield and headlamp washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501 Technical terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503 Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511 Introduction Product information  Product information Please observe the following in your own best interest: We recommend using Genuine Parts as well as conversion parts and accessories explicitly approved for use on Maybach vehicles and your model. We have tested these parts to determine their reliability, safety and special suitability for Maybach vehicles. We are unable to make an assessment for other products and therefore cannot be held responsible for them, even if in individual cases an official approval or authorization by governmental or other agencies should exist. Use of such parts and accessories could adversely affect the safety, performance or reliability of your vehicle. Please do not use them. Genuine Parts as well as conversion parts and accessories approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles are available at your authorized Maybach Studio where you will receive comprehensive information, also on permissible technical modifications, and where proper installation will be performed. 9 Introduction Operator’s Manual This Operator’s Manual contains a great deal of useful information. We urge you to read it carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehicle before driving. For your own safety and longer service life of the vehicle, we urge you to follow the instructions and warnings contained in this manual. Ignoring them could result in damage to the vehicle or personal injury to you or others. Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow instructions is not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. Your vehicle may have some or all of the equipment described in this manual. Therefore, you may find explanations for optional equipment not installed in your vehicle. If you have any questions about the operation of any equipment, your authorized Maybach Studio will be glad to demonstrate the proper procedures. 10 We continuously strive to improve our product, and ask for your understanding that we reserve the right to make changes in design and equipment. Therefore, information, illustrations and descriptions in this Operator’s Manual might differ from your vehicle. Service and warranty information The Service and Warranty Information Booklet contains detailed information about the warranties covering your Maybach, including:
New Car Limited Warranty Optional equipment is also described in this manual, including operating instructions wherever necessary. Since they are special-order items, the descriptions and illustrations herein may vary slightly from the actual equipment of your vehicle.
Emission System Warranty
California, Maine, Massachusetts, and Vermont Emission Control System Warranty (California, Maine, Massachusetts, and Vermont only)
State Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon Laws) If there are any equipment details that are not shown or described in this Operator’s Manual, your authorized Maybach Studio will be glad to inform you of correct care and operating procedures. The Operator’s Manual and Maintenance Booklet are important documents and should be kept with the vehicle. Introduction Operator’s Manual Important notice for California retail buyers and lessees of Maybach automobiles Under California law you may be entitled to a replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the purchase price or lease price, if Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix one or more substantial defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered by its express warranty after a reasonable number of repair attempts. During the period of 18 months from original delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of 18000 miles (approximately 29000 km) on the odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs first, a reasonable number of repair attempts is presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or more of the following occurs: (1) the same substantial defect or malfunction results in a condition that is likely to cause death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect or malfunction has been subject to repair two or more times, and you have directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in writing of the need for its repair, (2) the same substantial defect or malfunction of a less serious nature than category (1) has been subject to repair four or more times and you have directly notified us in writing of the need for its repair, or (3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of repair of the same or different substantial defects or malfunctions for a cumulative total of more than 30 calendar days. Written notification should be sent to us, not a Maybach Studio, at Maybach Assistance Center, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC, Three Paragon Drive, Montvale, NJ 07645. 11 Introduction Operator’s Manual Maintenance The Maintenance Booklet describes all the necessary maintenance work which should be performed at regular intervals. Always have the Maintenance Booklet with you when you take the vehicle to your authorized Maybach Studio for service. The service advisor will record each service in the booklet for you. Roadside Assistance The Maybach Roadside Assistance Program provides factory trained technical help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assistance number 1-866-FOR-MAYBach (in the USA) 1-888-881-6611 (in Canada) will be answered by Maybach Assistance Representatives 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. For additional information refer to the Maybach Roadside Assistance Program brochure in your vehicle literature portfolio. 12 Change of address or ownership If you change your address, be sure to send in the “Change of Address Notice” found in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet, or simply call the Maybach Assistance Center at 1-866-FOR-MAYBach (in the USA) or 1-888-881-6611 (in Canada). It is in your own interest that we can contact you should the need arise. If you sell your Maybach, please leave all literature with the vehicle to make it available to the next operator. If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to send in the “Notice of Purchase of Used Car” found in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet, or call the Maybach Assistance Center at 1-866-FOR-MAYBach (in the USA) or 1-888-881-6611 (in Canada). Introduction Operator’s Manual Operating your vehicle outside the USA or Canada If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign countries, please be aware that: Certain Maybach models are available for delivery in Europe under our European Delivery Program. For details, consult an authorized Maybach Studio or write to:
Service facilities or replacement parts may not be readily available.
Unleaded gasoline for vehicles with catalytic converters may not be available; the use of leaded fuels will damage the catalysts. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC European Delivery Department One Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
Gasoline may have a considerably lower octane rating, and improper fuel can cause engine damage. In Canada: In the USA: Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. European Delivery Department 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 13 Introduction Where to find it This Operator’s Manual is designed to provide comprehensive support information for you, the vehicle operator. Each section has its own reference color. At a glance Controls in detail Technical data Here you will find detailed information about the equipment installed in your vehicle. This section expands on the “Getting started” section and also describes technical innovations. All important technical data for your Maybach can be found in this section. Here you will find an overview of all the controls that can be operated in the vehicle’s interior. Operation Getting started Here you will find all the information you need for the proper operation of your Maybach. Here you will find all the information you need for your first drive. Safety and Security Here you will find descriptions of the safety and security features of your Maybach. 14 Indexes The glossary provides explanations of the most important technical terms. The table of contents and the index are designed to help you find information quickly and easily. The following publications are part of your vehicle documentation: Practical hints
this Operator’s Manual This section provides fast assistance for dealing with problems you may encounter.
the Maintenance Booklet Separate operating instructions will be provided as required depending on the equipment options installed in your vehicle. Introduction Symbols  Symbols Trademarks:
Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG Inc.
ESP® is a registered trademark of DaimlerChrysler.
HomeLink® is a registered trademark of Prince, a Johnson Controls Company.
BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens Automotive Corp. The following symbols are found in this Operator’s Manual: * Optional equipment is identified with an asterisk. Since standard equipment varies between models, the descriptions and illustrations in this manual may differ slightly from the actual equipment of your Maybach. Warning! G Warning notices draw your attention to hazards that may endanger your health or life, or the health or life of others.  This symbol points to instructions for you to follow.  A number of these symbols appear- ing in succession indicates a multiplestep procedure.  page ! Highlights hazards that may result in damage to your vehicle.  i Helpful hints or further information you may find useful. This symbol tells you where to look for further information on a topic. This continuation symbol marks an interrupted procedure which will be continued on the next page. -> In the glossary of technical terms, this symbol is used to indicate cross-references to term definitions. DISPLAY Words appearing in the multifunction display are printed in the type shown here. ** Two asterisks designate standard equipment which the purchaser of the vehicle had the option to delete at the time the vehicle was ordered. 15 Introduction Operating safety Warning! G Work improperly carried out on electronic components and associated software could cause them to cease functioning. Because the vehicle’s electronic components are interconnected, any modifications made may produce an undesired effect on other systems. Electronic malfunctions could seriously impair the operating safety of your vehicle. See an authorized Maybach Studio for repairs or modifications to electronic components. Other improper work or modifications on the vehicle could also have a negative impact on the operating safety of the vehicle. Some safety systems only function while the engine is running. You should therefore never turn off the engine while driving. 16 Warning! G Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody or tires/wheels, for example when running over an obstacle, road debris or a pothole, may cause serious damage and impair the operating safety of your vehicle. If you feel a sudden significant vibration or ride disturbance, or you suspect that damage to your vehicle has occurred, you should turn on your hazard warning flashers, carefully slow down, and drive with caution to an area which is a safe distance from the road. Inspect the vehicle underbody and tires/ wheels for possible damage. If the vehicle appears unsafe, have it towed to the nearest authorized Maybach Studio or other qualified maintenance or repair facility for further inspection or repairs. Proper use of the vehicle Proper use of the vehicle requires that you are familiar with the following information and rules:
the safety precautions in this manual
the “Technical data” section in this manual
traffic rules and regulations
motor vehicle laws and safety standards Warning! G Various warning labels are attached to your vehicle. These warning labels are intended to make you and others aware of various risks. You should not remove any of these warning labels unless explicitly instructed to do so by information on the label itself. Removal of any of these labels may cause you and others to be unaware of certain risks which may result in an accident and/or personal injury. Introduction Problems with your vehicle  Problems with your vehicle If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to immediately contact your Maybach Relationship Manager at an authorized Maybach Studio to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. If the matter is not handled to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Maybach Studio management, or if necessary contact us at one of the following addresses: In the USA: Maybach Assistance Center Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Three Paragon Drive Montvale, NJ 07645 In Canada: Customer Relations Department Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 17 Introduction Reporting safety defects For the USA only: The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the “National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”. Reporting safety defects If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your Maybach Studio, the Maybach Assistance Center, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov. 18 Introduction Vehicle data recording  Vehicle data recording Information regarding electronic recording devices (Including notice pursuant to California Code § 9951) Please note that your vehicle is equipped with devices that can record vehicle systems data and, if equipped with the Tele Aid system, may transmit some data in certain accidents. This information helps, for example, to diagnose vehicle systems after a collision and to continuously improve vehicle safety. DaimlerChrysler may access the information and share it with others
for safety research or vehicle diagnosis purposes
with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee
in response to an official request by law enforcement or other government agency
for use in dispute resolution involving DaimlerChrysler, its affiliates or sales/service organization and/or
as otherwise required or permitted by law. Please check the Tele Aid subscription service agreement for details regarding the information that may be recorded or transmitted via that system. 19 20 At a glance Cockpit Instrument cluster Multifunction steering wheel Front center console Overhead control panel Driver’s door control panel Rear passenger compartment Rear seats Rear center seat* Rear center console Rear door control panel 21 At a glance Cockpit 22 At a glance Cockpit Item 1 Exterior lamp switch 2 Headlamp washer button Page 78, 155 206
High beam 79
Turn signals 79
Windshield wipers 80 4 Cruise control lever
Cruise control 248
Distronic** 251 5 Multifunction steering wheel 68, 174 6 Horn 24, 169 Page 8 Lever for voice control system, see separate operating instructions 9 Starter switch 3 Combination switch 7 Instrument cluster Item 62 Item Page e Glove box lid release 283 f Glove box lock 283 g Front center console 27 68 a Front Parktronic warning indicator 269 h Steering wheel adjustment stalk b Air vent grille with storage box 282 j Heated steering wheel switch 318 k Remote trunk opening/closing switch 132 c Overhead control panel 30 d Compartment for front telephone 284, 320 The Roadside Assistance button • and the Information button ¡ are located in the compartment for front telephone. 330 l Parking brake pedal m Hood lock release 83 356 n Parking brake release 83 o Door control panel 31 23 At a glance Instrument cluster 24 At a glance Instrument cluster Item Page Item 1 Coolant temperature gauge 170 a A 2 Fuel gauge with fuel reserve warning lamp 410 3 L Left turn signal indicator lamp 4 Speedometer 5 v ABS/ESP® lamp 6 l 7 K 1 Distance warning lamp1 Right turn signal indicator lamp 107, 109, 410 251, 411 79 8 Tachometer 171 9 - 107, 411 Antilock Brake System (ABS) indicator lamp Item High beam headlamp indicator lamp 159 k H b J Reset button 169 169 c < Seat belt telltale 94, 412 l Knob for instrument cluster illumination m ? Engine malfunction indicator lamp, USA only 415 ± Engine malfunction indicator lamp, Canada only 415 n ; Brake warning lamp, USA only 414 3 Brake warning lamp, Canada only 414 o 1 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) indicator lamp 88, 413 79 172 warning Page d Digital clock (see separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) e Gear selector lever position and program mode 198 f Main odometer 173 g Trip odometer 171 h Multifunction display 173 j Outside temperature indicator 171 Page Tire inflation pressure warning lamp 412 Vehicles without Distronic**: Warning lamp without function. It illuminates when the ignition is on. It should go out when the engine is running. 25 At a glance Multifunction steering wheel Item Page 1 Multifunction display Operating control system 2 Selecting the submenu or setting the volume: Press button 174 Page 4 Menu systems: Press button è for next menu ÿ for previous menu 5 Moving within a menu: æ up/to increase Press button ç down/to decrease j for next display k for previous display 3 Telephone: Press button 26 173 Item s to take a call to dial a call t to end a call to reject an incoming call At a glance Front center console  Front center console Upper part Item Page Item 1 Hazard warning flasher on/ off switch 161 7 Automatic climate control 2 Anti-theft alarm system indicator lamp 116 8 Chrome label for opening cover of: 3 Central locking switch 139 4 Central unlocking switch 139 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp 101 6 COMAND (see separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) Page 212
Cup holders 295
Button for opening/closing rear window curtain 307
Button for opening/closing rear door window curtains* 309 27 At a glance Front center console Lower part Maybach 57 and Maybach 62 without partition* Item Page 1 KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button 63, 76 2 Gear selector lever for automatic transmission 75 3 Parking Assist System (PAS) parallel parking button 277 4 Button for retracting/extending rear seat head restraints 145 5 Parking assist (Parktronic system) deactivation button 270 6 Two-way intercom* on/off button (only Maybach 62) 315 Item Page 7 Chrome label for opening cover of:
Ashtray 298
Lighter 300
Storage compartment* 301 8 Thumbwheel for setting distance in Distronic** 259 9 Distance warning function** on/off button 259 a Level control button 266 b Airmatic DC button 264 c Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) control switch 111 d Program mode selector switch for automatic transmission 203 i Depending on equipment, the arrangement of switches and buttons may vary. 28 At a glance Front center console Maybach 62 with partition* Item Page Item 1 KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button 63, 76 8 Partition* opening/closing button 2 Gear selector lever for automatic transmission 75 9 Chrome label for opening cover of: 3 Parking Assist System (PAS) parallel parking button 277 4 Button for retracting/extending rear seat head restraints 145 5 Parking assist (Parktronic system) deactivation button 270 6 Two-way intercom on/off button 315 7 Button for opening/closing partition* curtain 314 Page 312
Ashtray 298
Lighter 300
Storage compartment* 301 a Thumbwheel for setting distance in Distronic** 259 b Distance warning function** on/off button 259 c Level control button 266 d Airmatic DC button 264 e Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) control switch 111 f Program mode selector switch for automatic transmission 203 i Depending on equipment, the arrangement of switches and buttons may vary. 29 At a glance Overhead control panel Item 30 Page 1 Left front reading lamp on/off 162 2 Rear interior lighting on/off 162 3 Interior lighting control 162 4 Right front reading lamp on/off 162 5 Front interior lighting on/off 162 6 Tow-away alarm button 117 7 Rear view mirror 70, 206 8 Garage door opener 335 9 Auto-dimming function on/ off 206 Item Page a Hands-free microphone for:
Telephone 319
Tele Aid (emergency call system) 325
Voice control system, see separate operating instructions b Tele Aid (emergency call system) button 325 c Switch for opening/closing power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 57) 237 Switch for opening/closing power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 62) 240 Switch for operating electrotransparent roof* screen 245 At a glance Driver’s door control panel  Driver’s door control panel Item Page 1 Inside door handle 130 2 Memory function (for storing seat, mirror and steering wheel settings) 154 3 Seat adjustment Item Page 7 Override switch for rear passenger compartment 105 8 Switches for opening/closing rear door windows 233 209 9 Button for opening storage compartment 285 4 Button for folding exterior mirrors in and out 285 5 Exterior mirror adjustment 70 a Handle for opening storage compartment 6 Switches for opening/closing front door windows 233 b Seat ventilation* 151 c Seat heating 150 65 31 At a glance Rear passenger compartment Maybach 57 (vehicles without rear center seat*) 32 At a glance Rear passenger compartment Item Page Item Page 1 Vanity mirror, left 281 5 Vanity mirror, right 2 Speedometer 172 3 Clock (see separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) 172 6 Video monitor, right (see separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) 289 4 Outside temperature gauge 171 7 Button for opening multifunction compartment*, right 8 Automatic climate control panel 289 281 Item Page 9 Button for opening storage compartment/drawer 287 a Button for opening multifunction compartment*, left 289 b Video monitor, left (see separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) 33 At a glance Rear passenger compartment Maybach 57 (vehicles with rear center seat*) 34 At a glance Rear passenger compartment Item Page Item Page Item 1 Vanity mirror, left 281 5 Vanity mirror, right 2 Speedometer 172 3 Clock (see separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) 172 6 Video monitor, right (see separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) 289 4 Outside temperature gauge 171 7 Button for opening multifunction compartment*, right a Button for opening multifunction compartment*, left 8 Automatic climate control panel 228 b Video monitor, left (separate COMAND and RearCabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) 281 9 Vehicles with rear center seat*: control panel for rear functions in rear center console Page 49 289 35 At a glance Rear passenger compartment Maybach 62 without partition* 36 At a glance Rear passenger compartment Item Page 1 Vanity mirror, left 281 2 Speedometer 172 3 Clock (see separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) 172 4 Outside temperature gauge 171 5 Vanity mirror, right 281 Item Page 6 Video monitor, right (see separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) Item Page a Button for opening storage compartment/drawer 287 Vehicles with rear center seat*: control panel for rear functions in the storage compartment/drawer 52, 55 7 Button for opening upper storage compartment 289 8 Button for opening multifunction compartment*, right 289 b Button for opening multifunction compartment*, left 9 Automatic climate control panel 228 c Video monitor, left (see separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) 289 37 At a glance Rear passenger compartment Maybach 62 with partition* 38 At a glance Rear passenger compartment Item Page 1 Vanity mirror, left 281 2 Speedometer 172 3 Clock (see separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) 172 4 Outside temperature gauge 5 Vanity mirror, right Item Page 6 Video monitor, right (see separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) Item Page a Button for opening storage compartment/drawer 287 Vehicles with rear center seat*: control panel for rear functions in the storage compartment/drawer 52, 55 7 Button for opening upper storage compartment 288 171 8 Storage pocket, right 290 b Storage pocket, left 228 281 9 Automatic climate control panel c Video monitor, left (see separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) 290 39 At a glance Rear seats Maybach 57 40 At a glance Rear seats Item Page 1 Rear Parktronic warning indicator 269 2 Button for opening upper storage compartment with insert for two champagne flutes 290 3 Chrome label for opening DVD player, AUX sockets and headphone jacks (see separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) 290 4 Chrome label for opening CD changer compartment (see separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) 290 Item 5 Chrome label for opening middle storage compartment 6 Door control panel, left Page 290 57 7 Handle for opening left door storage compartment for headphones 285 8 Handle for opening left door storage compartment 285 9 Center armrest with Item a Rear center console Page 48 b Rear-cabin cup holder 295 c 12-V socket 305 d Adjustment switch for left multicontour seat 148 e Folding table* 302 f Folding table* 302 g Adjustment switch for right multicontour seat 148
Storage compartment for telephone 323 h Handle for opening right door storage compartment 285
Storage compartment underneath 290 285
Refrigerator** underneath 303 j Handle for opening right door storage compartment for headphones k Door control panel, right 57 41 At a glance Rear seats Maybach 62 42 At a glance Rear seats Item Page Item Page 1 Rear Parktronic warning indicator 269 6 Door control panel, left 285 2 Button for opening upper storage compartment with insert for two champagne flutes 290 7 Handle for opening left door storage compartment for headphones 8 Handle for opening left door storage compartment 285 3 Chrome label for opening DVD player, AUX sockets and headphone jacks (see separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) 290 4 Chrome label for opening CD changer compartment (see separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) 290 5 Chrome label for opening middle storage compartment 290 58 Item d Rear center console Page 48 e Rear-cabin cup holder 295 f 12-V socket 305 g Folding table 302 h Folding table 302 148 9 Button for opening storage compartment 286 j Adjustment switch for right multicontour seat a Storage compartment 286 285 b Adjustment switch for left multicontour seat 148 k Handle for opening right door storage compartment for headphones c Center armrest with 323 l Handle for opening right door storage compartment 285 m Button for opening storage compartment 286 n Storage compartment 286
Storage compartment for telephone
Storage compartment underneath 290
Refrigerator** underneath 303 o Door control panel, right 58 43 At a glance Rear center seat* Maybach 57 44 At a glance Rear center seat* Item 1 Rear Parktronic warning indicator Page 269 2 Rear center backrest
DVD player compartment, CD changer compartment, AUX sockets and headphone jacks located behind backrest (see separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) 292
Storage compartment between the rear outer seats located behind backrest 292
Center armrest with storage compartment for telephone (backrest folded down) 323 Item
Page Vehicles with rear center seat*: Center armrest with storage compartment (backrest folded down) for
telephone and
control panel for rear functions 3 Door control panel, left 323 49 57 Item Page 7 Adjustment switch for left multicontour seat 148 8 12-V socket 305 9 Switch for rear center seat head restraints 146 a Cup holder 296 b Adjustment switch for right multicontour seat 148 4 Handle for opening left door storage compartment for headphones 285 c Handle for opening right door storage compartment for ashtray 285 5 Handle for opening left door storage compartment for ashtray 285 d Handle for opening right door storage compartment for headphones 285 6 Cup holder 296 e Door control panel, right 57 45 At a glance Rear center seat* Maybach 62 46 At a glance Rear center seat* Item 1 Rear Parktronic warning indicator Page 269 2 Rear center backrest
DVD player compartment, CD changer compartment, AUX sockets and headphone jacks located behind backrest (see separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) 292
Storage compartment between the rear outer seats located behind backrest 292
Center armrest with storage compartment for telephone (backrest folded down) 323 Item
Page Vehicles with rear center seat*: Center armrest with storage compartment (backrest folded down) for
telephone and 323
control panel for rear functions 52, 55 3 Door control panel, left 58 Item Page 8 Storage compartment 286 9 Cup holder 296 a 12-V socket 305 b Switch for rear center seat head restraints 146 c Cup holder 296 d Adjustment switch for right multicontour seat 149 4 Handle for opening left door storage compartment for headphones 285 e Handle for opening right door storage compartment for headphones 285 5 Handle for opening left door storage compartment for ashtray 285 f Handle for opening right door storage compartment for ashtray 285 6 Adjustment switch for left multicontour seat 149 g Button for opening storage compartment 286 7 Button for opening storage compartment 286 h Storage compartment 286 j Door control panel, right 58 47 At a glance Rear center console Maybach 57 Item Page 1 Left reading lamp on/off 163 2 Tele Aid (emergency call system) button 325 3 Right reading lamp on/off 163 4 Ambient lighting on/off 163 Rear interior lamps on/off 163 5 Thumbwheel for dimming ambient lighting 163 6 Cover of compartment with: Example with rear door window curtains* i Depending on equipment, the arrangement of switches and buttons may vary. 48
Ashtray 298
Lighter 300
Storage compartment* 301 Item Page 7 Button for opening/closing rear right side door window curtain* 309 8 Button for opening/closing rear window curtain (only if equipped with rear door window curtains*) 307 9 Button for opening/closing rear left side door window curtain* 309 a Rear interior lamps on/off 163 Button for opening/closing rear window curtain (only if not equipped with rear door window curtains*) 307 b Central unlocking switch 139 c Central locking switch 139 At a glance Rear center console Control panel for rear functions* in rear center console (vehicles with rear center seat*) Item Page 1 Left reading lamp on/off 163 2 Tele Aid (emergency call system) button 325 3 Right reading lamp on/off 163 4 Ambient lighting on/off 163 Rear interior lamps on/off 163 5 Thumbwheel for dimming ambient lighting 163 Item 6 Rear interior lamps on/off Button for opening/closing rear window curtain (only if not equipped with rear door window curtains*) Page 163 307 7 Central locking switch 139 8 Central unlocking switch 139 i Depending on equipment, the arrangement of switches and buttons may vary. 49 At a glance Rear center console Control panel for rear window curtains* in rear armrest compartment (vehicles with rear center seat*) (The mobile phone shown is not an available option and is subject to change) 50 Item Page 1 Button for opening/closing rear right side door window curtain* 309 2 Button for opening/closing rear window curtain (only if equipped with rear door window curtains*) 307 3 Button for opening/closing rear left side door window curtain* 309 At a glance Rear center console Maybach 62 with power tilt/sliding sunroof Item Page 1 Left reading lamp on/off 165 2 Tele Aid (emergency call system) button 325 3 Right reading lamp on/off 165 4 Ambient lighting on/off 165 5 Headliner lamps and pillar uplights on/off Depending on equipment, the arrangement of switches and buttons may vary. Page a Switch for raising/lowering power tilt/sliding sunroof 242 b Button for opening/closing rear right side door window curtain* 309 165 c Button for opening/closing rear window curtain 307 6 Thumbwheel for dimming ambient lighting and headliner lamps and pillar uplights 165 d Button for opening/closing rear left side door window curtain* 309 312 7 Two-way intercom* volume thumbwheel 315 e Button for opening/closing partition* f Button for opening/closing partition* curtain 312 g Two-way intercom* on/off button 315 h Rear interior lamps on/off 165 j Central unlocking switch 139 k Central locking switch 139 8 Cover of compartment with: i Item
Ashtray 298
Lighter 300
Storage compartment* 301 9 Switch for opening/closing power tilt/sliding sunroof 242 51 At a glance Rear center console Control panel for rear functions* in storage compartment/drawer (vehicles with rear center seat*) i Depending on equipment, the arrangement of switches and buttons may vary. 52 Item Page Item Page 1 Tele Aid (emergency call system) button 325 7 Two-way intercom* on/off button 315 2 Right reading lamp on/off 165 8 Rear interior lamps on/off 165 3 Ambient lighting on/off 165 9 Central locking switch 139 4 Headliner lamps and pillar uplights on/off 165 a Central unlocking switch 139 b Left reading lamp on/off 165 5 Thumbwheel for dimming ambient lighting and headliner lamps and pillar uplights 165 6 Two-way intercom* volume thumbwheel 315 c Remote control (see separate COMAND and RearCabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) At a glance Rear center console Control panel for rear functions* in rear armrest compartment (vehicles with rear center seat*) Item Page 1 Switch for opening/closing power tilt/sliding sunroof 242 2 Switch for raising/lowering power tilt/sliding sunroof Item Page 309 242 5 Button for opening/closing rear left side door window curtain* 312 3 Button for opening/closing rear right side door window curtain* 309 6 Button for opening/closing partition* 7 Button for opening/closing partition* curtain 312 4 Button for opening/closing rear window curtain 307 (The mobile phone shown is not an available option and is subject to change) i Depending on equipment, the arrangement of switches and buttons may vary. 53 At a glance Rear center console Maybach 62 with electrotransparent roof* Item Page 1 Left reading lamp on/off 166 2 Tele Aid (emergency call system) button 325 3 Right reading lamp on/off 166 4 Ambient lighting on/off 166 5 Roof lighting on/off 166 6 Thumbwheel for dimming ambient lighting or roof lighting 7 Two-way intercom* volume thumbwheel Depending on equipment, the arrangement of switches and buttons may vary. 54 Page a Switch for making electrotransparent roof* opaque/transparent 246 b Button for opening/closing rear right side door window curtain* 309 c Button for opening/closing rear window curtain 307 166 309 315 d Button for opening/closing rear left side door window curtain* e Button for opening/closing partition* 312 f Button for opening/closing partition* curtain 312 g Two-way intercom* on/off button 315 h Rear interior lamps on/off 166 j Central unlocking switch 139 k Central locking switch 139 8 Cover of compartment with: i Item
Ashtray 298
Lighter 300
Storage compartment* 301 9 Switch for opening/closing electrotransparent roof* screen 246 At a glance Rear center console Control panel for rear functions* in storage compartment/drawer (vehicles with rear center seat*) Item Page Item Page 1 Tele Aid (emergency call system) button 325 7 Two-way intercom* on/off button 315 2 Right reading lamp on/off 166 8 Rear interior lamps on/off 166 3 Ambient lighting on/off 166 9 Central locking switch 139 4 Roof lighting on/off 166 a Central unlocking switch 139 5 Thumbwheel for dimming ambient lighting or roof lighting 166 b Left reading lamp on/off 166 6 Two-way intercom* volume thumbwheel 315 c Remote control (see separate COMAND and RearCabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) i Depending on equipment, the arrangement of switches and buttons may vary. 55 At a glance Rear center console Control panel for rear functions* in rear armrest compartment (vehicles with rear center seat*) (The mobile phone shown is not an available option and is subject to change) i Depending on equipment, the arrangement of switches and buttons may vary. 56 Item Page 1 Switch for opening/closing electrotransparent roof* screen 246 2 Switch for making electrotransparent roof* opaque/transparent 246 3 Button for opening/closing rear right side door window curtain* 309 Item Page 4 Button for opening/closing rear window curtain 307 5 Button for opening/closing rear left side door window curtain* 309 6 Button for opening/closing partition* 312 7 Button for opening/closing partition* curtain 312 At a glance Rear door control panel  Rear door control panel Maybach 57 Item 1 Page 1 Selection switch for right front passenger seat adjustment1 147 2 Selection switch for right rear seat adjustment1 147 3 Memory button for storing rear seat positions 154 4 Inside door handle 130 5 Seat ventilation* 151 6 Seat heating 150 7 Seat adjustment 142 8 Switches for opening/closing rear door window 233 These switches are located on the right rear passenger side only. 57 At a glance Rear door control panel Maybach 62 Item 1 58 Page 1 Selection switch for right front passenger seat adjustment1 147 2 Selection switch for right rear seat adjustment1 147 3 Memory button for storing rear seat positions 154 4 Inside door handle 130 5 Switch for moving seat to fully reclined position 143 6 Seat ventilation* 151 7 Seat heating 150 8 Switch for moving seat to upright position 143 9 Seat adjustment 143 a Switches for opening/closing rear door window 233 These switches are located on the right rear passenger side only. Getting started Unlocking Adjusting Driving Parking and locking 59 Getting started Unlocking The “Getting started” section provides an overview of the vehicle’s most basic functions.  Press unlock button Œ on the Unlocking with the SmartKey SmartKey. All turn signal lamps flash once. The vehicle unlocks. The locking knobs in the doors move up. The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed. If you are already familiar with the basic functions described here, the “Controls in detail” section will provide you with further information. The corresponding page references are located at the end of each segment. i The electro-hydraulic brake system is activated ( page 112).  Get in the vehicle and insert the SmartKey in the starter switch. SmartKey with remote control 1 2 3 4  Panic button ( page 106) Š Opening button for trunk Œ Unlock button ‹ Lock button Warning! G When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. 60 For more information, see “SmartKey” ( page 120). Getting started Unlocking Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO** With the KEYLESS-GO function, you can lock and unlock the vehicle without using the remote control buttons on the SmartKey and start the engine without inserting the SmartKey in the starter switch. i To unlock the vehicle, the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be outside the vehicle, no further than approximately 3 feet (1 meter) away from the door. Warning! G When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.  Grasp an outside door handle. All turn signal lamps flash once. The vehicle unlocks. The locking knobs in the doors move up. The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed. i If the vehicle has been parked for more than 72 hours, you must pull an outside door handle in order to activate the KEYLESS-GO function. i The electro-hydraulic brake system is activated ( page 112).  Get in the vehicle. For more information, see “SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO**” ( page 124). 61 Getting started Unlocking Starter switch positions Warning! G 0 For removing SmartKey i 1 Power supply for some electrical consumers, such as seat adjustment 2 Ignition (power supply for all electrical consumers) and driving position. All lamps (except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated) in the instrument come on. If a lamp in the instrument cluster fails to come on when the ignition is switched on, have it checked and replaced if necessary. If a lamp in the instrument cluster remains on after starting the engine or comes on while driving, refer to “Lamps in instrument cluster” ( page 410). When you switch on the ignition, the indicator and warning lamps (except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated) in the instrument cluster come on. The indicator and warning lamps (except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps if activated) should go out when the engine is running. This indicates that the respective systems are operational. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. SmartKey 3 Starter switch 62 Starting position i The SmartKey can only be removed from the starter switch with the gear selector lever in position P. Getting started Unlocking ! SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** If the SmartKey can still not be turned, the battery may not be sufficiently charged. Pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button on the gear selector lever corresponds to turning the SmartKey to the various starter switch positions.

Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary ( page 471). Get a jump start ( page 476). To prevent accelerated battery discharge or a completely discharged battery, always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch. If you firmly depress the brake pedal during pressing KEYLESS-GO start/stop button, the engine starts automatically. i The function of the SmartKey overrules the KEYLESS-GO function. KEYLESS-GO start/stop button 1 USA only 2 Canada only For information on starting the engine using the SmartKey, see “Starting with the SmartKey” ( page 75). 63 Getting started Unlocking The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be located in the vehicle.  Make sure the gear selector lever is set to P.  Do not depress the brake pedal. Position 0 Before you press the KEYLESS-GO start/ stop button, the vehicle’s on-board electronics have status 0 (as with SmartKey removed). Position 1  Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop button once. This supplies power for some electrical consumers, such as seat adjustment. i If you now press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button 64
once again, the ignition (position 2) is switched on
twice, the power supply is again switched off Ignition (or position 2) i  Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop button If you now press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button once, the power supply is again switched off. twice. This supplies power for all electrical consumers. All lamps in the instrument cluster (except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated) come on. If a lamp in the instrument cluster fails to come on when the ignition is switched on, have it checked and replaced if necessary. If a lamp in the instrument cluster remains on after starting the engine or comes on while driving, refer to “Lamps in instrument cluster” ( page 410). i When you switch on the ignition, the indicator and warning lamps (except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated) in the instrument cluster come on. The indicator and warning lamps (except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps if activated) should go out when the engine is running. This indicates that the respective systems are operational. For information on starting the engine using the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button, see “Starting with KEYLESS-GO**” ( page 75). Getting started Adjusting  Adjusting Warning! G All seat, head restraint, steering wheel, and rear view mirror adjustments, as well as fastening of seat belts, must be done before the vehicle is put into motion. Seats Warning! G Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving. Adjusting the seat while driving could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat back in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous. You could slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under it, the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat belts provide the best restraint when the wearer is in a nearly upright position and belts are properly positioned on the body. Only the reclining seat (in Maybach 62 rear cabin) can be used in a reclined position with seat belts properly fastened while the vehicle is in motion. The reclining seat in the Maybach 62 rear cabin includes a belt system and kinematic electronic controls that are designed to maintain proper support and restraint-system effectiveness in all seat settings in the event of a collision or similar situation. Your seat must be adjusted so that you can correctly fasten your seat belt ( page 72). Never place hands under the seat or near any moving parts while a seat is being adjusted. Warning! G When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Even with the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** removed from the starter switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** removed from the vehicle, the power seats can be operated when the respective door is open. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. 65 Getting started Adjusting Warning! G Children 12 years old and under must never ride in the front seat, except in a Maybach authorized BabySmartTM compatible child seat, which operates with the BabySmartTM system installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger front airbag when it is properly installed. Otherwise they will be struck by the airbag when it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury will result. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. Infants and small children must ride in back seats and be seated in an appropriate infant or child restraint system, which is properly secured with the vehicle’s seat belt and top tether strap, or secured via lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer’s instructions. 66 A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is not properly secured in the child restraint. Seat adjustment The seat adjustment switches are located on each door.  Switch on the ignition ( page 62). or  Open the respective door. i The memory function ( page 152) lets you store settings for the seat positions together with the settings for the steering wheel and rear view mirrors. Seat fore and aft adjustment  Press switch forward or backward in direction of arrow 1. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Seat fore and aft adjustment Seat height Seat cushion tilt Seat backrest tilt Seat cushion depth Head restraint height Adjust to a comfortable seating position that still allows you to reach the accelerator/brake pedal safely. The position should be as far to the rear as possible, corresponding to the driver’s ability to properly operate the controls. ! When moving the seat, make sure there are no items in the footwell or behind the seats. Otherwise you could damage the seats. Getting started Adjusting Seat height Head restraint height  Press switch up or down in direction  Press switch up or down in direction of arrow 2. Seat cushion tilt  Press switch up or down in direction of arrow 3 until your upper legs are lightly supported. Seat backrest tilt  Press switch forward or backward in direction of arrow 4 until your arms are slightly angled when holding the steering wheel. Seat cushion depth  Press switch forward or backward in direction of arrow 5 until your legs are supported comfortably. Head restraint tilt of arrow 6. Warning! G For your protection, drive only with properly positioned head restraints. Adjust head restraint so that it is as close to the head as possible and the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level. This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation. Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident. Manually adjust the angle of the head restraint.  Push or pull on the lower edge of the head restraint cushion. i Adjust the head restraint in such a way that it is as close to the head as possible. For more information, see “Seats” ( page 141). 67 Getting started Adjusting Steering wheel Warning! G Steering wheel adjustment i The stalk is located on the lower lefthand side of the steering wheel. The memory function ( page 152) lets you store settings for the steering wheel together with settings for the rear view mirrors and seat positions. Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. Adjusting the steering wheel while driving could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Adjusting steering column in or out  Move stalk forward or backward in When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Even with the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** removed from the starter switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** removed from the vehicle, the steering wheel adjustment feature can be operated when the driver’s door is open. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. 68 direction of arrow 1 until a comfortable steering wheel position is reached with your arms slightly bent at the elbow. Adjusting steering column up or down 1 Adjusting steering column, in or out 2 Adjusting steering column, up or down  Switch on the ignition ( page 62). or  Open the driver’s door.  Move the stalk up or down in direc- tion of arrow 2. Make sure your legs can move freely and that all of the displays (including malfunction and indicator lamps) on the instrument cluster are clearly visible. For more information, see “Heated steering wheel” ( page 318). Getting started Adjusting Easy-entry/exit feature Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could open the driver’s door and unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit feature, which could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. This feature allows for easier entry into and exit from the vehicle. When entering and exiting the vehicle, the steering wheel is in its uppermost position. The easy-entry/exit feature can be activated or deactivated in the CONVENIENCE submenu of the control system ( page 196). With the easy-entry/exit feature activated, the steering wheel will return to its last set position when you G
You must make sure no one can become trapped or injured by the moving steering wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is activated.
Warning! close the driver’s door with the ignition switched on insert the SmartKey into the starter switch or press the KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button ( page 63) once with the driver’s door closed. To stop steering wheel adjustment, do one of the following: i
Move steering column stalk ( page 68). The last set steering wheel position is stored when
Press seat adjustment switch ( page 66).
Press one of the memory position buttons or the memory button M ( page 153).
the ignition is switched off
the position is stored in memory ( page 153) With the easy-entry/exit feature activated, the steering wheel tilts upwards when you
remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, or
open the driver’s door with the SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1 or the KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button in position 1 ( page 62). i If the current position for the steering wheel is in the uppermost tilt position, the steering wheel will no longer be able to move upward when the easy-entry/exit feature is activated. The adjustment procedure is briefly interrupted when the engine is started. 69 Getting started Adjusting Warning! G Let the system complete the adjustment procedure before setting the vehicle in motion. All steering wheel adjustment must be completed before setting the vehicle in motion. Driving off with the steering wheel still adjusting could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Mirrors Adjust the interior and exterior rear view mirrors before driving so that you have a good view of the road and traffic conditions. Warning! G In case of an accident, liquid electrolyte may escape the mirror housing if the mirror glass breaks. Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not allow the liquid to come into contact with eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system. In case it does, immediately flush affected area with water, and seek medical help if necessary. ! Electrolyte drops coming into contact with the vehicle paint finish can only be completely removed while in their liquid state and by applying plenty of water. 70 i The memory function ( page 152) lets you save the rear view mirror settings together with the settings for the steering wheel and seat positions. Interior rear view mirror  Manually adjust the interior rear view mirror. For more information, see “Rear view mirrors” ( page 206). Exterior rear view mirrors Warning! G With the exterior rear view mirrors folded in when driving the vehicle, you cannot observe surrounding traffic conditions and which could result in an accident. Before driving the vehicle, make sure the exterior rear view mirrors are folded out. Getting started Adjusting Warning! G The buttons are located on the driver’s door.  Switch on the ignition ( page 62).  Press button 1 for the driver’s side exterior rear view mirror or button 2 for the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror. Exercise care when using the passengerside exterior rear view mirror. The mirror surface is convex (outwardly curved surface for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror are closer than they appear. Check your interior rear view mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes.  Push adjustment button 3 up, down, left, or right according to the desired setting. ! 1 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror button 2 Passenger-side exterior rear view mirror button 3 Adjustment button For information on how to reposition the exterior mirror housing when it was forcibly pushed forward (hit from the rear) or forcibly pushed rearward (hit from the front), see “Power folding exterior rear view mirrors” ( page 208). i At low ambient temperatures, the exterior rear view mirrors will be heated automatically. For more information, see “Rear view mirrors” ( page 206). 71 Getting started Driving Warning! G Make sure that absolutely no objects are obstructing the pedals’ range of movement. Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all obstacles. If there are any floormats or carpets in the footwell, make sure that the pedals still have sufficient clearance. During sudden driving or braking maneuvers the objects could get caught between the pedals. You could then no longer brake or accelerate. Fastening the seat belts Warning! G Due to the considerably larger interior compared to other vehicles, for occupants in the rear of the vehicle not properly wearing their seat belts, the risk of injury in an accident is significantly increased. They are much more likely to be thrown around in the vehicle in slight frontal impacts or even during emergency braking maneuvers. 72 Always fasten your seat belt before driving off. Always make sure your passengers are properly restrained, even those sitting in the rear and pregnant women. Failure to wear and properly fasten and position your seat belt greatly increases your risk of injuries and their likely severity in an accident. You and your passengers should always wear seat belts. If you are ever in an accident, your injuries can be considerably more severe without your seat belt properly buckled. Without your seat belt buckled, you are much more likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, the possibility of injury or death is lessened if you are wearing your seat belt. The airbags can only provide the protection they were designed to afford if the occupants are wearing their seat belts ( page 88). Warning! G Children 12 years old and under must never ride in the front seat, except in a Maybach authorized BabySmartTM compatible child seat, which operates with the BabySmartTM system installed in the vehicle to deactivate the front passenger airbag when it is properly installed. Otherwise they will be struck by the airbag when it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury will result. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. Infants and small children must ride in back seats and be seated in an appropriate infant or child restraint system, which is properly secured with the vehicle’s seat belt and top tether strap, or secured via lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer’s instructions. Getting started Driving A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is not properly secured in the child restraint. Warning! G Never let more people ride in the vehicle than there are seat belts available. Be sure everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly restrained with a separate seat belt. Warning! Only the reclining seat (in Maybach 62 rear cabin) can be used in a reclined position with seat belts properly fastened while the vehicle is in motion. The reclining seat in the Maybach 62 rear cabin includes a belt system and kinematic electronic controls that are designed to maintain proper support and restraint-system effectiveness in all seat settings in the event of a collision or similar situation. Keep the door storage compartments closed while the vehicle is in motion. Failure to do so may cause the seat belt to catch at the rear and prevent proper positioning of the seat belt. G Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat backrest in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous. You could slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under it, the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint when the wearer is in a nearly upright position and the belt is properly positioned on the body. Warning! G Read and observe the additional warning notices printed in the “Safety and Security” section ( page 92). 1 2 3 4 Seat belt outlet Latch plate Buckle Release button  Pull the seat belt smoothly from the seat belt outlet 1.  Place the shoulder portion of the belt across the top of your shoulder and the lap portion across your hips.  Push latch plate 2 into buckle 3 un til it clicks. 73 Getting started Driving   If necessary, tighten the lap portion to a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion up. Proper use of seat belts:
Do not twist the belt when fastening.
Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder portion is located as close as possible to the middle of the shoulder (it should not touch the neck or pass under the arm).
Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips (over hip joint) and not across the abdomen.
Place the seat backrest in a nearly upright position.
Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time.
Do not fasten a seat belt around a person and another object at the same time. When using a seat belt to secure infant or toddler restraints or children in booster seats, always follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions. 74
Check your seat belt during travel to make sure it is properly positioned. Starting the engine
Make sure the seat belt is always fitted snugly. Take special care of this when wearing loose clothing. Warning! Warning! G Do not pass belts over sharp edges. They could tear. Do not allow the belt to get caught in the door or in the seat adjustment mechanism. This could damage the belt. Never attempt to make modifications to seat belts. This could impair the effectiveness of the belts. Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them. In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection. Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly stressed in an accident must be replaced. Contact an authorized Maybach Studio. G Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and possible death. Do not run the engine in confined areas (such as a garage) which are not properly ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas fumes are entering the vehicle while driving, have the cause determined and corrected immediately. If you must drive under these conditions, drive with at least one window fully open. Getting started Driving Automatic transmission Starting with the SmartKey Starting with KEYLESS-GO**  Make sure the gear selector lever is set to P. Warning!  Do not depress the accelerator. As long as the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is in your vehicle, the vehicle can be started. Therefore, never leave children unattended in the vehicle, as they could otherwise accidentally start the engine.  Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 3 and hold until the engine starts ( page 62). i Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission P Park position with gear selector lever lock R Reverse gear N Neutral D Drive position For more information, see “Automatic transmission” ( page 197). When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. You can also use the “touch-start” function. Turn the SmartKey to position 3 and release it again immediately. The engine then starts automatically. For more information, see “Turning off the engine with the SmartKey” ( page 84). G You can start your vehicle without a SmartKey using the KEYLESS-GO start/ stop button on the gear selector lever. In order to start the engine with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO:
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be located in the vehicle.
All the doors must be closed. 75 Getting started Driving  Firmly depress the brake pedal during  If you are starting the engine with the starting procedure. KEYLESS-GO**, close any doors that may be open to allow for better detection of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO**. The gear selector lever lock is released.  Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop button KEYLESS-GO start/stop button 1 USA only 2 Canada only i If the SmartKey’s battery is discharged, you cannot start the vehicle using the KEYLESS-GO function. Use the SmartKey instead.  Make sure the gear selector lever is set to P.  Do not depress the accelerator. 76 once. or The engine starts.  Start the engine with the SmartKey as For more information, see “Turning off the engine with KEYLESS-GO**” ( page 85). Starting difficulties If the engine does not start as described, carry out the following steps:  If you are starting the engine with the SmartKey, turn SmartKey in starter switch to position 0 and repeat starting procedure. radio signals from another source may be interfering with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO**.  Repeat the starting procedure ( page 74). Remember that extend- ed starting attempts can drain the battery.  Get a jump start ( page 476). If the engine does not start after several starting attempts, there could be a malfunction in the engine electronics or in the fuel supply system.  Notify an authorized Maybach Studio. Getting started Driving  Release the parking brake by pulling Parking brake on handle 1. The warning lamp ; (USA only) or 3 (Canada only) in the instrument cluster goes out. Driving off  Firmly depress brake pedal. ! In order to avoid damaging the transmission,
wait for the gear selection process to complete before setting the vehicle in motion
place the gear selector lever in position P or R only when the vehicle is stopped. The gear selector lever lock is released.  Move gear selector lever to Warning! Warning!  Release the brake pedal. position D or R. 1 Release handle 2 Parking brake pedal G When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could release the parking brake, which could result in an accident and/or serious injury.  Carefully depress the accelerator ped- G It is dangerous to shift the gear selector lever out of P or N if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal. al. Once the vehicle is in motion, the automatic central locking system engages and the locking knobs move down. ! If you hear a warning signal and the message RELEASE PARKING BRAKE appears in the multifunction display when driving off, you have forgotten to release the parking brake. Release the parking brake. 77 Getting started Driving ! ! Do not run cold engine at high engine speeds. Running a cold engine at high engine speeds may shorten the service life of the engine. Simultaneously depressing the accelerator pedal and applying the brake reduces engine performance and causes premature brake and drivetrain wear. Switching on headlamps Low beam headlamps The exterior lamp switch is located on the dashboard to the left of the steering wheel. i The vehicle automatically lock after driving off. The locking knobs in the doors move down. You can open a locked door from the inside. Open door only when conditions are safe to do so. You can deactivate the automatic locking using the control system ( page 195). Warning! G On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in order to obtain braking action. This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control. For more information, see “Driving instructions” ( page 343). Exterior lamp switch 1 Off 2 Low beam headlamps on  Turn exterior lamp switch to position B. The green indicator lamp C in the exterior lamp switch comes on. 78 Getting started Driving High beam The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column. Turn signals The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column. The combination switch resets automatically after major steering wheel movements. i To signal minor directional changes, e.g. passing or changing lanes, move combination switch to point of resistance only and release. The turn signal flashes three times. Combination switch Combination switch 1 High beam 2 High beam flasher 1 Turn signal, right 2 Turn signal, left  Push combination switch in direction  Press combination switch up 1 or of arrow 1. down 2. The high beam headlamp indicator lamp A in the instrument cluster comes on ( page 24). The corresponding turn signal indicator lamp L or K flashes in the instrument cluster ( page 24). For more information, see “Lighting” ( page 155). 79 Getting started Driving Windshield wipers The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column. ! Intermittent wiping Do not operate the windshield wipers when the windshield is dry. Dust that accumulates on a windshield might scratch the glass and/or damage the windshield wipers blades when wiping occurs on a dry windshield. If it is necessary to operate the windshield wipers in dry weather conditions, always operate the windshield wipers with windshield washer fluid ( page 81). Switching on windshield wipers Combination switch  Turn the combination switch to the 1 Single wipe Wiping with windshield washer fluid 2 Switching on windshield wipers desired position depending on the intensity of the rain. 0 Windshield wipers off  Switch on the ignition ( page 62). I Intermittent wiping II Normal wiper speed III Fast wiper speed 80 ! Do not leave windshield wipers in intermittent setting when vehicle is taken to an automatic car wash or during windshield cleaning. Windshield wipers will operate in the presence of water sprayed on the windshield, and windshield wipers may be damaged as a result. Intermittent wiping interval is dependent on wetness of windshield.  Turn the combination switch to posi- tion I. After the initial wipe, pauses between wipes are automatically controlled by the rain sensor. Getting started Driving i Wiping with windshield washer fluid Intermittent wiping is interrupted when the vehicle is at a standstill and a front door is opened. This protects persons getting into or out of the vehicIe from being sprayed.  Press the combination switch in direc- Intermittent wiping will be continued when
all doors are closed and
the gear selector lever is in position D or R or
the wiper setting is changed using the combination switch Single wipe  Press the combination switch briefly in direction of arrow 1 to the resistance point. The windshield wipers wipe one time without washer fluid.
tion of arrow 1 past the resistance point. The windshield wipers operate with washer fluid. i To prevent smears on the windshield, wipe with windshield washer fluid every now and then even when it is raining. turn off the engine by pressing the KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button ( page 63) and open the driver’s door (with the driver’s door open, starter switch is in position 0, same as with SmartKey removed from the starter switch) before attempting to remove any blockage.
Remove blockage.
Turn the windshield wipers on again. ! If anything blocks the windshield wipers (leaves, snow, etc.), switch them off immediately. If windshield wipers fail to function at all in the combination switch position I:

Set the combination switch to the next higher wiper speed.
Have the windshield wipers checked at the nearest authorized Maybach Studio. For safety reasons, stop the vehicle in a safe location and
remove the SmartKey from the starter switch or For information on filling up the washer reservoir, see “Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system” ( page 363). 81 Getting started Driving Problems while driving The engine runs erratically and misfires
An ignition cable may be damaged.
The engine electronics may not be operating properly.
Unburned gasoline may have entered the catalytic converter and damaged it.  Give very little gas.  Have the problem repaired by an au- thorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. The coolant temperature is above 248°F (120°C) In case of accident The coolant is too hot and is no longer cooling the engine.  Do not start the engine under any cir-  Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible and turn off the engine. Allow engine and coolant to cool.  Check the coolant level and add coolant if necessary ( page 361).  If problem persists, call 1-866-FOR-MAYBach (in the USA) or 1-888-881-6611 (in Canada). If the vehicle is leaking gasoline: cumstances.  Notify local fire and/or police author- ities. If the extent of the damage cannot be determined:  Notify an authorized Maybach Studio. If no damage can be determined on the
major assemblies
fuel system
engine mount:  Start the engine in the usual manner. 82 Getting started Parking and locking  Parking and locking You have now completed your first drive. You have properly stopped and parked your vehicle. End your drive as follows. Warning! G With the engine not running, there is no power assistance for the brake and steering systems. In this case, it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to brake or steer the vehicle. Warning! G Parking brake Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system, as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire. To reduce the risk of personal injury as a result of inadvertent vehicle movement, before turning off the engine and leaving the vehicle always:
Keep right foot firmly on brake pedal.
Firmly depress parking brake pedal.
Move the gear selector lever to position P.
Slowly release brake pedal.
When parked on an incline, turn front wheels towards the road curb.
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0 and remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, or press KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button ( page 63).
Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** with you and lock vehicle when leaving. 1 Release handle 2 Parking brake pedal  Step firmly on parking brake pedal 2. When the engine is running, the warning lamp ; (USA only) or 3 (Canada only) in the instrument cluster will be illuminated. 83 Getting started Parking and locking Warning! G When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could release the parking brake and/or move the gear selector lever from position P, either of which could result in an accident and/or serious injury. Warning! G Getting out of your vehicle with the gear selector lever not fully engaged in position P is dangerous. Also, when parked on an incline, position P alone may not prevent your vehicle from moving, possibly hitting people or objects. Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to position P ( page 75). When parked on an incline, turn front wheels towards the road curb. 84 Switching off headlamps  Turn the exterior lamp switch to M ( page 78). Turning off the engine with the SmartKey  Turn the SmartKey in the starter For more information, see “Lighting” ( page 155). switch to position 0 and remove it. Turning off the engine  Place the gear selector lever in position P. i i Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to position P. On slopes, turn the front wheels towards the curb. The immobilizer is activated. The SmartKey can only be removed from the starter switch with the gear selector lever in position P. i With the SmartKey removed and the driver’s door open, a warning sounds if the vehicle’s exterior lamps are not switched off. Getting started Parking and locking Turning off the engine with KEYLESS-GO**  Place the gear selector lever in P.  Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button ( page 63) until the engine shuts off. With the driver’s door closed, the starter switch is now in position 1. With the driver‘s door open, the starter switch is set to position 0, same as SmartKey removed from the starter switch. The immobilizer is activated. ! If you hear a warning signal, you have either
forgotten to switch off the vehicle’s exterior lamps, or
tried to turn off the engine while the gear selector lever is not in P. Turn off the lights or place the gear selector lever in P. Releasing seat belts  Press the seat belt release button ( page 73). Allow the retractor to completely rewind the seat belt by guiding the latch plate. ! Make sure the seat belt retracts fully so that the seat belt and/or latch plate cannot get caught or pinched in the door or in the seat mechanism. This can damage the seat belt and impair the effectiveness of the seat belt, and/or cause damage to the door and/or door trim panel. Such damage is not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. Damaged seat belts must be replaced. Contact an authorized Maybach Studio. 85 Getting started Parking and locking Locking with the SmartKey Locking Warning! G To prevent possible personal injury, always keep hands and fingers away from the door openings when closing the doors. Be especially careful when small children are around. Before closing doors, make sure there is no possibility of someone getting caught in a door during closing. Locking with KEYLESS-GO**  After exiting the vehicle, press lock button ‹ on the SmartKey ( page 60). With the trunk and all doors closed, all turn signal lamps flash three times. The locking knobs in the doors move down. The anti-theft alarm system is armed. For more information, see “SmartKey” ( page 120). 1 Lock button Warning! G When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. 86  After exiting the vehicle, press lock button 1 on the outside door handle or on the trunk lid ( page 134). With the trunk and all doors closed, all turn signal lamps flash three times. The locking knobs in the doors move down. The anti-theft alarm system is armed. For more information, see “SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO**” ( page 124). Safety and Security Occupant safety Panic alarm Driving safety systems Anti-theft systems 87 Safety and Security Occupant safety In this section you will learn the most important facts about the restraint systems of the vehicle. The 1 indicator lamp in the instrument cluster comes on
The restraint systems are:
Airbags
Seat belts
Emergency tensioning device
Child seats
Child seat recognition
Lower anchors and tethers for children (LATCH) As independent systems, their protective effects work in conjunction with each other. i For information on infants and children traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint systems for infants and children, see “Children in the vehicle” ( page 98). 88
for about 4 seconds when you turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1 or press the KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button ( page 63) once. It then goes out briefly, comes on again and remains lit until you start the engine. for about 4 seconds when you start the engine by turning the SmartKey or pressing the KEYLESS-GO** start/ stop button. i The 1 indicator lamp comes on and remains lit if the SmartKey is turned to position 2 and left there or the KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button is pressed twice. The indicator lamp will go out when you start the engine. The restraint systems are fully operational if the 1 indicator lamp is not lit when the engine is running. A malfunction in the system has been detected if the 1 indicator lamp:
fails to go out after approximately 4 seconds
does not come on at all
comes on after the engine was started or while driving For safety reasons, we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized Maybach Studio immediately to have the system checked. For more information on SRS, see “Practical hints” ( page 413). Safety and Security Occupant safety Warning! G In the event that the 1 indicator lamp comes on during driving or does not come on at all, the SRS self-check has detected a malfunction. For your safety, we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized Maybach Studio immediately to have the system checked; otherwise the SRS may not be activated when needed in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in injury. In addition, improper repair work on the SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or causing unintended airbag deployment. Work on the SRS must therefore only be performed by qualified technicians. Contact an authorized Maybach Studio. Airbags Warning! Warning! G Airbags are designed to reduce the potential of injury and fatality in certain frontal impacts (front airbags), side impacts (side impact airbags and head protection window curtain airbags) or rollovers (head protection window curtain airbags). However, no system available today can totally eliminate injuries and fatalities. The activation of the airbags temporarily releases a small amount of dust from the airbags. This dust, however, is neither injurious to your health, nor does it indicate a fire in the vehicle. The dust might cause some temporary breathing difficulty for people with asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid this, you may wish to get out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the vehicle after the airbag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window or door. G To reduce the risk of injury when the front airbags inflate, it is very important for the driver and front passenger to always be in a properly seated position and to wear your seat belts. For maximum protection in the event of a collision always be in normal seated position with your back against the seat backrest. Fasten your seat belt and make sure it is properly positioned on your body. Since the airbag inflates with considerable speed and force, a proper seating and hands on steering wheel position will help to keep you at a safe distance from the airbag. Occupants who are unbelted, out of position or too close to the airbag can be seriously injured or killed by an airbag as it inflates with great force in the blink of an eye:
Sit properly belted in a nearly upright position with your back against the seat backrest.  89 Safety and Security Occupant safety 
Adjust the driver’s seat as far as possible rearward, still permitting proper operation of vehicle controls. The distance from the center of the driver’s breastbone to the center of the airbag cover on the steering wheel must be at least 10 in (25 cm) or more. You should be able to accomplish this by a combination of adjustments to the seat and steering wheel. If you have any problems, please see an authorized Maybach Studio.

Occupants, especially children, should never lean their heads in the area of the door where the side airbag inflates. This could result in serious injuries or death should the airbag be triggered. Always sit nearly upright, properly use the seat belts and appropriate size infant or child restraint system.
Do not lean with your head or chest close to the steering wheel or dashboard.
Keep hands on the outside of steering wheel rim. Placing hands and arms inside the rim can increase the risk and potential severity of hand/arm injury when driver front airbag inflates. Children 12 years old and under must never ride in the front seat, except in a Maybach authorized BabySmartTM compatible child seat, which operates with the BabySmartTM system installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger front airbag when it is properly installed. Otherwise they will be struck by the airbag when it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury will result.
Adjust the front passenger seat as far as possible rearward from the dashboard when the seat is occupied. Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injuries to you or other occupants. If you sell your vehicle, it is important that you make the buyer aware of this safety information. Be sure to give the buyer this Operator’s Manual. 90 Warning! G Accident research shows that the safest place for children in an automobile is in the rear seat. Should you choose to place a child 12 years old or under in the front passenger seat of your vehicle, you must properly use a BabySmartTM child restraint which will turn off the passenger front airbag. BabySmartTM will not, however, turn off any side impact airbag. It should be noted that with respect to both front and rear side impact airbags there is a possibility for a side airbag related injury if occupants, especially children, are not properly seated or restrained when next to a side airbag which needs to deploy rapidly in a side impact in order to do its job. To help avoid the possibility of injury, please follow these guidelines: (1) Occupants, especially children, should never place their bodies or lean their heads in the area of the door where the side airbag inflates. This could result in serious injuries or death should the side airbag be activated. Safety and Security Occupant safety (2) Always sit nearly upright, properly use the seat belts and use an appropriately sized infant or child restraint system for all children 12 years old or under. (3) Always wear seat belts properly. If you believe that, even with the use of these guidelines, it would be safer for your rear seat occupants to have both rear seat mounted side airbags deactivated, then deactivation can be accomplished upon your written request to do so at an authorized Maybach Studio at an additional cost. Please contact your local authorized Maybach Studio or call our Maybach Assistance Center at 1-866-FOR-MAYBach (in the USA), or 1-888-881-6611 (in Canada). i Airbags are designed to activate only in certain frontal impacts (front airbags), side impacts (side impact and head protection window curtain airbags) which exceed preset thresholds and in certain rollovers (head protection window curtain airbags). Only during these events will they provide their supplemental protection. The driver and passengers should always wear their seat belts. Otherwise it is not possible for airbags to provide their supplemental protection. In case of other types of impacts and impacts below airbag deployment thresholds, airbags will not be activated. The driver and passenger will then be protected to the extent possible by a properly fastened seat belt. A properly fastened seat belt is also needed to provide the best possible protection in a rollover. We caution you not to rely on the presence of the airbags in order to avoid wearing your seat belt. Your vehicle was originally equipped with airbags that are designed to activate in certain impacts exceeding a preset threshold to reduce the potential and severity of injury. It is important for your safety and the safety of your passengers that you replace deployed airbags and repair any malfunctioning airbags to make sure the vehicle will continue to provide supplemental crash protection for occupants. 91 Safety and Security Occupant safety Safety guidelines for the seat belt, emergency tensioning device and airbag Warning!


92 G Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly stressed in an accident must be replaced and their anchoring points must also be checked. Use only belts installed or supplied by an authorized Maybach Studio. Airbags and emergency tensioning devices (ETDs) are designed to function on a one-time-only basis. An airbag or ETD that was activated must be replaced. No modifications of any kind may be made to any components or wiring of the SRS. This includes changing or removing any component or part of the SRS, the installation of additional trim material, seat covers, badges etc. over the steering wheel hub, passenger front airbag cover, outboard sides of the seat backrests, door trim panels, or door frame trims, and installation of additional electrical/electronic equipment on or near SRS components and wiring. Keep area between airbags and occupants free from objects (e.g. packages, purses, umbrellas, etc.).
Do not pass belts over sharp edges. They could tear.
Do not make any modification that could change the effectiveness of the belts.
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them. In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection.
Do not hang items such as coat hangers from the coat hooks or handles over the door. These items may turn into projectiles and cause head and other injuries when curtain airbag is deployed.
Never place your feet on the instrument panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always keep both feet on the floor in front of the seat.
Airbag system components will be hot after an airbag has inflated. Do not touch.
In addition, improper repair work on the SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or causing unintended airbag deployment. Work on the SRS must therefore only be performed by qualified technicians. Contact an authorized Maybach Studio.
For your protection and the protection of others, when scrapping the airbag unit or emergency tensioning device, our safety instructions must be followed. These instructions are available from your authorized Maybach Studio.
Given the considerable deployment speed and the textile structure of the airbags, there is the possibility of abrasions or other, potentially more serious injuries resulting from airbag deployment. When you sell your vehicle, we strongly urge you to give notice to the subsequent owner that it is equipped with an SRS by alerting them to the applicable section in the Operator’s Manual. Safety and Security Occupant safety Warning! G Only use seat covers which have been tested and approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles. Using other seat covers may interfere with or prevent the deployment of the side impact airbags. Contact an authorized Maybach Studio for availability. Front airbags Driver’s and front passenger airbags are deployed:
in the event of certain frontal impacts
if impact exceeds a preset deployment threshold The airbags will not deploy in impacts which do not exceed the system’s deployment thresholds. You will then be protected by the fastened seat belts. The passenger front airbag will only be deployed if:
the front passenger seat is occupied
the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp in the center console is not lit ( page 101)
the impact exceeds a preset deployment threshold 1 Driver’s airbag 2 Passenger airbag ! Do not place objects heavier than 20 lbs (9 kg) on the front passenger seat. This could cause the front or side impact airbag on the front passenger side to deploy in a crash which exceeds the system’s deployment threshold. 93 Safety and Security Occupant safety Side impact airbags Window curtain airbags The side impact airbags are deployed: The side window curtain airbags are deployed:
in impacts exceeding a preset deployment threshold
on the impacted side of the vehicle
independently of the front airbags The side impact airbags are not deployed in impacts which do not exceed the system’s deployment threshold.
in impacts exceeding a preset deployment threshold
on the impacted side of the vehicle
independently of the front airbags
in certain vehicle rollovers Always wear your seat belt. All vehicle occupants always need to have their seat belts fastened and wear them properly. The front passenger side impact airbag will only deploy if the system senses that the front passenger seat is occupied. In addition, applicable motor vehicle safety laws require you to wear seat belts. Even where this is not the case, we strongly recommend that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened and wear them properly. 1 Front window curtain airbag 2 Rear window curtain airbag The window curtain airbags fill up the area indicated by the arrows. 1 Front side impact airbags 2 Rear side impact airbags 94 Seat belts When the engine is started, the seat belt telltale < illuminates to remind you and your passengers to fasten your seat belts. If the driver’s seat belt is not fastened before the engine is started, the seat belt telltale < illuminates and a warning chime sounds for approximately 6 seconds when the engine is started. For more information on fastening seat belts, see “Getting started” ( page 72). i For information on infants and children traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint systems for infants and children, see “Children in the vehicle” ( page 98). Safety and Security Occupant safety Warning! G Due to the considerably larger interior compared to other vehicles, for occupants in the rear of the vehicle not properly wearing their seat belts, the risk of injury in an accident is significantly increased. They are much more likely to be thrown around in the vehicle in slight frontal impacts or even during emergency braking maneuvers. Always fasten your seat belt before driving off. Always make sure your passengers are properly restrained, even those sitting in the rear and pregnant women. Failure to wear and properly fasten and position your seat belt greatly increases your risk of injuries and their likely severity in an accident. You and your passengers should always wear seat belts. If you are ever in an accident, your injuries can be considerably more severe without your seat belt properly buckled. Without your seat belt buckled, you are much more likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, the possibility of injury or death is lessened if you are properly wearing your seat belt. Airbags can only protect as they are designed if the occupants are properly wearing their seat belts. Warning! G Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat backrest in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous. You could slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under it, the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint when the wearer is in a nearly upright position and the belt is properly positioned on the body. that are designed to maintain proper support and restraint-system effectiveness in all seat settings in the event of a collision or similar situation. Keep the door storage compartments closed while the vehicle is in motion. Failure to do so may cause the seat belt to catch at the rear and prevent proper positioning of the seat belt. Warning! G Never let more people ride in the vehicle than there are seat belts available. Be sure everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly restrained with a separate seat belt. Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time.  Only the reclining seat (in Maybach 62 rear cabin) can be used in a reclined position with seat belts properly fastened while the vehicle is in motion. The reclining seat in the Maybach 62 rear cabin includes a belt system and kinematic electronic controls 95 Safety and Security Occupant safety  Warning! G Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly stressed in an accident must be replaced and their anchoring points must also be checked. Warning! Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them. In a crash, they may not be able to provide adequate protection. Have all work carried out only by qualified technicians. Contact an authorized Maybach Studio. 96
Never wear the shoulder belt under your arm, against your neck or off your shoulder. In a crash, your body would move too far forward. That would increase the chance of head and neck injuries. The belt would also apply too much force to the ribs or abdomen, which could severely injure internal organs such as your liver or spleen.
Never wear belts over rigid or breakable objects in or on your clothing, such as eyeglasses, pens, keys, etc., as these might cause injuries.
Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips and not across the abdomen. If the belt is positioned across your abdomen, it could cause serious injuries in a crash.
Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time. Do not fasten a seat belt around a person and another person or other objects.
Belts should not be worn twisted. In a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of the belt to manage impact forces. The twisted belt against your body could cause injuries. USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY
Seat belts can only work when used properly. Never wear seat belts in any other way than as described in this section, as that could result in serious injuries in case of an accident.
Each occupant should wear their seat belt at all times, because seat belts help reduce the likelihood of and potential severity of injuries in accidents, including rollovers. The integrated restraint system includes SRS (driver’s airbag, passenger front airbag, side impact airbags, head protection window curtain airbags for side windows), ETD (seat belt emergency tensioning device), and front seat knee bolsters. The system is designed to enhance the protection offered to properly belted occupants in certain frontal (front airbags and ETD) and side (side impact, window curtain airbags and ETD) impacts which exceed preset deployment thresholds and in certain rollovers (window curtain airbags). Only use seat belts which have been approved for Maybach vehicles. Do not make any modifications to the seat belts. This can lead to failure of the seat belts. G Safety and Security Occupant safety
Pregnant women should also use a lapshoulder belt. The lap belt portion should be positioned as low as possible on the hips to avoid any possible pressure on the abdomen.
Never place your feet on the instrument panel, dashboard or on the seat. Always keep both feet on the floor in front of the seat. Emergency tensioning device (ETD), seat belt force limiter The seat belts for the front and rear outer seats are equipped with emergency tensioning devices and belt force limiters. In an impact, emergency tensioning devices remove slack from the belts in such a way that the seat belts fit more snugly against the body. Belt force limiters reduce the force exerted by the seat belts on occupants during a crash. i The ETDs for the front seats will only activate if the respective front seat belt is fastened (latch plate properly inserted into buckle). The ETDs for the rear outer seats will activate with or without the respective seat belt fastened. ! Do not place objects heavier than 20 lbs (9 kg) on the front passenger seat. This could cause the front or side impact airbag on the passenger side and, with the seat belt fastened to secure the object, the ETD to deploy in a crash which exceeds the system’s deployment threshold. Automatic comfort-fit feature seat belt An automatic comfort-fit feature for front seats reduces the retracting force of the seat belts when they are in normal use. G The ETD is designed to activate in the following cases when: Warning!
in frontal or rear-end impacts exceeding a preset severity level An emergency tensioning device (ETD) that was activated must be replaced.
in certain vehicle rollovers
if the restraint systems are operational and functioning correctly, see 1 indicator lamp ( page 88). When disposing of the emergency tensioning device, our safety instructions must be followed. These are available at your authorized Maybach Studio. 97 Safety and Security Occupant safety Children in the vehicle If an infant or child is traveling with you in the vehicle:

Secure the child using an infant or child restraint appropriate to the age and size of the child. Make sure the infant or child is properly secured at all times while the vehicle is in motion. Infant and child restraint seats and information on choosing an appropriate restraint system can be obtained from any Maybach Studio. Warning! G Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child restraint system. The children could
injure themselves on parts of the vehicle
be seriously or fatally injured through excessive exposure to extreme heat or cold Do not expose the child restraint system to direct sunlight. The child restraint system’s metal parts, for example, could become very hot, and the child could be burned on these parts. If children open a door, they could
injure other persons
get out of the car and injure themselves or be injured by following traffic Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the passenger or cargo compartment unless they are firmly secured in place. For more information, see “Loading” ( page 280) and “Useful features” ( page 281). Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo increases a child’s risk of injury in the event of
strong braking maneuvers
sudden changes of direction
an accident Infant and child restraint systems Use only a BabySmartTM compatible child restraint for the front passenger seat in this vehicle. We recommend all infants and children be properly restrained at all times while the vehicle is in motion. All lap-shoulder belts except the driver’s seat belt have special seat belt retractors for secure fastening of child restraints. 98 Safety and Security Occupant safety To fasten a child restraint, follow child restraint instructions for mounting. Then pull the shoulder belt out completely and let it retract. During seat belt retraction, a ratcheting sound can be heard to indicate that the special seat belt retractor is activated. The belt is now locked. Push down on child restraint to take up any slack. To deactivate, release seat belt buckle and let seat belt retract completely. The seat belt can again be used in the usual manner. Warning! G ! The use of infant or child restraints is required by law in all 50 states, the District of Columbia, the U.S. territories and all Canadian provinces. Infants and small children should be seated in an appropriate infant or child restraint system properly secured by a lap-shoulder belt or, if so equipped, a child restraint lower anchorage system that complies with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210.2. A statement by the child restraint manufacturer of compliance with this standard can be found on the instruction label on the restraint and in the instruction manual provided with the restraint. When using any infant or child restraint system, be sure to carefully read and follow all manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use. Please read and observe warning labels affixed to inside of vehicle and to infant or child restraints. Never release the seat belt buckle while the vehicle is in motion, since the special seat belt retractor will be deactivated. i For more information on child seats with mounting fittings for tether anchorages ( page 102). For information on LATCH-type child seat mounts ( page 103). 99 Safety and Security Occupant safety Warning! G Children 12 years old and under must never ride in the front seat, except in a Maybach authorized BabySmartTM compatible child seat, which operates with the BabySmartTM system installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger front airbag when it is properly installed. Otherwise they will be struck by the airbag when it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury will result. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. Infants and small children must ride in back seats and be seated in an appropriate infant or child restraint system, which is properly secured with the vehicle’s seat belt and top tether strap, or secured via lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer’s instructions. 100 Warning! G Infants and small children should never share a seat belt with another occupant. During an accident, they could be crushed between the occupant and seat belt. Children too big for child restraint systems must ride in back seats using regular seat belts. Position shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper belt positioning for children over 41 lbs until they reach a height where a lap/ shoulder belt fits properly without a booster. A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is not properly secured in the child restraint. When the child restraint is not in use, remove it from the vehicle or secure it with the seat belt to prevent the child restraint from becoming a projectile in the event of an accident. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle; even if the children are secured in a child restraint system. Unsupervised children in a child restraint system may use vehicle equipment and may cause serious personal injury. Safety and Security Occupant safety BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is located on the upper part of the front center console. The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp 1 located on the upper part of the front center console will be illuminated, except with the SmartKey removed or in starter switch position 0. i The system does not deactivate the side impact airbag, the window curtain airbag and the emergency tensioning device. Self-test BabySmartTM without special child seat installed 1 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp Special BabySmartTM compatible child seats, designed for use with the Maybach system and available at any authorized Maybach Studio are required for use with the BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system. With the special child seat properly installed, the passenger front airbag will not deploy. After turning the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1 or 2 or the KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button ( page 63) is pressed once or twice, PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp 1 located on the upper part of the front center console comes on for approximately 6 seconds and then goes out. If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp should not come on or is continuously lit, the system is not functioning. You must see an authorized Maybach Studio before seating any child on the front passenger seat. For more information on PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp, see “Practical hints” ( page 416). Warning! G The BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system will ONLY work with a special child seat designed to operate with it. It will not work with child seats which are not BabySmartTM compatible. Never place anything between seat cushion and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces the effectiveness of the deactivation system. The bottom of the child seat must make full contact with the passenger seat cushion. An incorrectly mounted child seat could cause injuries to the child in case of an accident, instead of protecting the child. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation of special child seats. 101 Safety and Security Occupant safety Warning! G When using a BabySmartTM compatible child seat on the front passenger seat, the passenger front airbag will not deploy only if the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp remains illuminated. Make sure to check the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp every time you use the special system child seat. Should the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp go out while the restraint is installed, please check installation. If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp remains out, do not use the BabySmartTM restraint to transport children on the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired. Warning! G Do not place powered-on laptops, cell phones, electronic tags such as those used in ski passes and like electronic devices on the front passenger seat. Signals from such devices may interfere with the BabySmartTM system. Such signal interference, for example, may cause the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp not to come on or be continuously lit during selftest, indicating that the system is not functioning. Installing infant and child restraint systems This vehicle is equipped with tether anchorages for a top tether strap at each of the rear seating positions. 1 Cover of top anchorage ring  Open cover 1 to access anchorage ring.  Guide tether strap between head re- straints and top of seat back. 102  Safety and Security Occupant safety  Head restraint must be positioned such that the top tether strap can pass freely between the head restraint and top of seat back.  Make sure the tether strap is not twisted. Once the top tether anchorage hook is attached, the child restraint itself can be secured. Tighten the top tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.  Close cover after removing the tether strap. Warning! 2 Hook 3 Anchorage ring  Securely fasten hook 2, which is part of the tether strap, to anchorage ring 3. G Never adjust the rear seat position after installing the child restraint. Adjusting the rear seat position after installing the child restraint could damage the child restraint and/or introduce undesirable slack into the webbing and loosen or misposition the child restraint, lessening the effectiveness of the child restraint and thus increasing the chance or severity of injury in an accident. Child seat anchors – LATCH-type This vehicle is equipped with two LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) type anchors (at each of the outer rear seats) for the installation of a LATCH child seat with the matching anchor fittings. Warning! G Children too big for child restraint systems must ride in back seats using regular seat belts. Position shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper belt positioning for children over 41 lbs until they reach a height where a lap/shoulder belt fits properly without a booster. Install child seat according to manufactur er’s instructions. i For safety, please make sure the hook has attached to the ring beyond the safety catch, as illustrated. 103 Safety and Security Occupant safety  To enable the child seat to perform its protective function,
the rear seat backrest must be fully upright ( page 141)
the seat cushion must be tilted fully downwards ( page 141). The child seat must be firmly attached in the right and left side anchors 2. An incorrectly mounted child seat may come loose during an accident which could result in serious injury or death to your child. Damaged or impact damaged child seats or child seat mounting fittings must be replaced. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, even if the children are secured in a child restraint system. Warning! G Never adjust the rear seat position after installing the child restraint. Adjusting the rear seat position after installing the child restraint could damage the child restraint and/or introduce undesirable slack into the webbing and loosen or misposition the 104 child restraint, lessening the effectiveness of the child restraint and thus increasing the chance or severity of injury in an accident. The LATCH-type anchors are located between the seat cushion and the backrest. i Vehicles with a rear center seat*: Make sure the seat belt for the center seat can operate freely with a child seat installed. i Non-LATCH type child seats may also be used and can be installed using the vehicle’s seat belt system. Install child seat according to the manufacturer’s instructions. 1 Indicates the position of the anchors 2 Anchor  Bring the rear seat backrest to a fully upright position ( page 141).  Adjust the seat cushion tilt fully downwards ( page 141).  Install child seat according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Safety and Security Occupant safety Override switch for rear passenger compartment You can disable select functions in the rear passenger compartment for added safety (for instance when you have children riding in the rear passenger compartment). The override switch is located in the driver’s door. rear door windows operation ( page 233)
cigarette lighter in the rear ( page 300)
adjusting the front passenger seat position from the rear ( page 147)
12-V socket in the rear center console ( page 305)
closing the partition* from the rear ( page 312)  Press switch 1. The functions in the rear are enabled again. Warning! You can disable the following functions in the rear passenger compartment:
Deactivating override switch G Activate the override switch when children are riding in the back seats of the vehicle. The children may otherwise injure themselves, e.g. by becoming trapped in the window opening. 1 Deactivating override switch 2 Activating override switch Activating override switch  Press switch 2. The functions in the rear are disabled. i The rear door windows can still be operated with the switches located in the driver’s door. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. For information, see “Power windows” ( page 233). 105 Safety and Security Panic alarm An audible alarm and flashing exterior lamps will operate for approximately 21/2 minutes. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. i Canada only: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference, and 1 Â Panic button i USA only: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 106 (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Activating  Press and hold button 1 for at least 1 second. Deactivating  Press button 1 again. or  Insert the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** in the starter switch. or  Press the KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button ( page 63). The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be inside the vehicle. Safety and Security Driving safety systems  Driving safety systems In this section you will find information on the following driving safety systems:
ABS (Antilock Brake System)
BAS (Brake Assist System)
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
Electro-hydraulic brake system Warning! G The following factors increase the risk of accidents:
Excessive speed, especially in turns
Wet and slippery road surfaces
Following another vehicle too closely The ABS, BAS, ESP® and electro-hydraulic brake system cannot reduce this risk. Always adjust your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions. i In winter operation, the maximum effectiveness of the ABS, BAS, ESP® and electro-hydraulic brake system is only achieved with winter tires (M + S tires), or snow chains as required. ABS Warning! G Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm, steady brake pedal pressure instead. Pumping the brake pedal defeats the purpose of the ABS and significantly reduces braking effectiveness. The Antilock Brake System (ABS) regulates the brake pressure so that the wheels do not lock during braking. This allows you to maintain the ability to steer your vehicle. The ABS is functional above a speed of approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent of road surface conditions. On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will respond even to light brake pressure. The - indicator lamp in the instrument cluster comes on when you switch on the ignition. It goes out when the engine is running. 107 Safety and Security Driving safety systems Braking If the ABS activates during braking, the ABS/ESP® warning lamp v in the instrument cluster dial flashes. Because of the electro-hydraulic brake system, you will not feel any pulsation in the brake pedal.  Keep firm and steady pressure on the Warning! G When the ABS is malfunctioning, the BAS and the ESP® are also switched off. When the ABS is malfunctioning, the wheels may lock during hard braking, reducing steering capability and extending the braking distance. brake pedal. Continuous steady brake pedal pressure yields the advantages provided by the ABS, namely braking power and the ability to steer the vehicle. The ABS/ESP® warning lamp v flashes whenever the ABS is activated which can be an indication of hazardous road conditions and functions as a reminder to take extra care while driving. Emergency brake maneuver  Keep continuous full pressure on the brake pedal. 108 For more information on ABS, see “Practical hints” ( page 410). BAS The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in emergency situations. If you apply the brakes very quickly, the BAS automatically provides full brake boost, thereby potentially reducing the braking distance.  Apply continuous full braking pres- Warning! G The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded. The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. sure until the emergency braking situation is over. The ABS will prevent the wheels from locking. When you release the brake pedal, the brakes function again as normal. The BAS is then deactivated. Warning! G If the BAS is malfunctioning, the brake system is still functioning normally, but without the additional brake boost available that BAS would normally provide in an emergency braking maneuver. Therefore, the braking distance may increase. Safety and Security Driving safety systems Warning! G The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction. The BAS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. ESP® Warning! The Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) is operational as soon as the engine is running and monitors the vehicle’s traction (force of adhesive friction between the tires and the road surface) and handling. The ESP® recognizes when a wheel is spinning or if the vehicle starts to skid. By applying brakes to the appropriate wheel and by limiting engine output, the ESP® works to stabilize the vehicle. The ESP® is especially useful while driving off and on wet or slippery road surfaces. The ESP® also stabilizes the vehicle during braking maneuvers. The ABS/ESP® warning lamp v in the instrument cluster flashes when the ESP® is engaged. G Never switch off the ESP® when you see the ABS/ ESP® warning lamp v flashing in the instrument cluster. In this case proceed as follows:
While driving off, apply as little throttle as possible.
While driving, ease up on the accelerator.
Adapt your speed and driving style to the prevailing road conditions. Failure to observe these guidelines could cause the vehicle to skid. The ESP® cannot prevent accidents resulting from excessive speed. The ABS/ESP® warning lamp v in the instrument cluster comes on when you switch on the ignition. It goes out when the engine is running. 109 Safety and Security Driving safety systems Warning! G The ESP® cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded. The ESP® cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESP® equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. i ESP® The will only function properly if you use wheels of the recommended tire size ( page 491). Switching off the ESP® ! Because of the ESP’s® automatic operation, the engine must be shut off (SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1 or KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button in position 0 or 1) when
the parking brake is being tested on a brake test dynamometer
the vehicle is being towed with the front/rear axle raised. Active braking action through the ESP® may otherwise seriously damage the brake system. For more information on ESP®, see “Practical hints” ( page 410) and ( page 421). Warning! G The ESP® should not be switched off during normal driving other than in the circumstances described below. Disabling of the system will reduce vehicle stability in driving maneuvers. To improve the vehicle’s traction, turn off the ESP® in driving situations where it would be advantageous to have the drive wheels spin and thus cut into surfaces for better grip such as:
when driving with snow chains
in deep snow
in sand or gravel ! Turn on the ESP® immediately if the aforementioned circumstances do not apply anymore. 110 Safety and Security Driving safety systems When you switch off the ESP® ESP®
the cle
the engine output is not limited, which allows the drive wheels to spin and thus cut into surfaces for better grip
the traction control will still brake a spinning wheel
the ESP® continues to operate when you are braking ! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended period with the ESP® switched off. This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. does not stabilize the vehi- i When the ESP® is switched off and one or more drive wheels are spinning, the ABS/ESP® warning lamp v in the speedometer flashes. However, the ESP® will then not stabilize the vehicle. The switch is located on the lower part of the front center console. Switching on the ESP®  Press switch 1 again. 1 ESP® switch (on/off) ®  Press switch 1 until the ABS/ESP warning lamp v in the speedometer comes on. The ABS/ESP® warning lamp v in the speedometer goes out. You are now again in normal driving mode with the ESP® switched on. The ESP® is deactivated. Warning! G When the ABS/ESP® warning lamp v is illuminated continuously, the ESP® is switched off. Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions and to the non-operating status of the ESP®. 111 Safety and Security Driving safety systems Electro-hydraulic brake system The electro-hydraulic brake system combines a hydraulic brake circuit with electronically controlled brake servo assistance. You have increased braking safety and improved braking comfort. Warning! G Never ignore a brake malfunction indicated in the instrument cluster, for example by the ; (USA only) or 3 (Canada only) red brake warning lamp. Refer to the “Practical hints” section ( page 414). Also read and observe the messages in the instrument cluster display ( page 417). Warning! G The electro-hydraulic brake system requires electrical power to operate. A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply or electrical system may impair brake system operation and switch it into its emergency operation mode. In such a case, the red brake warning lamp ( page 414) and warning messages in the instrument cluster come on while driving (see page 429 to page 430). To brake, the driver must then apply significantly greater brake pedal pressure and depress the pedal much further to obtain the expected braking effect. If necessary, apply full pressure to the brake pedal. Brakes may only be applied to the front wheels. Stopping distance is increased! If there is a malfunction in the electro-hydraulic brake system, we recommend that the vehicle be transported with all wheels off the ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly equipment. A tow bar must be used if circumstances do not permit the use of the recommended towing methods and the vehicle requires towing with all four wheels on the ground. 112 Towing the vehicle with all four wheels on the ground is only permissible for distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). For more information, refer to “Towing the vehicle” ( page 478). The electro-hydraulic brake system is automatically activated when you:
unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey or the KEYLESS-GO**
open the driver’s or passenger door
turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1
in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**, press the start/stop button ( page 63) on gear selector lever once
depress the brake pedal
release the parking brake Safety and Security Driving safety systems i If the electro-hydraulic brake system is activated when the brake pedal is first depressed, you may feel a reduced pedal resistance and longer pedal travel than normal. When releasing the pedal, you may also feel the brake pedal pulsate and you may hear a sound which is caused by the activation of the electro-hydraulic brake system pump. This is normal and not an indication of a malfunction. Pedal travel returns to normal when you release the brake pedal and the sound soon ceases. If you experience a reduced pedal resistance and longer pedal travel while driving and the red brake warning lamp ( page 414) illuminates and/or warning messages appear in the instrument cluster (see page 429 to page 430), the brake system is malfunctioning. Follow the instructions of the warning message(s) and have the brake system checked immediately. Warning! G Have brake pad replacement and other work on the electro-hydraulic brake system carried out by qualified technicians only. Contact an authorized Maybach Studio for further information. The electrohydraulic brake system must be deactivated prior to working on the system. High pressure is intermittently built up in the system as part of its automatic self-test. In addition, the system is automatically activated when the vehicle is unlocked by remote control, when the driver’s or passenger door is opened, when the starter switch is in position 1, when the brake pedal is depressed or when the parking brake is released. Failure to deactivate the system prior to maintenance will cause brake pistons to extend and brake fluid to leak, which may result in injuries (contusions and acid burns). Extended brake pistons may also cause injury. The electro-hydraulic brake servo assistance switches off automatically:
approximately 20 seconds after you locked the vehicle from outside
approximately 2 minutes after you
turned the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0 or removed the SmartKey
pressed the KEYLESS-GO** start/ stop button ( page 63) to turn off the engine or power supply and opened the driver’s door (with driver’s door open, the starter switch is set to position 0, same as SmartKey removed from starter switch) 113 Safety and Security Driving safety systems Note on driving with the electro-hydraulic brake system
Following extended periods of only minor loads to your brake system, you should occasionally apply the brakes when traveling at high speeds. This improves the grip of the brake pads. Warning! G
After driving on wet or snow-covered roads, you should apply your brakes firmly before parking your vehicle. This produces heat which serves to dry the brake disks and help prevent corrosion.
On long and steep grades, shift to a lower gear (gear range 1, 2 or 3) to prevent the brakes from overheating and to reduce brake wear.
After hard braking, it is advisable to drive on for some time so that the air stream will cool down the brakes faster.
Only components approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles (e.g. brake pads) should be installed on your vehicle. Brake pads not approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles may impair the safety of your vehicle. Be very careful not to endanger other road users when you apply the brakes. 114 Safety and Security Anti-theft systems  Anti-theft systems i Immobilizer The immobilizer prevents unauthorized persons from starting your vehicle. Starting the engine will also deactivate the immobilizer In case the engine cannot be started (yet the vehicle’s battery is charged), the system is not operational. Contact an authorized Maybach Studio or call 1-866-FOR-MAYBach (in the USA) or 1-888-881-6611 (in Canada). Activating With the SmartKey  Remove the SmartKey from the start- er switch. With KEYLESS-GO**  Turn off the engine by means of the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button ( page 63).  Open the driver’s door. Deactivating  Switch on the ignition ( page 62). Anti-theft alarm system Once the alarm system has been armed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered when someone opens
a door
the trunk
the hood The alarm will stay on even if the activating element (a door, for example) is immediately closed. The alarm system will also be triggered when
someone attempts to raise the vehicle
the vehicle is opened with the mechanical key
someone opens a door from the inside
someone opens the trunk with the emergency release button i If the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, a call to the Response Center is initiated automatically by the Tele Aid system provided Tele Aid service was subscribed to and properly activated, and that necessary cellular service and GPS coverage are available. 115 Safety and Security Anti-theft systems Arming the alarm system i Canceling the alarm The indicator lamp located below the hazard warning flasher switch in on the upper part of the front center console. If the turn signal lamps do not flash three times, one of the following elements may not be properly closed: To cancel the alarm:
a door  Insert the SmartKey in the starter
the trunk Close the respective element and lock the vehicle again. With the SmartKey switch. or  Press button Œ or ‹. The alarm is canceled. Disarming the alarm system  Unlock your vehicle. 1 Indicator lamp  Lock your vehicle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO**. The turn signal lamps flash three times to indicate that the alarm system is activated. The indicator lamp 1 flashes to indicate that the alarm system is armed. 116 With KEYLESS-GO** The turn signal lamps flash once to indicate that the alarm system is disarmed.  Grasp an outside door handle. i or The alarm system will rearm automatically again after approximately 40 seconds if no door was opened.  Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button ( page 63). The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be within 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle. The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be inside the vehicle. The alarm is canceled. Safety and Security Anti-theft systems Tow-away alarm Once the tow-away alarm is armed, a visual and audible alarm will be triggered when someone attempts to raise the vehicle. i If the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, a call to the Response Center is initiated automatically by the Tele Aid system provided Tele Aid service was subscribed to and properly activated, and that necessary cellular service and GPS coverage are available. Disarming the tow-away alarm To prevent triggering the tow-away alarm feature, switch off the tow-away alarm before towing the vehicle, or when parking on a surface subject to movement, such as a ferry or auto train. The button is located on the overhead control panel.  Switch off the ignition and remove the SmartKey from the starter switch. i You cannot disarm the tow-away alarm if the ignition is switched on.  Press button 1. The indicator lamp in the button comes on briefly.  Exit the vehicle and lock it with the SmartKey or (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**) with the lock button at each outside door handle or trunk lid. Arming the tow-away alarm i  Lock your vehicle with the SmartKey When you unlock your vehicle, the tow-away protection disarms automatically. or KEYLESS-GO**. The tow-away alarm is automatically armed after about 30 seconds. 1 Tow-away alarm off button The tow-away alarm remains disarmed until you lock your vehicle again. 117 Safety and Security Anti-theft systems Canceling the alarm To cancel the alarm: With the SmartKey  Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch. or  Press button Œ or ‹. The alarm is canceled. With KEYLESS-GO**  Grasp an outside door handle. The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be within 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle. or  Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button ( page 63). The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be inside the vehicle. The alarm is canceled. 118 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Seats Memory function Lighting Instrument cluster Control system Automatic transmission Good visibility Automatic climate control Power windows Power tilt/sliding sunroof Electrotransparent roof* Driving systems Loading Useful features 119 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking In the “Controls in detail” section, you will find detailed information on how to operate the equipment installed on your vehicle. If you are already familiar with the basic functions of your vehicle, this section will be of particular interest to you. To quickly familiarize yourself with the basic functions of the vehicle, refer to the “Getting started” section of this manual. The corresponding page numbers are given at the beginning of each segment. For more information on locking and unlocking, see “Getting started” ( page 60) and ( page 83). SmartKey Your vehicle comes supplied with two SmartKeys, each with remote control and a removable mechanical key. The locking tabs for the mechanical key portion of the two SmartKeys are a different color to help distinguish each SmartKey unit. The SmartKey provides an extended operating range. To prevent theft, however, it is advisable to only unlock the vehicle when you are in close proximity to it. The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks: 120
the doors
the trunk
the fuel filler flap SmartKey with remote control 1 2 3 4 5 6  Panic button ( page 106) ‹ Lock button Š Opening button for trunk Mechanical key locking tab Œ Unlock button Battery check lamp Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Warning! G When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. It is possible for children to open a locked door from the inside, which could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. ! To prevent possible malfunction, avoid exposing the SmartKey to high levels of electromagnetic radiation. i i USA only: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: Canada only: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (1) This device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. i When you unlock the vehicle, the electro-hydraulic brake system is activated ( page 112). i You can also open or close the windows using the SmartKey, see “Summer opening feature” ( page 235) and “Convenience closing feature” ( page 236). 121 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Factory setting Global unlocking  Press button Œ. All turn signal lamps flash once. The locking knobs in the doors move up. The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed. The vehicle will lock again automatically and reactivate the anti-theft alarm system within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking if:
neither a door nor the trunk is opened
the SmartKey is not inserted in the starter switch
the central locking switch is not activated Global locking  Press button ‹. With the trunk and all doors closed, all turn signal lamps flash three times. The locking knobs in the doors move down. The anti-theft alarm system is armed. 122 Selective setting Global unlocking If you frequently travel alone, you may wish to reprogram the SmartKey so that pressing Œ only unlocks the driver’s door and the fuel filler flap.  Press button Œ twice.  Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹ simultaneously for about 6 seconds until battery check lamp 6 ( page 120) flashes twice. The SmartKey will then function as follows: Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler flap All turn signal lamps flash once. The locking knobs in the doors move up. The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed. Global locking  Press button ‹. With the trunk and all doors closed, all turn signal lamps flash three times. The locking knobs in the doors move down. The anti-theft alarm system is armed.  Press button Œ once. All turn signal lamps flash once. The locking knob in the driver’s door moves up. The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed. Restoring to factory setting  Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹ simultaneously for about 6 seconds until battery check lamp 6 flashes twice. Controls in detail Locking and unlocking ! Checking the batteries Unlocking and opening the trunk If you can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey, then either the batteries in the SmartKey are discharged, the SmartKey is malfunctioning or the vehicle batteries are drained.  Press button Œ or ‹. You can unlock and open the trunk separately.
Check the batteries in the SmartKey and replace them if necessary ( page 457).
Use the mechanical key to unlock the driver’s door ( page 452) and the trunk ( page 453).

Use the mechanical key to lock the driver’s door ( page 452) and the trunk ( page 137). Have the vehicle batteries and their connections checked ( page 471). If the SmartKey is malfunctioning, contact an authorized Maybach Studio. Battery check lamp 6 ( page 120) comes on briefly to indicate that the SmartKey batteries are in order. i If battery check lamp 6 does not come on briefly during check, then the SmartKey batteries are discharged. Replace the batteries ( page 457). You can obtain the required batteries at any authorized Maybach Studio. i If the batteries are checked within signal range of the vehicle, pressing button Œ or ‹ will lock or unlock the vehicle accordingly. A minimum height clearance of 6.2 ft (1.89 m) is required to open the trunk lid.  Press and hold button Š until the trunk unlocks and begins to open. ! The trunk lid swings open upwards automatically. Always make sure there is sufficient overhead clearance. To stop the opening procedure, press button Š. The trunk lid stops moving. i If the trunk does not open, it is still locked separately ( page 137). 123 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Loss of SmartKey or mechanical key If you lose a SmartKey or mechanical key, you should do the following:  Have the SmartKey deactivated by an authorized Maybach Studio.  Report the loss of the SmartKey or the mechanical key immediately to your car insurance company.  If necessary, have the mechanical lock replaced. Your authorized Maybach Studio will be glad to supply you with a replacement. SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** Vehicles equipped with KEYLESS-GO come with two SmartKeys with KEYLESS-GO, each with remote control and a removable mechanical key. The locking tabs for the mechanical key portion of the two SmartKeys with KEYLESS-GO are a different color to help distinguish each SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO unit. The function of the SmartKey overrules the KEYLESS-GO function. The KEYLESS-GO function is integrated into the SmartKey. On these vehicles, the validity of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is checked every time you grasp an outside door handle. If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is valid, your vehicle unlocks 124
the doors
the trunk
the fuel filler flap SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO 1 2 3 4 5 6  Panic button ( page 106) ‹ Lock button Š Opening button for trunk Mechanical key locking tab Œ Unlock button Battery check lamp i When any outside door handle other than the driver’s outside door handle is grasped, the vehicle is centrally unlocked. Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Warning! G When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. It is possible for children to open a locked door from the inside, which could result in an accident and/ or serious personal injury. ! To prevent possible malfunction, avoid exposing the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO to high levels of electromagnetic radiation. i USA only: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. i Canada only: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. i When you unlock the vehicle, the electro-hydraulic brake system is activated ( page 112). i You can also open or close the windows using the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO**, see “Summer opening feature” ( page 235) and “Convenience closing feature” ( page 236). (1) This device may not cause interference, and 125 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Important notes on using KEYLESS-GO

You can also use the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO like a normal SmartKey ( page 120). You can combine KEYLESS-GO functions with normal SmartKey functions (e.g. unlocking with KEYLESS-GO and locking with button ‹).
Always carry the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you.
Never store the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO together with:

electronic items such as a mobile phone or another SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO metallic objects such as coins or metal foil Doing so could impair the function of the KEYLESS-GO system.

To lock or unlock the vehicle, the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be located outside the vehicle within approximately 3 ft (1 m) of a door or the trunk lid. 126
In order to start the engine with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO:
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be located in the vehicle.
All the doors must be closed.
The brake pedal must be firmly depressed. Do not depress the accelerator.
If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is positioned farther away from the vehicle, the system may no longer recognize the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO. The vehicle then cannot be locked or the engine started via the KEYLESS-GO system.
If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is removed from the vehicle while the ignition is switched on (e.g. if passenger exits the vehicle with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO), the message KEY NOT RECOGNIZED will appear in the multifunction display while driving off. If you have started the engine with the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button ( page 63), you can only turn it off again with this button, even if you have put the SmartKey in the starter switch in the meantime. This does not apply if, after starting, the gear selector lever is still in position P and the SmartKey is then inserted in the starter switch. The SmartKey will then have priority over the KEYLESS-GO function and the vehicle’s electrical system will operate according to the position of the SmartKey in the starter switch, even stopping the engine. Find the SmartKey or change its present location immediately (e.g. place it on the front passenger seat or insert it in shirt pocket).
Remember that the engine can be started by anyone with a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO that is left inside the vehicle. If you leave the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO behind when exiting and locking the vehicle, the message KEY STILL IN VEHICLE will appear in the multifunction display. Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Factory setting Global unlocking  Grasp an outside door handle. All turn signal lamps flash once. The locking knobs in the doors move up. The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed. i If the vehicle has been parked for more than 72 hours, you must pull an outside door handle in order to activate the KEYLESS-GO function. The vehicle will lock again automatically and reactivate the anti-theft alarm system within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking if:

neither a door nor the trunk is opened the central locking switch is not activated  Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹ i The vehicle could be inadvertently unlocked if the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is within 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle and
an outside door handle is splashed with water, or
you attempt to clean an outside door handle. Global locking  Press the lock button on an outside door handle ( page 86) or trunk lid ( page 129). With the trunk and all doors closed, all turn signal lamps flash three times. The locking knobs in the doors move down. The anti-theft alarm system is armed. Selective setting If you frequently travel alone, you may wish to reprogram the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO so when you grasp the driver’s outside door handle only the driver’s door and the fuel filler flap unlocks. simultaneously for about 5 seconds until battery check lamp 6 ( page 124) flashes twice. The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO will then function as follows: Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler flap  Grasp the driver’s outside door han- dle. All turn signal lamps flash once. The locking knob in the driver’s moves up. The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed. Global unlocking  Grasp any outside door handle other than the driver’s outside door handle. All turn signal lamps flash once. The locking knobs in the doors move up. The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed. 127 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Global locking ! Checking the batteries  Press the lock button on an outside door handle ( page 86). If you can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO, then either the batteries in the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO are discharged, the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning or the vehicle batteries are drained.  Press button Œ or ‹. With the trunk and all doors closed, all turn signal lamps flash three times. The locking knobs in the doors move down. The anti-theft alarm system is armed. i You can also lock the vehicle using the lock button on the trunk lid ( page 129) or KEYLESS-GO locking/ closing switch ( page 135). Restoring to factory setting  Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹ simultaneously for about 6 seconds until battery check lamp 6 ( page 124) flashes twice. i
Check the batteries in the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO and replace them if necessary ( page 457). If battery check lamp 6 does not come on briefly during check, then the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO batteries are discharged.
Use the mechanical key to unlock the driver’s door ( page 452) and the trunk ( page 453). Replace the batteries ( page 457).

Use the mechanical key to lock the driver’s door ( page 452) and the trunk ( page 137). Have the vehicle batteries and their connections checked ( page 471). If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning, contact an authorized Maybach Studio. 128 Battery check lamp 6 ( page 124) comes on briefly to indicate that the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO batteries are in order. You can obtain the required batteries at any authorized Maybach Studio. i If the batteries are checked within signal range of the vehicle, pressing button Œ or ‹ will lock or unlock the vehicle accordingly. Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Global locking using the lock button on the trunk lid i To prevent a possible inadvertent lockout, the trunk will open automatically if a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is recognized inside the vehicle or in the trunk. i Loss of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO You can also lock the vehicle using the lock button on an outside door handle ( page 86) or KEYLESS-GO locking/closing switch ( page 135). If you lose your SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO or mechanical key, you should do the following: Unlocking and opening the trunk You can unlock and open the trunk separately. A minimum height clearance of 6.2 ft (1.89 m) is required to open the trunk lid.  Press and hold button Š until the trunk unlocks and begins to open. ! The trunk lid swings open upwards automatically. Always make sure there is sufficient overhead clearance. 1 Lock button  Press lock button 1 on the trunk lid. All turn signal lamps flash three times. The locking knobs in the doors move down. The anti-theft alarm system is activated.  Have the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO deactivated by an authorized Maybach Studio.  Report the loss of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO or the mechanical key immediately to your car insurance company.  Have the mechanical lock replaced if necessary. Your authorized Maybach Studio will be glad to supply you with a replacement. To stop the opening procedure, press button Š. The trunk lid stops moving. i If the trunk does not open, it is still locked separately ( page 137). 129 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Opening the doors from the inside You can open a locked door from the inside. Open door only when conditions are safe to do so. i Front doors If the vehicle has previously been locked using the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO**, opening a door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system.  Pull on door handle 2 on the respec- To cancel the alarm, do one of the following: Rear doors
Press button Œ or ‹ on the SmartKey.
Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch. In vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**: 1 Locking knob 2 Inside door handle
Grasp an outside door handle. The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be within 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle.
Press the KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button ( page 63). The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be inside the vehicle. tive front door to open door. If door was locked, locking knob 1 will move up.  Pull up locking knob 1 on the re- spective rear door to unlock door.  Pull on door handle 2 on the respec- tive rear door to open door. Closing the rear doors automatically from the inside (Maybach 62) You can close the rear doors automatically. Warning! G To prevent possible personal injury, always keep hands and fingers away from the door opening when closing the door. Be especially careful when small children are around. In case of danger, release the remote rear door closing switch to stop the closing procedure. 130 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking The remote rear door closing switch is above the rear door. i You can also close the rear doors by hand. In vehicles without KEYLESS-GO**: The vehicle must be unlocked.  Pull on handle 1. The trunk opens. Opening the trunk Opening the trunk from the outside A minimum height clearance of 6.2 ft (1.89 m) is required to open the trunk lid. The handle is located above the rear license plate recess. 1 Remote rear door closing switch  If necessary, pull the door into its lock by hand. i  Release switch 1 to interrupt proce- dure. Only drive with the doors closed. Otherwise, one or more of the doors could open while the vehicle is in motion, putting you and/or others at risk. To stop the opening procedure, press button Š on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO**. If the trunk does not open, it is still locked separately ( page 137). pletely closed. G The trunk lid swings open automatically. Always make sure there is sufficient overhead clearance. i  Pull switch 1 until the door is com- Warning! ! 1 Handle The trunk can also be opened using button Š on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO**, or from its inside in an emergency, see “Trunk lid emergency release” ( page 136). 131 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Opening the trunk from the inside ! You can open the trunk from the inside if the vehicle is stationary. The trunk lid swings open automatically. Always make sure there is sufficient overhead clearance. A minimum height clearance of 6.2 ft (1.89 m) is required to open the trunk lid. The remote trunk opening/closing switch is located on the dashboard to the left of the steering wheel. To stop the opening procedure, press or pull trunk opening/closing switch 1. begins to open. The trunk opens. You will see the message TRUNK OPEN in the multifunction display until you close the trunk. 132  Press the remote trunk opening/closing switch ( page 132) until the mes- sage TRUNK OPEN disappears from the multifunction display and the trunk is closed. To interrupt the closing procedure: If the trunk does not open, it is still locked separately ( page 137).  Release the remote trunk opening/ The trunk can also be opened using button Š on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO**, or from its inside in an emergency, see “Trunk emergency release” ( page 136).  Pull switch 1 until the trunk lid Closing the trunk from the inside i i 1 Remote trunk opening/closing switch Closing the trunk closing switch. i You can also close the trunk by hand. Warning! G Maintain sight of trunk area while operating the remote trunk opening/closing switch. Monitor the closing procedure carefully to make sure no one is in danger of being injured. To interrupt the closing procedure, release the remote trunk opening/closing switch. Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Even with the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** removed from the starter switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** removed from the vehicle, the remote trunk opening/closing switch can be operated. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. Warning! Closing the trunk from the outside (vehicles without KEYLESS-GO**) You can close the trunk separately. G Only drive with the trunk closed as, among other dangers such as blocked visibility, exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior. If the trunk lid comes into contact with an object while closing (e.g. luggage that has been piled too high) in the upper motion sequence, the closing procedure is stopped and the trunk re-opens slightly. 1 Trunk closing switch  Press switch 1 briefly. The trunk closes. i You can also close the trunk by hand. Warning! G Monitor the closing procedure carefully to make sure no one is in danger of being injured. To prevent possible personal injury, always keep hands and fingers away from the trunk opening when closing the trunk. Be especially careful when small children are around. To stop the closing procedure, do one of the following:
press the trunk closing switch 1
press button Š on the SmartKey
press or pull the remote trunk opening/closing switch (on the dashboard to the left of the steering wheel). Even with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch, the trunk closing switch can be operated. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of equipment may cause an accident  and/or serious personal injury. If the trunk lid comes into contact with an object while closing (e.g. luggage that has been piled too high) in the upper motion sequence, the closing procedure is stopped and the trunk re-opens slightly. 133 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking  Warning! G Only drive with the trunk closed as, among other dangers such as blocked visibility, exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior. Closing the trunk from the outside (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**) You can close the trunk separately. If the trunk lid comes into contact with an object while closing (e.g. luggage that has been piled too high) in the upper motion sequence, the closing procedure is stopped and the trunk re-opens slightly. i i To prevent a possible inadvertent lockout, the trunk will open automatically if a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is recognized inside the vehicle or in the trunk. Do not place the SmartKey in the open trunk. You may lock yourself out. i If the vehicle was previously centrally locked, the trunk will lock automatically after closing it. All turn signal lamps flash three times to confirm locking. 1 Trunk closing switch with KEYLESS-GO with you.  Press switch 1 briefly. The trunk closes. i You can also close the trunk by hand. 134 Warning! G  Make sure you have the SmartKey Monitor the closing procedure carefully to make sure no one is in danger of being injured. To prevent possible personal injury, always keep hands and fingers away from the trunk opening when closing the trunk. Be especially careful when small children are around. To stop the closing procedure, do one of the following:
press the trunk closing switch 1
press the KEYLESS-GO locking/closing switch Controls in detail Locking and unlocking
press button Š on the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
press or pull the remote trunk opening/closing switch (on the dashboard to the left of the steering wheel). Closing the trunk and locking the vehicle from the outside (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**) You can close the trunk and lock the vehicle simultaneously. Even with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO removed from the vehicle, the trunk closing switch can be operated. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. Warning! i If the vehicle was previously centrally locked, the trunk will lock automatically after closing it. All turn signal lamps flash three times to confirm locking. The vehicle is locked and the trunk closes automatically. With all doors closed, all turn signal lamps flash three times to confirm locking. The locking knobs in the doors move down. The anti-theft alarm system is activated. i You can also close the trunk by hand. G Only drive with the trunk closed as, among other dangers such as blocked visibility, exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior.  Press switch 1 briefly. 1 KEYLESS-GO locking/closing switch  Make sure you have the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you. If the trunk lid comes into contact with an object while closing (e.g. luggage that has been piled too high) in the upper motion sequence, the closing procedure is stopped and the trunk re-opens slightly. i To prevent a possible inadvertent lockout, the trunk will open automatically if a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is recognized inside the vehicle or in the trunk. 135 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Warning! G Monitor the closing procedure carefully to make sure no one is in danger of being injured. To prevent possible personal injury, always keep hands and fingers away from the trunk opening when closing the trunk. Be especially careful when small children are around. To stop the closing procedure, do one of the following:
press the KEYLESS-GO locking/closing switch 1
press the trunk closing switch
press button Š on the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
press or pull the remote trunk opening/closing switch (on the dashboard to the left of the steering wheel). Even with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO removed from the vehicle, the KEYLESS-GO locking/closing switch can be operated. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. 136 Warning! G Only drive with the trunk closed as, among other dangers such as blocked visibility, exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior. Trunk emergency release With the emergency release button, the trunk can be opened from inside the trunk. The emergency release button is located on the inside of the trunk lid.  Briefly press emergency release button 1. The trunk unlocks and opens slightly.  Push up the trunk lid to fully open. i The emergency release button unlocks the trunk while the vehicle is standing still or in motion. Illumination of the emergency release button:
The button flashes for 30 minutes after opening the trunk.
The button flashes for 60 minutes after closing the trunk. i The emergency release button does not unlock the trunk if the vehicle battery is discharged or disconnected. 1 Emergency release button Controls in detail Locking and unlocking i Valet trunk If the vehicle has previously been locked using the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO**, opening the trunk from the inside using the emergency release button will trigger the antitheft alarm system. To cancel the alarm, do one of the following:
Press button Œ or ‹ on the SmartKey.
Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch. i To deny any unauthorized person access to the trunk, e.g. when you valet park the vehicle, lock it separately with the mechanical key. Leave only the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** less its mechanical key with the vehicle. The lock is located next to the handle above the rear license plate recess. Grasp an outside door handle.  Turn the mechanical key clockwise to position 2 and remove the mechanical key in that position to lock the trunk. The trunk remains locked even when the vehicle is centrally unlocked. i clockwise to neutral position 1 and remove the mechanical key in that position to unlock the trunk. Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button ( page 63). The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be inside the vehicle. lid lock.  Turn the mechanical key counter- The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be within 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle.
 Insert the mechanical key in the trunk You can only cancel the separate trunk locking mode by means of the mechanical key. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**:
 Pull the mechanical key out of the SmartKey ( page 452). You can now open the trunk ( page 131). 1 Neutral position 2 Locked  Close the trunk ( page 132). 137 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Power closing assist for doors and trunk lid It is not necessary to slam the door or trunk lid closed. A pneumatic power assist mechanism draws doors and trunk lid closed quietly and automatically once the door or trunk lid has been latched. When the pneumatic power-assisted mechanism has stopped, doors and/or trunk can be re-opened. Warning! G To prevent possible personal injury, always keep hands and fingers away from the door or trunk opening when closing a door or the trunk. Be especially careful when small children are around. In case of danger, pull the respective inside or outside door handle, or pull on trunk lid handle. To prevent personal injury, never activate the closing assist mechanism by tampering with the door or trunk lid latch. 138 Power closing assist for doors  Press the doors gently past the initial engage position into the lock. The doors close automatically. Warning! G Only drive with the doors closed. Otherwise, one or more of the doors could open while the vehicle is in motion, putting you and/or others at risk. Power closing assist for trunk lid  Press the trunk lid gently into its lock. The trunk closes automatically. Warning! G Only drive with the trunk closed as, among other dangers such as blocked visibility, exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior. Automatic central locking The doors and the trunk automatically lock when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning at speeds of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more. You can open a locked door from the inside. Open door only when conditions are safe to do so. i The doors unlock automatically after an accident if the force of the impact exceeds a preset threshold. The vehicle locks automatically when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more. You could therefore lock yourself out when the vehicle
is pushed or towed
is on a test stand You can deactivate the automatic locking using the control system ( page 195). Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Locking and unlocking from the inside You can lock or unlock the doors and the trunk from inside using the central locking switch. This can be useful, for example, if you want to lock the vehicle before starting to drive. Your vehicle is equipped with locking and unlocking switches for the driver and rear seat passengers. The rear seat passengers’ switches are located on the rear center console between the rear seats. The driver’s switches are located on the upper part of the front center console. The fuel filler flap will not be locked or unlocked with the central locking or unlocking switch, respectively. Warning! G When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. Rear seat passengers’ switches (example illustration from Maybach 57) Driver’s switches 1 Central locking switch 2 Central unlocking switch 1 Central locking switch 2 Central unlocking switch 139 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Locking  Press central locking switch 1. If all doors are closed, the vehicle locks. Unlocking  Press central unlocking switch 2. The vehicle unlocks. i Rear seat passenger switches (Maybach 57 with rear center seat*) You can open a locked door from the inside. Open door only when conditions are safe to do so. 1 Central locking switch 2 Central unlocking switch Rear seat passenger switches (Maybach 62 with rear center seat*) 1 Central locking switch 2 Central unlocking switch 140 If the vehicle was previously centrally locked using the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO**, it will not unlock using the central unlocking switch 2. If the vehicle was previously locked with the central locking switch 1:
While in the global remote control mode, the vehicle is unlocked when a door is opened from the inside.
While in the selective remote control mode, only the door opened from inside is unlocked. Controls in detail Seats  Seats  In addition to adjusting the head re- For more information on seat adjustment, see “Adjusting” ( page 65). straint tilt using the corresponding power control on the rear door control panel, the angle of the head restraint can also be adjusted manually. Push or pull on the lower edge of the head restraint cushion. Rear seats Head restraint tilt For information on front seat head restraint adjustment, see “Adjusting” ( page 67). i Maybach 62 1 Head restraints 2 Head restraint side cushions  Adjust the side cushions of the head restraints by hand. Maybach 57 1 Head restraints 2 Head restraint side cushions Adjust the head restraint in such a way that it is as close to the head as possible. Rear seat adjustment (Maybach 57) i To adjust settings for the right rear passenger seat, make sure the right rear passenger seat adjustment button is selected ( page 147). i The rear center seat* cannot be adjusted. 141 Controls in detail Seats Warning! G Warning! When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. The seats can also be operated with the respective door is open. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. For your protection, drive only with properly positioned head restraints. 1 2 3 4 5 Head restraint height Head restraint tilt Seat backrest tilt Seat fore and aft adjustment Seat cushion tilt  Switch on the ignition ( page 62). or  Open the respective door. Head restraint height  Press switch up or down in direction of arrow 1. Head restraint tilt  Press switch forward or backward in direction of arrow 2. 142 G Adjust head restraint so that it is as close to the head as possible and the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level. This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation. Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident. Seat backrest tilt  Press switch forward or backward in direction of arrow 3 until your arms are slightly angled when holding the steering wheel. Controls in detail Seats i Tilt the seat backrest to the rear for easier removal and installation of the head restraints. i The functions for adjusting backrest tilt and seat fore and aft are linked functions. When the seat is adjusted fore and aft, the backrest tilt is adjusted simultaneously, and vice versa. Seat fore and aft adjustment  Press switch forward or backward in direction of arrow 4. ! When moving the seat, make sure there are no items in the footwell or behind the seats. Otherwise you could damage the seats. Seat cushion tilt  Press switch up or down in direction of arrow 5 until your upper legs are lightly supported. Rear seat adjustment (Maybach 62) i To adjust settings for the right rear passenger seat, make sure the right rear passenger seat adjustment button is selected ( page 147). i The rear center seat* cannot be adjusted. Warning! G When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. The seats can also be operated with the respective door is open. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 a Fully reclined position Upright position Head restraint height Head restraint tilt Seat backrest tilt Seat cushion depth Seat cushion tilt Seat fore and aft adjustment Leg rest length Leg rest tilt  Switch on the ignition ( page 62). or  Open the respective door. 143 Controls in detail Seats Fully reclined/upright position Head restraint tilt Seat backrest tilt  To adjust seat to fully reclined posi-  Press switch forward or backward in direction of arrow 4 ( page 143).  Press switch forward or backward in tion, press switch 1.  Press and hold switch 1 until seat is in desired position. To stop the seat adjustment procedure, release switch 1.  To adjust seat to upright position, press switch 2.  Press and hold switch 2 until seat is in desired position. To stop the seat adjustment procedure, release switch 2. Head restraint height  Press switch up or down in direction of arrow 3. Warning! G For your protection, drive only with properly positioned head restraints. Adjust head restraint so that it is as close to the head as possible and the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level. This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation. Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident. direction of arrow 5 until your arms are slightly angled when holding the steering wheel. i The functions for adjusting backrest tilt and seat fore and aft are linked functions. When the seat is adjusted fore and aft, the backrest tilt is adjusted simultaneously, and vice versa. Seat cushion depth  Press switch forward or backward in direction of arrow 6 until your legs are supported comfortably. Seat cushion tilt  Press switch up or down in direction of arrow 7 until your upper legs are lightly supported. 144 Controls in detail Seats Seat fore and aft adjustment  Press switch forward or backward in direction of arrow 8 ( page 143). ! When moving the seat, make sure there are no items in the footwell or behind the seats. Otherwise you could damage the seats. Leg rest length  Press switch up or down in direction of arrow 9 ( page 143) to adjust the leg rest length. Extending and retracting the rear seat head restraints Warning!  Switch on the ignition ( page 62). i You can only retract the rear seat head restraints when no rear seat passenger is wearing a seat belt. G For safety reasons, always drive with the rear seat head restraints in the extended position when the rear seats are occupied. Keep the area around head restraints clear of articles (e.g. clothing) to not obstruct the retracting/extending operation of the head restraints. The switch is located on the lower part of the front center console. Retracting rear seat head restraints  Press switch 1. The rear seat head restraints retract. Extending rear seat head restraints  Press switch 1 again. The rear outer seat head restraints extend to your last set position. Leg rest tilt or  Press switch up or down in direction of arrow a ( page 143) to adjust  Adjust the head restraints with the the leg rest tilt. seat adjustment switches in the rear passenger compartment. i When you fasten your seat belt in the rear, the respective rear outer seat head restraint extends to your last set position. 1 Switch for rear seat head restraints 145 Controls in detail Seats i  Switch on the ignition ( page 62). The rear center seat* head restraint cannot be extended using the switch in the front center console. Use the switch on the lower right side of the rear center seat. or Rear center seat* head restraint adjustment The switch is on the lower right side of the rear center seat. Warning!  Open a rear door.  Press switch 1 and hold it. The rear seat head restraint extends until you release the switch.  Press switch 2 and hold it. The rear seat head restraint retracts until you release the switch. G For your protection, drive only with properly positioned head restraints. Adjust head restraint so that it is as close to the head as possible and the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level. This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation. Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Example illustration from Maybach 57 1 Extending 2 Retracting 146 Even with the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** removed from the starter switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** removed from the vehicle, the rear center seat head restraint can be operated when a rear door is open. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Controls in detail Seats Setting front passenger seat position from rear This function lets you adjust the position of the front passenger seat from the right rear passenger seat. The switch is located on the right rear passenger door. Warning! G When adjusting the passenger seat, make sure the seat, if occupied, is as far from the passenger front airbag as possible. Otherwise, the passenger could be seriously or even fatally injured in the event of an accident or braking maneuver. Make sure no one can be caught or injured while the seat is being adjusted. Example illustration from Maybach 57 1 2 3 4 5 6 Front passenger seat adjustment Right rear passenger seat adjustment Seat fore and aft adjustment Seat cushion tilt Seat backrest tilt Head restraint height Even with the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** removed from the starter switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** removed from the vehicle, the power seats can be operated when the respective door is open. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.  Switch on the ignition ( page 62). or  Open the right rear passenger door.  Press switch 1.  Adjust passenger seat to desired posi- tion using switches 3 through 6.  To adjust right rear passenger seat, press button 2. i If you simultaneously operate an adjustment switch in the rear and on the front passenger side, no adjustment will take place. i Maybach 62: If the rear seat is in reclined position, the adjustment of the front passenger’s !
seat backrest and Do not move the front passenger seat completely forward if objects are stored in the front passenger-side footwell.
longitudinal position toward the rear is restricted. 147 Controls in detail Seats i Adjusting the front passenger seat position from the rear is not possible if you activate the override switch ( page 105). The switches for the front seats are located on the inner side of the seat. The switches for the rear seats on Maybach 57 are located on the inner side of the seat. Multicontour seats The multicontour seat has a movable seat cushion and inflatable air cushions built into the seat backrest to provide additional lumbar and side support. The seat cushion movement, seat backrest cushion height and curvature can be continuously varied with regulators on the right side of the seat after switching on ignition. i Vehicles with rear center seat*: The rear center seat is not a multicontour seat. 148 Driver’s seat/front passenger seat 1 2 3 4 Lumbar region support Shoulder region support Side bolster adjustment Massage function (PULSE) Rear seats (Maybach 57) 1 2 3 4 Lumbar region support Shoulder region support Side bolster adjustment Massage function (PULSE) Controls in detail Seats The switches for the rear seats on Maybach 62 are located on the outer side of the seat. Lumbar region support Massage function (PULSE)  Press k or j on rocker You can reduce muscle tension during long trips by periodically using the massage function. switch 1. This selects the air cushion you wish to adjust.  Press æ or ç on rocker switch 1. The air cushion inflates or deflates. i  Press æ or ç on switch 2. The massage function switches off automatically after approximately 8 minutes. The indicator lamp goes out. Rear seats (Maybach 62) Lumbar region support Shoulder region support Side bolster adjustment Massage function (PULSE)  Switch on the ignition ( page 62). The indicator lamp on button 4 comes on. The air cushions in the lumbar region inflate and deflate rhythmically. Shoulder region support The air cushion inflates or deflates. 1 2 3 4  Press button 4. Side bolster adjustment  Adjust the side bolsters so that they provide good lateral support using switch 3. i When the engine is turned off, the last cushion setting is retained in memory, and the cushion is automatically adjusted to this setting when the engine is restarted. 149 Controls in detail Seats Seat heating The red indicator lamps in the switch show the heating level selected: The switch is located on the respective door. i If one or all of the lamps on the seat heating switch are flashing, there is insufficient voltage due to too many electrical consumers are turned on. The seat heating switches off automatically. Three indicator lamps on (highest level). After approximately 5 minutes, seat heating is automatically switched to level 2. 2 Two indicator lamps on. After approximately 10 minutes, seat heating is automatically switched to level 1. 1 One indicator lamp on (lowest level). After approximately 20 minutes, seat heating is automatically switched off. off No indicator lamp on. i The rear center seat* cannot be heated. 150  Press switch 1 repeatedly until all in- dicator lamps in the switch go out. Level 3 Switching off seat heating Example illustration from Maybach with seat ventilation* 1 Seat heating switch  Switch on the ignition ( page 62). Switching on seat heating  Press switch 1. Three red indicator lamps in the switch come on.  Continue pressing switch 1 until de- sired seat heating level is reached. The seat heating will switch back on again automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is available. Controls in detail Seats Seat ventilation* The switch is located on the respective door. i Switching off seat ventilation The rear center seat* cannot be ventilated.  Press switch 1 ( page 151) repeat-  Switch on the ignition ( page 62). Switching on seat ventilation  Press switch 1. Three blue indicator lamps in the switch come on.  Continue pressing switch 1 until the desired seat ventilation level is reached. 1 Seat ventilation switch i The blue indicator lamps in the switch show the ventilation level selected: The seat ventilation for the driver’s seat can be activated using summer opening feature ( page 235). Level 3 Three indicator lamps on (highest level). 2 Two indicator lamps on. 1 One indicator lamp on (lowest level). off No indicator lamp on. edly until all indicator lamps go out. i If one or all of the lamps flash on the seat ventilation switch, there is insufficient voltage due to too many electrical consumers being switched on. The seat ventilation switches off automatically. The seat ventilation will switch back on again automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is available. 151 Controls in detail Memory function Prior to operating the vehicle, the driver should check and adjust the seat height, seat position fore and aft, and seat backrest angle if necessary, to ensure adequate control, reach and comfort. The head restraint should also be adjusted for proper height. See also the section on airbags ( page 89) for proper seat positioning. In addition, adjust the steering wheel to ensure adequate control, reach, operation and comfort. Both the inside and outside rear view mirrors should be adjusted for adequate rear vision. Fasten seat belts. Infants and small children should be seated in a properly secured restraint system that complies with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 and 225 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 and 210.2. 152 With the memory function you can store up to five different settings. The following settings are stored for each stored position when using the buttons on the driver’s door:
Driver’s seat, backrest and head restraint position
Settings for driver’s multicontour seat
Steering wheel position
Interior rear view mirror position
Exterior rear view mirrors position The following settings are stored for each stored position when using the buttons on the passenger door and the rear doors:
Front and rear outer seats, backrest and head restraint positions
Settings for front and rear outer multicontour seats Warning! G Do not activate the memory function while driving. Activating the memory function while driving could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Controls in detail Memory function The memory button and stored position buttons are located on the respective door. Storing positions in memory  Adjust the seats, steering wheel and mirrors to the desired position ( page 65).  On the driver’s side: adjust the steering wheel ( page 68) and the rear view mirrors ( page 70) to the de- sired position.  Press memory button M.  Release memory button M and push memory position button 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 within 3 seconds. Example illustration from Maybach 57 1 Memory button M 2 Memory position buttons 1 - 5  Switch on the ignition ( page 62). or All the settings are stored at the selected position. Recalling positions from memory ! Do not operate the power seats using the memory button if the seat backrest is in an extremely reclined position. Doing so could cause damage to front or rear seats. First move seat backrest to an upright position.  Press and hold memory position button 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 until the seat, steering wheel and mirrors have fully moved to the stored positions. i Releasing the button immediately stops movement to the stored positions.  Open the respective door. 153 Controls in detail Memory function Storing exterior rear view mirror parking position For easier parking you can adjust the passenger exterior rear view mirror so that you can see the right rear wheel as soon as you engage reverse gear R. The buttons are located on the driver’s door.  Press button 1. The passenger-side exterior rear view mirror is selected.  Adjust the exterior rear view mirror with button 2 so that you see the rear wheel and the road curb. For information on activating the parking position, see “Activating exterior rear view mirror parking position” ( page 208).  Press memory button 3.  Within 3 seconds, press bottom of ad- justment button 2. The parking position is stored if the mirror does not move. 1 Exterior rear view mirror (passengerside) 2 Adjustment button 3 Memory button M  Stop the vehicle in a safe location.  Make sure the ignition is switched on ( page 62). 154 i If the mirror does move, repeat the above steps. After the setting is stored, you can move the mirror again. Controls in detail Lighting  Lighting For information on how to switch on the headlamps and use the turn signals, see “Switching on headlamps” ( page 78) and “Turn signals” ( page 79). Exterior lamp switch The exterior lamp switch is located on the dashboard to the left of the steering wheel. i The active Bi-Xenon headlamps1 monitor your steering angle and driving speed, then automatically shift their beams to either side to better follow the curvature of the road ahead, increasing usable illumination over conventional headlamps. 1 Off Daytime running lamp mode ( page 157) U Automatic headlamp mode Daytime running lamp mode ( page 157) If you drive in countries where vehicles drive on the other side of the road than the country where the vehicle is registered, you must have the headlamps modified for symmetrical low beams. Relevant information can be obtained at an authorized Maybach Studio. i M Exterior lamp switch C Parking lamps (also side marker lamps, tail lamps, license plate lamps, instrument panel lamps) B Low beam headlamps (or high beam headlamps when the combination switch is pushed forward) and parking lamps ˆ Standing lamps, right (turn left one stop) ‚ Standing lamps, left (turn left two stops) C Indicator lamp for parking lamps ‡ Indicator lamp for front fog lamps † Indicator lamp for rear fog lamp If equipped. 155 Controls in detail Lighting i G With the SmartKey removed from the starter switch or the engine turned off with KEYLESS-GO** and the driver’s door open, a warning sounds if the parking lamps or low beam headlamps are switched on. Warning!
the headlamps may switch off unexpectedly when the system senses bright ambient light, for example light from oncoming traffic. The message TURN OFF LIGHTS appears in the multifunction display.
the headlamps will not be automatically switched on under foggy conditions. Manual headlamp mode The low beam headlamps and parking lamps can be switched on and off with the exterior lamp switch. Automatic headlamp mode The following lamps switch on and off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light:
Low beam headlamps
Tail and parking lamps
License plate lamps
Side marker lamps 156 If the exterior lamp switch is set to U, To minimize risk to you and to others, activate headlamps by turning exterior lamp switch to B when driving or when traffic and/or ambient lighting conditions require you to do so. In low ambient lighting conditions, only switch from position U to B with the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location. Switching from U to B will briefly switch off the headlamps. Doing so while driving in low ambient lighting conditions may result in an accident. The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid to the driver. The driver is responsible for the operation of the vehicle’s lights at all times. i The front fog lamps and rear fog lamp cannot be switched on manually with exterior lamp switch in position U. To activate the fog lamps, turn exterior lamp switch to position B and pull the exterior lamp switch to first or second stop ( page 158).  Turn the exterior lamp switch to position U. With the SmartKey in starter switch position 1 or the KEYLESS-GO** start/ stop button pressed once, only the parking lamps will switch on and off automatically. When the engine is running, the low beam headlamps, the tail and parking lamps, the license plate lamps, and the side marker lamps will switch on and off automatically. Controls in detail Lighting Daytime running lamp mode Canada only USA only  Turn exterior lamp switch to The daytime running lamp mode is mandatory and therefore in a constant mode. By default, the daytime running lamp mode is deactivated. Activate the daytime running lamp mode using the control system, see “Setting daytime running lamp mode (USA only)” ( page 191). position M or U. When the engine is running, the low beam headlamps are switched on. In low ambient light conditions, the following lamps will switch on additionally:
tail and parking lamps
license plate lamps
side marker lamps For nighttime driving you should turn the exterior lamp switch to position B to permit activation of the high beam headlamps. i With the daytime running lamp mode activated and the exterior lamp switch in position M, the high beam headlamps cannot be switched on. When the engine is running, and you shift from a driving position to position N or P, the low beam headlamps will switch off with a 3-minute delay. When the engine is running, and you
turn the exterior lamp switch to position C, the parking lamps switch on additionally.
turn the exterior lamp switch to position B, the manual headlamp mode has priority over the daytime running lamp mode. The corresponding exterior lamps switch on ( page 459). When the engine is running, and you turn the exterior lamp switch to position C or B, the manual headlamp mode has priority over the daytime running lamp mode. The corresponding exterior lamps switch on ( page 459). Locator lighting and night security illumination Locator lighting and night security illumination are described in the control system section under “Setting locator lighting” ( page 192) and “Setting night security illumination” ( page 193). The high beam flasher is available at all times. 157 Controls in detail Lighting i Switching on fog lamps Warning! G In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions, only switch from position U to B with the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location. Switching from U to B will briefly switch off the headlamps. Doing so while driving in low ambient lighting conditions may result in an accident. Fog lamps cannot be switched on with exterior lamp switch in position U. For switching on the fog lamps, turn exterior lamp switch to position B first. Switching on front fog lamps  Switch on the low beam headlamps ( page 78).  Pull out exterior lamp switch to first stop. i Fog lamps will operate with the parking lamps and/or the low beam headlamps on. Fog lamps should only be used in conjunction with low beam headlamps. Consult your State or Province Motor Vehicle Regulations regarding permissible lamp operation. 158 The front fog lamps are switched on. The green indicator lamp ‡ in the exterior lamp switch comes on ( page 155).  Push in the exterior lamp switch. The front fog lamps are switched off. The green indicator lamp ‡ in the exterior lamp switch goes out. Switching on rear fog lamp (driver’s side only)  Switch on the front fog lamps ( page 158).  Pull out exterior lamp switch to sec- ond stop. The rear fog lamp is switched on. The green indicator lamp † in the exterior lamp switch comes on ( page 155).  Push in the exterior lamp switch to first stop. The rear fog lamp is switched off. The green indicator lamp † in the exterior lamp switch goes out. The front fog lamps remain lit. Controls in detail Lighting Combination switch The combination switch is located on the left side of the steering column.  Pull the combination switch in direc- tion of arrow 2 to its original position to switch off the high beam. The high beam headlamp indicator lamp A in the instrument cluster goes out. High beam flasher  Pull the combination switch briefly in direction of arrow 2. 1 High beam 2 High beam flasher High beam  Turn exterior lamp switch to position B or U ( page 155).  Push the combination switch in direc- tion of arrow 1 to switch on the high beam. Cornering lamps Depending on production date, your vehicle may be equipped with cornering lamps. If equipped, the cornering lamps allow you to better light up the road in front of you when you are turning the vehicle around a curve. Cornering lamps will operate with the engine running and with:
the exterior lamp switch in position B ( page 155) or
the exterior lamp switch in position U ( page 155) or
the daytime running lamp mode activated ( page 191) i Cornering lamps will only come on in low ambient lighting conditions. The cornering lamps function is not available at a vehicle speed above 25 mph (40 km/h). The high beam headlamp indicator lamp A in the instrument cluster comes on. 159 Controls in detail Lighting Driving forward Switching on cornering lamps  Depending on whether you are turn- ing left or right, switch on the left or right turn signal ( page 79). The respective cornering lamp comes on and illuminates the road onto which you are turning. i The cornering lamps will come on automatically up to a speed of approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) depending on the steering angle, even if you did not switch on either turn signal. If the cornering lamps came on automatically, they will also go out automatically depending on the steering angle. 160 Switching off the cornering lamps The combination switch for the turn signal resets automatically after major steering wheel movements. This will switch off the cornering lamps if they were activated by switching on the left or right turn signal. If the turn signal should stay on after making the turn, the turn signal and cornering lamp can be switched off by returning the combination switch to its original position. i If you are driving faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) when activating the turn signal indicator, the cornering lamp function is switched off. Driving rearward Switching on cornering lamps  Place the gear selector lever in position R. The inverse cornering lamp comes on automatically depending on the steering direction and steering angle. Switching off cornering lamps  Place the gear selector lever out of position R. The respective cornering lamp goes out. Controls in detail Lighting Hazard warning flasher The hazard warning flasher can be switched on at all times, even with the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** removed from the starter switch or with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** removed from the vehicle. The hazard warning flasher switches on automatically when an airbag deploys. The hazard warning flasher switch is located on the upper part of the front center console. Switching on the hazard warning flasher  Press the hazard warning flasher switch 1. Switching off the hazard warning flasher  Press hazard warning flasher All turn signals flash. switch 1 again. i i With the hazard warning flasher activated and the combination switch set for either left or right turn, only the respective left or right turn signal will operate when the SmartKey in the starter switch is in position 1 or 2 or the KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button ( page 63) is pressed once or twice. If the hazard warning flasher was activated automatically, also press hazard warning flasher switch 1 to switch off the hazard warning flasher. 1 Hazard warning flasher switch 161 Controls in detail Lighting Interior lighting in the front The controls are located in the overhead control panel. Automatic control Deactivating  Press automatic control switch 3 1 2 3 4 5 Left front reading lamp on/off Rear interior lighting on/off Automatic control on/off Front interior lighting on/off Right front reading lamp on/off ! Leaving an interior light switch in the ON position for extended periods of time with the engine turned off could result in a discharged battery. 162 For more information, see “Setting interior lighting delayed switch-off” ( page 194). again. i The interior lighting remains switched off in darkness, even when you: If the door remains open, the interior lighting switches off automatically after approximately 5 minutes.
unlock the vehicle
remove the SmartKey from the starter switch An interior lamp switched on manually does not go out automatically.
open a door Activating  Press automatic control switch 3. The interior lighting switches on in darkness when you:
the vehicle is unlocked
remove the SmartKey from the starter switch
open a door The interior lighting are switched off after a preset time ( page 194). Controls in detail Lighting Manual control Front interior lighting  Press front interior lighting switch 4. The front interior lighting switches on.  Press front interior lighting switch 4 again. The front interior lighting switches off. Rear interior lighting  Press rear interior lighting switch 2. The rear interior lighting switches on.  Press rear interior lighting switch 2 again. The rear interior lighting switches off. Interior lighting in the rear The control panel is located between the rear seats. ! Leaving an interior light switch in the ON position for extended periods of time with the engine turned off could result in a discharged battery. Front reading lamps The front reading lamps are integrated into the interior rear view mirror.  Press front reading lamp switch 1 or 5 to switch on the desired front reading lamp.  Press front reading lamp switch 1 or 5 again to switch off the respective front reading lamp. 163 Controls in detail Lighting Maybach 57 with rear door window curtains* 1 2 3 4 Left rear reading lamp on/off Right rear reading lamp on/off Ambient lighting on/off Thumbwheel for dimming ambient lighting 5 Rear interior lighting on/off 164 Maybach 57 with rear door window curtains* (vehicles with rear center seat*) Maybach 57 without rear door window curtains* 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 Left rear reading lamp on/off Right rear reading lamp on/off Ambient lighting on/off Thumbwheel for dimming ambient lighting 5 Rear interior lighting on/off Left rear reading lamp on/off Right rear reading lamp on/off Rear interior lighting on/off Thumbwheel for dimming ambient lighting 5 Ambient lighting on/off Controls in detail Lighting Maybach 57 without rear door window curtains* (vehicles with rear center seat*) 1 2 3 4 Left rear reading lamp on/off Right rear reading lamp on/off Rear interior lighting on/off Thumbwheel for dimming ambient lighting 5 Ambient lighting on/off Maybach 62 with tilt/sliding sunroof 1 2 3 4 Left rear reading lamp on/off Right rear reading lamp on/off Headliner lamps/pillar uplights on/off Thumbwheel for dimming ambient lighting/headliner lamps/pillar uplights 5 Ambient lighting on/off 6 Rear interior lighting on/off Maybach 62 with tilt/sliding sunroof (vehicles with rear center seat* in storage compartment/drawer) 1 2 3 4 Left rear reading lamp on/off Right rear reading lamp on/off Headliner lamps/pillar uplights on/off Thumbwheel for dimming ambient lighting/headliner lamps/pillar uplights 5 Ambient lighting on/off 6 Rear interior lighting on/off 165 Controls in detail Lighting Manual control Rear interior lighting  Press the switch at the ò symbol to switch the rear interior lighting on.  Press the switch at the ò symbol again to switch the rear interior lighting off. Rear reading lamps Maybach 62 with electrotransparent roof* 1 2 3 4 Left rear reading lamp on/off Right rear reading lamp on/off Roof lighting on/off Thumbwheel for dimming ambient lighting/roof lighting 5 Ambient lighting on/off 6 Rear interior lighting on/off 166 Maybach 62 with electrotransparent roof* (vehicles with rear center seat* in storage compartment/drawer) 1 2 3 4 Left rear reading lamp on/off Right rear reading lamp on/off Roof lighting on/off Thumbwheel for dimming ambient lighting/roof lighting 5 Ambient lighting on/off 6 Rear interior lighting on/off  Press respective switch 1 or 2 at X symbol to switch the corresponding rear reading lamps on.  Press respective switch 1 or 2 at X symbol again to switch the corresponding rear reading lamps off. Controls in detail Lighting Ambient lighting Headliner lamps and pillar uplights* Electrotransparent roof lighting* The ambient lighting switches on and off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light. In Maybach 62 with tilt/sliding sunroof, the headliner and pillar can be illuminated. In Maybach 62 with an electrotransparent roof, the roof lining can be illuminated when the screen is closed. You can switch on or off ambient lighting manually.  Press switch 3 to switch the headlin-  Press switch 3 to switch the roof  Press the switch at the ð symbol to  Press switch 3 to switch the headlin- switch the ambient lighting on. er lamps and pillar uplights on. er lamps and pillar uplights off. lighting on.  Press switch 3 to switch the roof lighting off.  Press the switch at the ð symbol to switch the ambient lighting off. Dimming ambient lighting, headliner lamps and pillar uplights* and roof lighting*  Turn thumbwheel 4 until the cur- rent ambient lighting has reached the desired intensity. 167 Controls in detail Lighting Courtesy lighting For better orientation in the dark, courtesy lamps will illuminate the interior of your vehicle as follows. With the automatic control activated:
the inside door handles
the driver’s and passenger footwells
rear passengers’ footwells (only Maybach 62) With the automatic control activated and the starter switch position 1 ( page 62):
the inside door handles
the center console i If you turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0 and switch off the exterior headlamps, the door entry lamps will remain lit for approximately 5 minutes. 168 Door entry lamps For better orientation in the dark, the corresponding door entry lamps will switch on in darkness when you open a door and the automatic control is activated. The door entry lamps switch off when the corresponding door is closed. i If you turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0 and switch off the exterior headlamps, the door entry lamps will remain lit for approximately 5 minutes. Trunk lighting The trunk lighting switches on if the trunk is opened. If the trunk remains open, the trunk lighting switches off automatically after approximately 10 minutes. Controls in detail Instrument cluster  Instrument cluster For a full view illustration of the instrument cluster, see “At a glance” ( page 24). If you open a door or press reset button J without turning on the ignition or the light, the multifunction display is only illuminated for approximately 30 seconds. Instrument cluster illumination You can change the instrument cluster settings in the Instrument cluster submenu of the control system ( page 190). Warning! 1 Reset button J The instrument cluster is activated when you:
open a door
switch on the ignition ( page 62)
press reset button J
switch on the exterior lamps G No messages will be displayed if either the instrument cluster or the multifunction display is inoperative. As a result, you will not be able to see information about your driving conditions, such as speed or outside temperature, warning/ indicator lamps, malfunction/ warning messages or the failure of any systems. Driving characteristics may be impaired. If you must continue to drive, please do so with added caution. Visit an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. 1 Knob for instrument cluster illumination Use the knob for instrument cluster illumination 1 to adjust the illumination brightness for the instrument cluster. i The instrument cluster illumination is dimmed or brightened automatically to suit ambient light conditions. The instrument cluster illumination will also be adjusted automatically when you switch on the vehicle’s exterior lamps. 169 Controls in detail Instrument cluster  Press the knob for instrument cluster ! Coolant temperature gauge illumination. The knob will pop out. To brighten illumination Warning!
Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it.  Turn the knob clockwise. The instrument cluster illumination will brighten. To dim illumination  Turn the knob in the instrument clus- ter counterclockwise. The instrument cluster illumination will dim. 170 G Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. Excessive coolant temperature trigger a warning in the multifunction display ( page 433). The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature above 248° F (120°C), i.e. in the red zone of the coolant temperature gauge. Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. i During severe operating conditions, e.g. stop-and-go traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to 248°F (120°C), i.e. close to the red zone of the coolant temperature gauge. Controls in detail Instrument cluster Trip odometer  Make sure you are viewing the trip odometer display ( page 173).  If it is not displayed, press button è or ÿ on the multifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the trip odometer appears in the multifunction display ( page 173).  Press and hold reset button J ( page 169) in the instrument clus- ter until the trip odometer is reset. Tachometer The red marking on the tachometer denotes excessive engine speed. ! Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds, as it may result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. To help protect the engine, the fuel supply is interrupted if the engine is operated within the red marking. Outside temperature indicator Warning! G The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially in wooded areas or on bridges. The outside temperature is indicated in the instrument cluster for the driver ( page 25) and in the roof lining for the rear seat passengers ( pages 33, 35, 37 or 39). 171 Controls in detail Instrument cluster Due to its location, the sensor can be affected by road or engine heat during idling or slow driving. Therefore, the accuracy of the displayed temperature can only be verified by comparison to a thermometer placed next to the sensor, not by comparison to external displays (e.g. bank signs etc.). When moving the vehicle into colder ambient temperatures (e.g. when leaving your garage), you will notice a delay before the lower temperature is displayed. A delay also occurs when ambient temperatures rise. This prevents inaccurate temperature indications caused by heat radiated from the engine during idling or slow driving. 172 Speedometer The speed is indicated in the instrument cluster for the driver ( page 25) and in the roof lining for the rear seat passengers ( pages 33, 35, 37 or 39). The segments in the speedometer of the instrument cluster show you which speed range is available to you.
Cruise control operation: Segments come on from the stored speed to the maximum speed.
Distronic** operation: One or two segments come on in the range for the stored speed. Clock The time is indicated in the instrument cluster for the driver in the tachometer display ( page 25) and in the roof lining for the rear seat passengers ( pages 33, 35, 37 or 39). You can adjust the clock using the COMAND system. Refer to the separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions. Controls in detail Control system  Control system The control system is activated as soon as the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to position 1 or the KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button is pressed once ( page 63). The control system enables you to
call up information about your vehicle
change vehicle settings For example, you can use the control system to find out when your vehicle is next due for service, to set the language for messages in the multifunction display, and much more. i The displays for the audio systems (radio, CD player) will appear in English, regardless of the language selected. Warning! G Multifunction display A driver’s attention to the road and traffic conditions must always be his/her primary focus when driving. For your safety and the safety of others, selecting features through the multifunction steering wheel should only be done by the driver when traffic and road conditions permit it to be done safely. 1 Trip odometer 2 Main odometer Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second. The control system relays information to the multifunction display. 173 Controls in detail Control system Multifunction steering wheel The displays in the multifunction display and the settings in the control system are controlled by the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel. 1 Multifunction display Operating control system 2 Selecting the submenu or setting the volume: Press button æ up/to increase ç down/to decrease 3 Telephone: Press button s to take a call to dial a call t to end a call to reject an incoming call 4 Menu systems: Press button è for next menu ÿ for previous menu 5 Moving within a menu: Press button 174 j for next display k for previous display Controls in detail Control system Depending on the selected menu ( page 176), pressing the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel will alter what is shown in the multifunction display. The information available in the multifunction display is arranged in menus, each containing a number of functions or submenus. The individual functions are then found within the relevant menu (radio or CD operations under AUDIO, for example). These functions serve to call up relevant information or to customize the settings for your vehicle. It is helpful to think of the menus, and the functions within each menu, as being arranged in a circular pattern.
If you press button è or ÿ repeatedly, you will pass through each menu one after the other.
If you press button k or j repeatedly, you will pass through each function display, one after the other, in the current menu. In the SETTINGS menu, instead of functions you will find a number of submenus for calling up and changing settings. For instructions on using these submenus, see “Settings menu” ( page 187). The number of menus available in the system depends on which optional equipment is installed in your vehicle. The menus are described on the following pages. 175 Controls in detail Control system Menus 176 This is what you will see when you scroll through the menus. The table on the next page provides an overview of the individual menus. Controls in detail Control system Menus, submenus and functions Menu 1 Menu 2 Menu 3 Menu 4 Menu 5 Menu 6 Standard display Audio Telephone Navigation Distronic** Trip computer Vehicle status mes- Settings sage memory1 ( page 178) ( page 179) ( page 181) ( page 184) ( page 184) ( page 185) Commands/submenus Call up main- Select radio tenance ser- station vice display Load phone book Show route Call up guidance in- settings structions, current direction traveled Menu 7 ( page 186) Menu 8 ( page 187) Fuel consump- Call up vehicle mal- Reset to faction statistics function, warning tory settings after start and system status messages stored in memory Check tire in- Select satel- Search for flation pres- lite radio sta- name in sure tion* phone book Fuel consumption statistics since the last reset Instrument cluster submenu Check enOperate the gine oil level CD player Call up range Lighting submenu Digital speedometer Vehicle submenu Convenience submenu 1 The vehicle status message memory menu is only displayed if there is a message stored. 177 Controls in detail Control system i The headings used in the menus table are designed to facilitate navigation within the system and are not necessarily identical to those shown in the control system displays. Standard display menu In basic mode, the multifunction display shows the trip odometer and the main odometer. This is known as the standard display. The first function displayed in each menu will automatically show you which part of the system you are in. The following functions are available: Function Page Calling up maintenance service display 396 Checking tire inflation pressure 375 Checking engine oil level 358 Calling up digital speedometer 178 Calling up digital speedometer  Press button k or j repeatedly 1 Trip odometer 2 Main odometer until the digital speedometer appears in the multifunction display. In case you see another display: The current vehicle speed is shown in the multifunction display.  Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until the standard display appears.  Press button k or j repeatedly to select the functions in the standard display menu. Current vehicle speed 178 Controls in detail Control system  Press button è or ÿ repeatedly Audio menu The functions in the AUDIO menu operate the audio equipment which you currently have turned on. If no audio equipment is currently turned on, the message AUDIO OFF is shown in the multifunction display. The following functions are available: Function Page Selecting radio station 179 Selecting satellite radio station (USA only) 179 Operating the CD player 180 Selecting radio station  Turn on COMAND and select radio. Refer to the separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions.  Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until you see the currently tuned station in the multifunction display. until you see the currently tuned station in the multifunction display. 1 Waveband 2 Station frequency  Press button k or j repeatedly until the desired station is found. i You can only store new stations using the corresponding feature on the radio. Refer to the separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions. Selecting satellite radio station (USA only) The SIRIUS satellite radio is treated as a radio application.  Turn on COMAND and select the cor- responding key  on the COMAND control panel. Refer to the separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions. 1 Channel name or number 2 SAT mode and preset number  Press button k or j repeatedly until the desired channel is found. i A subscription to satellite radio service provider is required for satellite radio operation. Contact an authorized Maybach Studio for details. For more information, refer to the separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions. 179 Controls in detail Control system Operating the CD player Select MP3-CD track  Turn on COMAND and select CD. Re-  Turn on COMAND and select MP3-CD. fer to the separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions. Refer to the separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions.  Press button è or ÿ repeatedly  Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until the settings for the CD currently being played are shown in the multifunction display. 1 Current track 2 Indicates CD mode  Press button k or j repeatedly until the desired track is selected. i You can only choose a CD using COMAND. Refer to the separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions. 180 until the settings for the MP3-CD currently being played are shown in the multifunction display. 1 Current track 2 Indicates MP3-CD mode  Press button k or j repeatedly until the desired track is selected. i Level of information displayed will vary depending on the information contained on the MP3-CD. Controls in detail Control system Telephone menu Warning! G A driver’s attention to the road and traffic conditions must always be his/her primary focus when driving. For your safety and the safety of others, we recommend that you pull over to a safe location and stop before making or taking a telephone call. If you choose to use the telephone while driving, please use the hands-free device and only use the telephone when weather, road and traffic conditions permit. Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a mobile telephone while driving a vehicle. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second. Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna) from inside the vehicle while the engine is running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/ or personal injury. You can use the functions in the PHONE menu to operate your telephone, provided it is connected to a hands-free system and switched on. Logging-on to a network  Switch on the telephone and COMAND.  Press button ÿ or è on the steering wheel repeatedly until you see the PHONE menu in the multifunction display. The standby message indicates that your telephone is ready for use and you can operate it using the control system. You may carry out the following functions: Which messages will appear in the multifunction display depends on whether your telephone is switched on or off: Function Dialing a number from the phone book 182
If the telephone is off, the message in the multifunction display is: PLEASE TURN PHONE ON. Redialing 183 Answering a call 183 If the telephone is switched on: Ending a call 183
Page The telephone will then search for a network. During this time the multifunction display reads NO SERVICE.
If the telephone is on: As soon as the telephone has found a network, READY appears in the multifunction display. 181 Controls in detail Control system Dialing a number from the phone book If your telephone is ready to receive calls, you may select and dial a number from the phone book.  Log on to the network ( page 181).  Press button ÿ or è repeatedly until you see the PHONE menu in the multifunction display.  Press button j or k. If you have just switched on the phone, the control system transmit the phone books of the SIM card (GSM) or the phone books of the mobile phones (GSM or CDMA). This can take several minutes, depending on how many entries each phone book contains. When you press button j or k during the download of the phone book the message LOADING PHBOOK! appears in the multifunction display for approximately 3 seconds. 182  Press button j or k repeatedly  Press button s. until the desired name appears in the multifunction display. The system dials the selected phone number. The stored names are displayed in ascending or descending alphabetical order. If the connection is successful, the name of the party you called and the duration of the call will appear in the multifunction display. i If you press and hold button j or k for longer than 1 second, the system scrolls rapidly through the list of names until you release the button again. If you do not want to use the telephone, press button t. 1 Caller’s name i If no connection is made, the control system stores each dialed number in the redial memory. Controls in detail Control system Redialing Answering a call The control system stores the most recently dialed phone numbers. This eliminates the need to search through your entire phone book. When your telephone is ready to receive calls, you can answer a call at any time. In the multifunction display you will then see the message:  Press button ÿ or è repeatedly  Press button t.  Press button s.  Press button j or k repeatedly until the desired name appears in the multifunction display. i If you do not want to use the telephone, press button t. You have answered the call. In the multifunction display you see the length of the call positioned above the number. Ending a call until you see the PHONE menu in the multifunction display. In the multifunction display you see the first number in the redial memory.  Press button s. You have ended the call. In the multifunction display you will again see the standby message. i The caller’s number appears only if it is transmitted. The caller’s name appears only if the number and the name are stored in the phone book.  Press button s. The control system dials the selected phone number. 183 Controls in detail Control system Navigation menu The NAVI menu contains the functions needed to operate your navigation system. until you see NAVI in the multifunction display. Distronic** menu Use the DISTRONIC menu to display the current settings for your Distronic system. What information is shown in the multifunction display depends on whether the Distronic system is active or inactive.
If COMAND is switched off, the message NAVI OFF is shown in the multifunction display. Please refer to the “Driving systems” section of this manual ( page 251) for instructions on how to activate Distronic.
With COMAND switched on but route guidance not activated, the direction of travel and, if available, the name of the street currently traveled on appear in the multifunction display.  Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
With COMAND switched on and route guidance activated, the direction of travel and maneuver instructions appear in the multifunction display.  Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until you see one of the following two pictures in the multifunction display. 1 Vehicle ahead, if detected 2 Actual distance to vehicle ahead 3 Preset distance threshold to vehicle ahead 4 Your vehicle 5 Symbol for activated distance warning function Distronic activated Distronic deactivated When Distronic is deactivated, you will see the standard display. When you activate Distronic, you will see the set speed for about 5 seconds in the Distronic display. The following display then appears: Please refer to the separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System manual for instructions on how to activate the route guidance system. 1 Distronic activated 184 Controls in detail Control system Incorporating statistics from the previous journey in the consumption statistics Trip computer menu Use the trip computer menu to call up statistical data on your vehicle. The following information is available: Function When you restart the engine, the AFTER START display flashes for: Page Fuel consumption statistics after start 185 Fuel consumption statistics since last reset 186 Resetting fuel consumption statistics 186 Distance to empty 186 Fuel consumption statistics after start  Press button ÿ or è repeatedly until you see the first function of the trip computer menu.  Press button j or k repeatedly until you see AFTER START in the multifunction display.
1 2 3 4 Distance driven since start Time elapsed since start Average fuel consumption since start Average speed since start a distance of approximately 1.25 miles (2 kilometers) or
a duration of 2 minutes During this period, the data from the previous journey can be incorporated as follows:  Press reset button J ( page 169) in the instrument cluster. The statistics will be incorporated. i If you do not press reset button J, the consumption statistics will be reset to 0. i Each time you call up the trip computer, the last function used appears as the first display. 185 Controls in detail Control system Fuel consumption since last reset  Press button ÿ or è repeatedly until you see the first function of the trip computer menu.  Press button j or k repeatedly until you see AFTER RESET in the multifunction display.  Press button j or k repeatedly until you see the reading that you want to reset in the multifunction display.  Press and hold reset button J ( page 169) in the instrument clus- ter until the value is reset to 0. Distance to empty  Press button ÿ or è repeatedly until you see the first function of the trip computer menu. Vehicle status message memory menu Use the vehicle status message memory menu to scan malfunction and warning messages that may be stored in the system. Such messages appear in the multifunction display and are based on conditions or system status the vehicle’s system has recorded. The vehicle status message memory menu only appears if there are any messages stored.  Press button j or k repeatedly 1 Distance driven since last reset 2 Time elapsed since last reset 3 Average fuel consumption since last reset 4 Average speed since last reset Resetting fuel consumption statistics  Press button ÿ or è repeatedly until you see the first function of the trip computer menu. 186 G until you see RANGE in the multifunction display. Warning! In the multifunction display you will see the calculated range based on the current fuel tank level. Malfunction and warning messages are only indicated for certain systems and are intentionally not very detailed. The malfunction and warning messages are simply a reminder with respect to the operation of certain systems and do not replace the owner’s and/or driver’s responsibility to maintain the vehicle’s operating safety by having all required maintenance and safety checks performed on the vehicle and by bringing the vehicle to an authorized Maybach Studio to address the malfunction and warning messages ( page 417). Controls in detail Control system  Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until the vehicle status message memory appears in the multifunction display. If the vehicle status message memory menu does not appear, then there are no messages stored. Vehicle status messages have been recorded If conditions have occurred causing status messages to be recorded, the number of messages appears in the multifunction display:  Press button k or j. The stored messages will now be displayed in order. See the “Practical hints” section for malfunction and warning messages ( page 417). Settings menu In the SETTINGS menu there are two functions:
The function TO RESET PRESS R BUTTON FOR 3 SEC., with which you can reset all the settings to the original factory settings.
A collection of submenus with which you can make individual settings for your vehicle. i The vehicle status message memory will be cleared when you switch off the ignition. You will then only see high-priority messages in the multifunction display. These are highlighted in red color ( page 417).  Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until you see SETTINGS in the multifunction display. 1 Number of messages 187 Controls in detail Control system Function Page Resetting all settings 188 Submenus in the Settings menu 188 Instrument cluster submenu 190 Lighting submenu 191 Vehicle submenu 195 Convenience submenu 195 Resetting all settings You can reset all the functions of all submenus to the factory settings.  Press reset button J ( page 169) in the instrument cluster for approximately 3 seconds. In the display you will see the request to press reset button J again to confirm.  Press reset button J again. The functions of all the submenus will reset to factory settings. i Submenus in the Settings menu The settings you have changed will not be reset unless you confirm the action by pressing reset button J a second time. After approximately 5 seconds, the SETTINGS menu appears again.  Press button j. The various submenus appear in the multifunction display. Due to safety reasons, resetting all of the settings while driving will not reset all of the values in the LIGHTING or the VEHICLE submenu.  Press button æ or ç. The selection marker moves to the next submenu. The submenus are arranged by hierarchy. Scroll down with button ç, scroll up with button æ. With the selection marker on the desired submenu, use button j to access the individual functions within that submenu. Once within the submenu, you can use button j to move to the next function or button k to move to the previous function within that submenu. The settings themselves are made with button æ or ç. 188 Controls in detail Control system The table below shows what settings can be changed within the various menus. Detailed instructions on making individual settings can be found on the following pages. INSTRUMENT CLUSTER LIGHTING VEHICLE CONVENIENCE Selecting speedometer display Setting daytime running lamp Setting automatic locking mode mode (USA only) Activating easy-entry/exit feature Selecting language Setting fold-in function for exterior rear view mirrors Setting locator lighting Setting night security illumination Setting interior lighting delayed shut-off Setting ambient lighting 189 Controls in detail Control system Instrument cluster submenu Selecting speedometer display mode Access the INST. CLUS. submenu via the SETTINGS menu. Use the INST. CLUS. submenu to change the instrument cluster display settings. The following functions are available:  Move the selection marker with Function Page Selecting speedometer display mode 190 Selecting language 190 The selection marker is on the current setting. button æ or ç to the INST. CLUS. submenu.  Press button j or k repeatedly until you see DISPLAY VALUES IN in the multifunction display. The selection marker is on the current setting.  Press button æ or ç to select the language to be used for the multifunction display messages. Available languages:  Press button æ or ç to set speedometer unit to MILES or KM. Selecting language  Move the selection marker with button æ or ç to the INST. CLUS. submenu.  Press button j or k repeatedly until you see LANGUAGE in the multifunction display. 190
German
English
French
Italian
Spanish Controls in detail Control system  Move the selection marker with Lighting submenu Access the LIGHTING submenu via the SETTINGS menu. Use the LIGHTING submenu to change the lamp and lighting settings on your vehicle. The following functions are available: Function Page button æ or ç to the LIGHTING submenu.  Press button j or k repeatedly until you see LIGHTING CIRCUIT HEADLAMP MODE in the multifunction display. The selection marker is on the current setting. In low ambient light conditions the following lamps will switch on additionally:
Parking lamps
Tail lamps
License plate lamps
Side marker lamps For more information on the daytime running lamp mode, see “Lighting” ( page 157). Setting daytime running lamp mode (USA only) 191 Setting locator lighting 192 i Setting night security illumination 193 Setting interior lighting delayed shut-off 194 If you turn the exterior lamp switch to another position, the respective lamp(s) will switch on. Setting ambient lighting 194 Setting daytime running lamp mode (USA only) i This function is not available in countries where the daytime running lamp mode is mandatory and therefore in a constant mode.  Press button æ or ç to select MANUAL or daytime running lamp CONSTANT mode. This function is not available in countries where daytime running lamps are mandatory. With daytime running lamp mode activated and the exterior lamp switch in position M or U, the low beam headlamps are switched on when the engine is running. For safety reasons, resetting the LIGHTING submenu to factory settings ( page 188) while driving will not reset the daytime running lamp mode. In the display you will then see the message: LIGHTING CANNOT BE COMPLETELY RESET TO FACTORY SETTINGS WHILE DRIVING. 191 Controls in detail Control system Setting locator lighting With the locator lighting feature activated and the exterior lamp switch in position U, the following lamps will switch on during darkness when the vehicle is unlocked using button ‹ on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO**:
Parking lamps
Tail lamps
License plate lamps
Side marker lamps
Front fog lamps
Exterior rear view mirrors 192 The locator lighting switches off when the driver’s door is opened. The selection marker is on the current setting. If you do not open a door after unlocking the vehicle with the SmartKey, the lamps will switch off automatically after approximately 40 seconds.  Move the selection marker with button æ or ç to the LIGHTING submenu.  Press button j or k repeatedly until you LOCATOR LIGHTING in the multifunction display.  Press button æ or ç to switch the locator lighting function ON.  Turn the exterior lamp switch to position U when exiting the vehicle ( page 155). The locator lighting feature is activated. Controls in detail Control system Setting night security illumination (Headlamps delayed switch-off) Use this function to set whether you would like the exterior lamps to remain on for 15 seconds during darkness after exiting the vehicle and all doors closed. With the delayed shut-off feature activated and the exterior lamp switch in position U before the engine is turned off, the following lamps will remain lit when the engine is turned off:
Parking lamps
Tail lamps
License plate lamps
Side marker lamps
Front fog lamps If after turning off the engine you do not open a door or do not close an opened door, the lamps will automatically switch off after 60 seconds. To select delayed shut-off period:  Move the selection marker with button æ or ç to the LIGHTING submenu.  Press button j or k repeatedly until you see HEADLAMPS DELAYED SWITCH-OFF in the multifunction display. The selection marker is on the current setting. You can temporarily deactivate the headlamps delayed shut-off feature:  Before leaving the vehicle, turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0.  Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 2 and back to 0. The delayed shut-off feature is deactivated. It will reactivate as soon as you reinsert the SmartKey in the starter switch. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**:  Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop but- ton on the gear selector lever ( page 63).  Press button æ or ç to switch the headlamps delayed shut-off function ON.  Turn the exterior lamp switch to position U before turning off the engine ( page 155). 193 Controls in detail Control system Setting interior lighting delayed switch-off Use this function to set whether you would like the interior lighting to remain lit for 10 seconds during darkness after you have removed the SmartKey from the starter switch.  Move the selection marker with button æ or ç to the LIGHTING submenu.  Press button j or k repeatedly until you see INTERIOR LIGHTING DELAYED SWITCH-OFF in the multifunction display. The selection marker is on the current setting. 194  Press button æ or ç to switch the interior lighting delayed shut-off function ON. The selection marker is on the current setting. Setting ambient lighting Use this function, you can adjust the brightness of the ambient lighting.  Move the selection marker with button æ or ç to the LIGHTING submenu.  Press button j or k repeatedly until you see AMBIENT LIGHT in the multifunction display.  Press button æ or ç to select the brightness of the lighting. The setting LEVEL 1 represents the darkest level and setting LEVEL 5 the brightest level. The ambient light is switched off at setting OFF. Controls in detail Control system  Press button j or k repeatedly Vehicle submenu Access the VEHICLE submenu via the SETINGS menu. Use the VEHICLE submenu to make general vehicle settings. The following functions are available: Function until you see AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK in the multifunction display. The selection marker is on the current setting. Convenience submenu Access the CONVENIENCE submenu via the SETTINGS menu. Use the CONVENIENCE submenu to change the settings for a number of convenience features. The following functions are available: Page Set automatic locking Function 195 Setting automatic locking Use this function to activate or deactivate the automatic central locking. With the automatic central locking system activated, the vehicle is centrally locked at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h). Page Activating easy-entry/exit feature 196 Setting fold-in function for exterior rear view mirrors 196  Press button æ or ç to switch AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK ON or OFF.  Move the selection marker with button æ or ç to the VEHICLE submenu. 195 Controls in detail Control system  Move the selection marker with Activating easy-entry/exit feature Use this function to activate and deactivate the easy-entry/exit feature ( page 69). Warning! button æ or ç to the CONVENIENCE submenu.  Press button j or k repeatedly until you see EASY-ENTRY FEATURE ACTIVATE in the multifunction display. G The selection marker is on the current setting. You must make sure no one can become trapped or injured by the moving steering wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is activated.  Move the selection marker to the CONVENIENCE submenu using button æ or ç.  Press button j or k repeatedly until the message FOLD IN MIRRORS WHEN LOCKING appears in the multifunction display. The selection marker is on the current setting. To stop steering wheel adjustment, do one of the following:
Move steering column stalk ( page 68).
Press seat adjustment switch ( page 66).
Press one of the memory position buttons or the memory button M ( page 153). Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could open the driver’s door and unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit feature, which could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. 196  Press button æ or ç to switch the easy-entry/exit feature ON or OFF. Setting fold-in function for exterior rear view mirrors Using this function, you can set the exterior rear view mirrors to be automatically
folded in when you lock your vehicle
folded out when you unlock your vehicle  Press button æ or ç to switch the automatic fold-in setting for the mirrors ON or OFF. Controls in detail Automatic transmission  Automatic transmission For information on driving with an automatic transmission see “Automatic transmission” ( page 75). Your vehicle’s transmission adapts its gear shifting process to your individual driving style by continually adjusting the shift points up or down. These shift point adjustments are performed based on current operating and driving conditions. Warning! G Make sure that absolutely no objects are obstructing the pedals’ range of movement. Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all obstacles. If there are any floormats or carpets in the footwell, make sure that the pedals still have sufficient clearance. If the operating conditions change, the automatic transmission reacts by adjusting its shift program. The automatic transmission selects individual gears automatically, depending on:
the gear selector lever position D ( page 199) with gear ranges 4, 3, 2, 1 ( page 202)
the selected program mode (C/S) ( page 203)
the position of the accelerator pedal ( page 201)
the vehicle speed i During the brief warm-up the transmission upshifting is delayed. This allows the catalytic converter to heat up more quickly to operating temperature. Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission 197 Controls in detail Automatic transmission Warning! 1 Current gear range/gear selector lever position 2 Current program mode The current gear range/gear selector lever position and program mode (C/S) appear in the tachometer display. 198 ! G Allow engine to warm up under low load use. Do not place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached. It is dangerous to shift the gear selector lever out of P or N if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal. Shift into reverse gear R or parking position P only when the vehicle is stopped. Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended period when driving off on slippery road surfaces. This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. When the gear selector lever is in position D, you can influence transmission shifting by:
limiting the gear range
changing gears manually Controls in detail Automatic transmission Gear selector lever position Effect The SmartKey can only be removed from the starter switch with the gear selector lever in position P. With the SmartKey removed, the gear selector lever is locked in position P. Effect ì Park position Gear selector position when the vehicle is parked. Only place gear selector lever in position P when vehicle is stopped. The park position is not intended to serve as a brake when the vehicle is parked. Rather, the driver should always set the parking brake in addition to placing the gear selector lever in position P to secure the vehicle. í Effect ë Neutral No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive axle. When the brakes are released, the vehicle can be moved freely (pushed or towed). Reverse gear To avoid damage to the transmission, never engage N while driving. Place gear selector lever in position R only when vehicle is stopped. If the ESP® is deactivated or malfunctioning: Only move gear selector lever to N if the vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g. on icy roads. ê Drive The transmission shifts automatically. All five forward gears are available. 199 Controls in detail Automatic transmission ! Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any other reason with gear selector lever in N can result in transmission damage that is not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. Warning! G Getting out of your vehicle with the gear selector lever not fully engaged in position P is dangerous. Also, position P alone is not intended to or capable of preventing your vehicle from moving, possibly hitting people or objects. Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to position P ( page 77). When parked on an incline, turn the front wheels towards the road curb. Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system, as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire. 200 Warning! G When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could move the gear selector lever from position P, which could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. Controls in detail Automatic transmission Stopping Maneuvering Accelerator position When you stop briefly, e.g. at traffic lights: When you maneuver in tight areas, e.g. when pulling into a parking space: Your driving style influences the transmission’s shifting behavior:  Leave the transmission in gear.  Control the vehicle speed by gradual- Driving tips Less throttle Earlier upshifting More throttle Later upshifting  Hold the vehicle with the brake. When you stop longer with the engine idling and/or on a hill: Kickdown  Set the parking brake. Use kickdown when you want maximum acceleration.  Move gear selector lever to  Press the accelerator past the point of resistance. The transmission shifts into a lower gear.  Ease up on the accelerator when you position P. ly releasing the brakes.  Accelerate gently.  Never abruptly step on the accelera- tor. Working on the vehicle Warning! G When working on the vehicle, set the parking brake and move gear selector lever to position P. Otherwise the vehicle could roll away. have reached the desired speed. The transmission shifts up again. 201 Controls in detail Automatic transmission Gear ranges With the gear selector lever in position D, you can select a gear range for the automatic transmission to operate within. You can limit the gear range by pressing the gear selector lever to the left (D-), and reverse the gear range limit by pressing the gear selector lever to the right (D+). The selected gear range will appear in the tachometer display ( page 198). If you press on the accelerator when the engine has reached its rpm limit, the transmission will upshift beyond any gear range limit selected. 202 Effect Effect é The transmission shifts through fourth gear only. ç è The transmission shifts through third gear only. Allows the use of engine’s braking power when driving With this selection you can use the braking effect of the engine.
on steep downgrades
in mountainous regions
under extreme operating conditions æ The transmission shifts through second gear only. The transmission operates in first gear only. For maximum use of engine’s braking effect on very steep or lengthy downgrades. Controls in detail Automatic transmission Automatic shift program The program mode selector switch is located on the lower part of the front center console. ! Never change the program mode when the gear selector lever is out of position P. This could result in a change of driving characteristics for which you may not be prepared. i The last selected program mode (C or S) is switched on when the engine is restarted.  Press program mode selector switch 1 repeatedly until the letter of the desired program mode appears in the tachometer display. Select C for comfort driving:
Traction and driving stability are improved on icy roads.
Upshifts occur earlier even when you give more gas. The engine then operates at lower rpms and the wheels are less likely to spin. 1 Program mode selector switch C Comfort For comfort driving S Sport For standard driving The current gear selector lever position and the selected program mode (C/S) are indicated in the tachometer display ( page 198). 203 Controls in detail Automatic transmission One-touch gearshifting Even with an automatic transmission, you can change the gears manually and limit or extend the gear range for automatic shifting with the gear selector lever in position D. ! Allow engine to warm up under low load use. Do not place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached. Shift into reverse gear R or parking position P only when the vehicle is stopped. Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended period when driving off on slippery road surfaces. This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. 204 Upshifting Downshifting Warning! G On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in order to obtain braking action. This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control.  Briefly press the gear selector lever to the left in the D– direction. The transmission will shift from the current gear to the next lower gear as permitted by the shift program. This action simultaneously limits the gear range of the transmission ( page 202). i To avoid overrevving the engine when the gear selector lever is moved to the D– direction, the transmission will not shift to a lower gear if the engine’s max. speed would be exceeded.  Briefly press the gear selector lever to the right in the D+ direction. The transmission will shift from the current gear to the next higher gear as permitted by the shift program. This action simultaneously extends the gear range of the transmission. Canceling gear range limit  Press and hold the gear selector lever in the D+ direction until D reappears in the tachometer display. The transmission will shift from the current gear range directly to gear range D. Shifting into optimal gear range  Press and hold the gear selector lever in the D– direction. The transmission will automatically select the gear range suited for optimal acceleration and deceleration. This may involve shifting down one or more gears. Controls in detail Automatic transmission Emergency operation (Limp-home Mode) If vehicle acceleration becomes less responsive or sluggish or the transmission no longer shifts, the transmission is most likely operating in Limp-home (emergency operation) Mode. In this mode only second gear and reverse gear can be selected.  Stop the vehicle in a safe location.  Move gear selector lever to P.  Turn off the engine.  Wait at least 10 seconds before re- starting.  Restart the engine.  Move gear selector lever to position D (for second gear) or R.  Have the transmission checked at an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. 205 Controls in detail Good visibility For information on the windshield wipers, see “Windshield wipers” ( page 80). Headlamp cleaning system The button is located on the left side of the dashboard.  Switch on the ignition ( page 62).  Press button 1. The headlamps are cleaned with a high-pressure water jet. i
switched on the headlamps and
operated the windshield wipers with windshield washer fluid fifteen times the auto-dimming function is activated ( page 207)
the ignition is switched on When you switch off the ignition, the counter resets. 1 Headlamp washer button 206 Auto-dimming rear view mirrors The reflection brightness of the exterior rear view mirror on the driver’s side and the interior rear view mirror will respond automatically to glare when The headlamps will automatically be cleaned when you have
Rear view mirrors For information on setting the rear view mirrors, see “Mirrors” ( page 70). For information on filling up the washer reservoir, see “Windshield and headlamp washer system” ( page 501). and
incoming light from headlamps falls on the sensor in the interior rear view mirror The rear view mirror will not react if
reverse gear is engaged
the interior lighting is turned on Controls in detail Good visibility Warning! G The auto-dimming function does not react if incoming light is not aimed directly at sensors in the interior rear view mirror. The interior rear view mirror and the exterior rear view mirror on the driver’s side do not react, for example, if the rear window curtain is closed. Glare can endanger you and others. Warning! G In case of an accident, liquid electrolyte may escape from the mirror housing if the mirror glass breaks. Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not allow the liquid to come into contact with eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system. In case it does, immediately flush affected area with water, and seek medical help if necessary. ! Deactivating Electrolyte drops coming into contact with the vehicle paint finish can be completely removed only while in the liquid state by applying plenty of water. Warning! G Exercise care when using the passengerside exterior rear view mirror. The mirror surface is convex (outwardly curved surface for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror are closer than they appear. Check your interior rear view mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes.  Switch on the ignition ( page 62).  Press button 1. The green indicator lamp in button 1 goes out. Activating  Press button 1 again. The green indicator lamp in button 1 comes on. i The setting will remain stored even when you remove the SmartKey from the starter switch. 207 Controls in detail Good visibility Activating exterior rear view mirror parking position Follow these steps to activate the mirror parking position so that the passengerside exterior rear view mirror will be turned downward to the stored position. The buttons are located on the driver’s door.  Make sure you have stored a parking position for the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror ( page 154).  Switch on the ignition ( page 62).  Press button 2 for the passenger- side exterior rear view mirror.  Place the gear selector lever in re- verse gear R. The passenger-side exterior rear view mirror will be turned downward to the stored position. The exterior rear view mirror returns to its previously stored driving position: 1 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror 2 Passenger-side exterior rear view mirror 208
10 seconds after you put the gear selector lever out of position R
immediately once you exceed a vehicle speed of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)
immediately when you press the button for driver’s side exterior rear view mirror 1 Power folding exterior rear view mirrors Warning! G With the exterior rear view mirrors folded in when driving the vehicle, you cannot observe surrounding traffic conditions and which could result in an accident. Before driving the vehicle, make sure the exterior rear view mirrors are folded out. ! Before you drive the vehicle through an automatic car wash, fold the exterior mirrors in. Otherwise they may be damaged. Controls in detail Good visibility Folding exterior rear view mirrors in and out automatically Folding the exterior rear view mirrors in and out manually When the corresponding function in the control system is activated ( page 196): The exterior rear view mirrors can vibrate if they are not completely folded out.
The button is located on the driver’s door.
The exterior rear view mirrors automatically fold in as soon as the vehicle is locked from the outside. i If you are driving at more than approximately 9 mph (15 km/h), you will not be able to fold the exterior mirrors in.  Press button 1 again. The mirrors fold out. The exterior rear view mirrors automatically fold out as soon as the vehicle is unlocked and the driver’s or passenger door are subsequently opened. ! If an exterior mirror housing is forcibly pushed forward (hit from the rear), reposition it manually by applying firm pressure until it snaps back into place. 1 Button for folding exterior mirrors in and out  Switch on the ignition ( page 62).  Briefly press button 1. The mirrors fold in. If an exterior mirror is forcibly pushed rearward (hit from the front) press button 1 to fold mirrors in, then press button 1 to fold mirrors out. Do not force mirror by hand as it may damage the adjustment mechanism. The mirror housing is now properly positioned and you can adjust the mirror normally. 209 Controls in detail Good visibility Sun visors The sun visors protect you from sun glare while driving. Warning! Glare from the front G Do not use the vanity mirror while driving. Keep the mirrors in the sun visors closed while the vehicle is in motion. Reflected glare can endanger you and others. i 1 Sun visor For information on vanity mirrors ( page 281).  Swing sun visor 1 down. Glare from the front and sides ! Close the vanity mirror cover (if open) before you disengage sun visor 1 from mounting 2 and pivot it to the side. 1 Sun visor 2 Mounting 3 Additional sun visor  Swing sun visor 1 down.  Disengage sun visor 1 from mounting 2.  Pivot sun visor to the side. The sun visors are extendable.  Adjust the sun visors by pushing or pulling in direction of the arrows.  Swing additional sun visor 3 down. 210 Controls in detail Good visibility Rear window defroster The rear window defroster consumes high levels of energy. To keep battery drain to a minimum, switch off the defroster as soon as the rear window is clear. The heating time varies depending on outside temperature and driving conditions, ranging from approximately 6 minutes at temperatures above 43°F (6°C) to over 20 minutes at temperatures below -14°F (-26°C) and at high speed. Warning! Activating i  Press button F ( page 214). If the indicator lamp F is flashing, there is insufficient voltage due to too many electrical consumers are turned on. The rear window defroster switches off automatically. The indicator lamp on the button comes on. Deactivating  Press button F again. The indicator lamp on the button goes out. The rear window defroster will switch back on again automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is available. G Any accumulation of snow and ice should be removed from the rear window before driving. Visibility could otherwise be impaired, endangering you and others.  Switch on the ignition ( page 62). 211 Controls in detail Automatic climate control The automatic climate control is a 4-zone intelligent climate control system. Your vehicle interior is divided into four zones. With the help of a sun sensor, the automatic climate control determines the relation of the sun to the vehicle and automatically adjusts the inside temperature for every individual zone. Warning! G When operating the automatic climate control, the air that enters the passenger compartment through the air vents can be very hot or very cold (depending on the set temperature). This may cause burns or frostbite to unprotected skin in the immediate area of the air vents. Always keep sufficient distance between unprotected parts of the body and the air vents. If necessary, use the air distribution control ( page 214) to direct the air to air vents in the vehicle interior that are not in the immediate area of unprotected skin. The automatic climate control is operational whenever the engine is running. It cools the vehicle’s interior according to the angle and intensity of the sun’s rays, the outside temperature and the selected temperature. i Condensation may drip from underneath the vehicle. This is normal and not an indication of a malfunction. The activated charcoal filter, when switched on, markedly reduces odors and removes pollutants from the air entering the passenger compartment. Warning! G Follow the recommended settings for heating and cooling given on the following pages. Otherwise the windows could fog up, impairing visibility and endangering you and others. Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and odors are filtered out before outside air enters the passenger compartment through the air distribution system. The air conditioning will not engage (no cooling) if the air conditioning mode is deactivated ( page 221). i Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution) may require replacement of the filter before its scheduled interval. A clogged filter will reduce the air volume to the interior. If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate the interior before driving off, see “Summer opening feature” ( page 235). The automatic climate control will then adjust the interior temperature to the set value much faster. Keep the air intake grille in front of the windshield free of snow, leaves, sticks and any other debris. Do not obstruct air volume by placing objects on the air flow-through exhaust slots below the rear window. 212 Controls in detail Automatic climate control Cockpit 1 Side air vent, left, adjustable 5 Side air vent, right, adjustable 8 Automatic climate control panel 2 Center air vent, left, adjustable 6 Thumbwheel for right side air vent 3 Fixed air vent 7 Thumbwheel for right center air vent 9 Thumbwheel for left center air vent 4 Center air vent, right, adjustable a Thumbwheel for left side air vent 213 Controls in detail Automatic climate control Automatic climate control panel, front 1 Air distribution and air volume, left (automatic) 8 Air distribution, right (manual) d AC cooling on/off 9 Air distribution and air volume, right (automatic) e Residual heat and ventilation 2 Air distribution, left (manual) 3 Air volume, left a Rear window defroster g Air recirculation 4 Temperature control, left b Rear air-conditioning remote control h Front defroster 5 Display 6 Temperature control, right 7 Air volume, right 214 c Automatic climate control on/off button f Activated charcoal filter Controls in detail Automatic climate control Deactivating the climate control system It is possible to completely deactivate the automatic climate control system. Deactivating  Press button M ( page 214). Warning! G When the automatic climate control is switched off, the outside air supply and circulation are also switched off. Only choose this setting for a short time. Otherwise the windows could fog up, impairing visibility and endangering you and others. Reactivating  Switch on the ignition ( page 62).  Press button M or U ( page 214) Operating the climate control system in automatic mode i When operating the climate control system in automatic mode, you will only rarely need to adjust the temperature, air volume and air distribution. In automatic mode, cooling with dehumidify is switched on. This function can be switched off, if necessary. i The automatic climate control system can also be switched on and off separately on each side of the passenger compartment, as required.  Use temperature controls 4 for the left side or 6 ( page 214) for the right side to separately adjust the air temperature on each side of the passenger compartment. The temperature of the vehicle interior is adjusted automatically. Deactivating  Press one button U ( page 214). The indicator lamp on the button goes out. The automatic operation of air volume and air distribution switches off. Activating  Switch on the ignition ( page 62).  Press one button U ( page 214). The indicator lamp on the button comes on. The air volume and air distribution are adjusted automatically. 215 Controls in detail Automatic climate control Setting the temperature Use temperature controls 4 for the left side or 6 ( page 214) for the right side to separately adjust the air temperature on each side of the passenger compartment. You should raise or lower the temperature setting in small increments, preferably starting at 72°F (22°C). Increasing  Push top of temperature control 4 and/or 6 until the display shows the desired temperature. The automatic climate control system will adjust the interior air temperature accordingly. Decreasing  Push bottom of temperature control 4 and/or 6 until the display shows the desired temperature. The automatic climate control system will adjust the interior air temperature accordingly. 216 Adjusting air distribution Use the air distribution controls 2 and 8 ( page 214) to separately adjust the air distribution on each side of the passenger compartment. The following symbols are located on the controls: Symbol Function Ô Directs air to the windows Ø Directs air to the windows, footwells, center and side air vents Ó Õ Directs air to the footwell air vents Directs air to the center and side air vents  Press left or right air distribution controls 2 and/or 8 ( page 214). The indicator lamp on button U goes out. The air volume is controlled automatically while the air distribution is controlled manually in the respective zone. The selected air distribution is shown in the display 5 ( page 214). Adjusting air volume Seven blower speeds are available.  Press
to decrease or Q to in- crease air volume to the desired level. The indicator lamp on button U goes out. The air volume is controlled manually while the air distribution is controlled automatically in the respective zone. The selected blower speed is shown in the display 5 ( page 214). Controls in detail Automatic climate control Front defroster You can use this setting to defrost the windshield, for example if it is iced up. You can also defog the windshield and the side windows. Deactivating  Press button P ( page 214). The indicator lamp on the button goes out. Defrosting is turned off. i Windshield fogged on the outside Keep this setting selected only until the windshield or the side windows are clear again.  Switch the windshield wipers on. Activating  Press button P ( page 214). The indicator lamp on the button comes on. The automatic climate control switches automatically to the following functions:
maximum blowing and heating power (depends on cooling temperature)
air flows onto the windshield and the front side windows
cooling on to dehumidify
the air recirculation mode is switched off  Press one button U. The indicator lamp on the button comes on. The air volume and air distribution are adjusted automatically. i Maximum cooling MAXCOOL If the left and right air distribution controls as well as the air volume control are set to U and there is a high need for cooling, the display AUTO MAXCOOL appears. This provides the fastest possible cooling of the vehicle interior (when windows and tilt/sliding sunroof are closed). i These settings should only be selected for a short time. In automatic mode, the automatic climate control is regulated to prevent the windows from fogging up. 217 Controls in detail Automatic climate control Air recirculation mode Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle from the outside (e.g. before driving through a tunnel). This setting cuts off the intake of outside air and recirculates the air in the passenger compartment. Warning! G Fogged windows impair visibility, endangering you and others. If the windows begin to fog on the inside, switching off the air recirculation mode immediately should clear interior window fogging. If interior window fogging persists, make sure the air conditioning ( page 231) is activated, or press button P. Activating  Press button , ( page 214). The indicator lamp on the button comes on. i i The air recirculation mode is activated automatically: Press and hold button , for approximately 2 seconds. The windows and tilt/sliding sunroof will close. You can release button , once the closing procedure has begun. The windows and tilt/sliding sunroof continue closing until they are fully closed.
at high outside temperatures
if the concentration of carbon monoxide (CO) and nitrogen oxide (NOX) in the outside air increases beyond a predetermined level, for example in a tunnel Please note that the charcoal filter must be activated ( page 214) for the air recirculation mode to be activated automatically. If you have turned off the air conditioning ( page 214) or the outside temperature is below 41°F (5°C), the air recirculation mode will not switch on automatically. Warning! G Never operate the windows and the tilt/ sliding sunroof if there is the possibility of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure. In the event that the procedure causes potential danger, the closing of the windows can be immediately halted by pressing the respective window switch. The closing of the tilt/sliding sunroof can be immediately halted by moving the tilt/ sliding sunroof switch in the overhead control panel in any direction. The closing of the windows and the tilt/ sliding sunroof can be reversed by again pressing and holding button ,. 218 Controls in detail Automatic climate control Deactivating i  Press button , ( page 214). Press and hold button , for approximately 2 seconds. The windows and or tilt/sliding sunroof will return to their previous position. You can release button , once the opening procedure has begun. The windows and tilt/sliding sunroof continue opening until they have reached their previous position. The indicator lamp on the button goes out. i The air recirculation mode is deactivated automatically:
after 5 minutes if the outside temperature is below approximately 41°F (5°C)
after 5 minutes if the air conditioning is turned off
after 30 minutes if the outside temperature is above approximately 41°F (5°C)
if you press button r At outside temperatures above 79°F (26°C) the system will not automatically switch back to outside air. A quantity of outside air is added after approximately 30 minutes. A window or tilt/sliding sunroof will only return to its previous position if it has not been moved to another position using the respective window switch or tilt/sliding sunroof switch after it was closed with button ,. A window or tilt/sliding sunroof that was moved will remain in its current position if button , is used to reopen the remaining windows or tilt/ sliding sunroof. Charcoal filter An activated charcoal filter markedly reduces bad odors and removes pollutants from air entering the passenger compartment. Activating  Press button e ( page 214). The indicator lamp on the button comes on. i Press and hold button e for approximately 2 seconds. The windows and tilt/sliding sunroof will close. You can release button e once the closing procedure has begun. The windows and tilt/sliding sunroof continue closing until they are fully  closed. 219 Controls in detail Automatic climate control  Warning! G Never operate the windows and the tilt/ sliding sunroof if there is the possibility of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure. In the event that the procedure causes potential danger, the closing of the windows can be immediately halted by pressing the respective window switch. The closing of the tilt/sliding sunroof can be immediately halted by moving the tilt/ sliding sunroof switch in the overhead control panel in any direction. The closing of the windows and the tilt/ sliding sunroof can be reversed by again pressing and holding button e. 220 Deactivating  Press button e ( page 214). The indicator lamp on the button goes out. i Press and hold button e for approximately 2 seconds. The windows and or tilt/sliding sunroof will return to their previous position. You can release button e once the opening procedure has begun. The windows and tilt/sliding sunroof continue opening until they have reached their previous position. A window or tilt/sliding sunroof will only return to its previous position if it has not been moved to another position using the respective window switch or tilt/sliding sunroof switch after it was closed with button e. A window or tilt/sliding sunroof that was moved will remain in its current position if button e is used to reopen the remaining windows or tilt/ sliding sunroof. The system switches automatically to the air recirculation mode if the carbon monoxide (CO) or nitrogen oxide (NOX) concentration of the outside air increases beyond a predetermined level, for example in a tunnel. The automatic air recirculation mode does not function if air conditioning is deactivated ( page 221) or if the outside temperature has fallen below 41°F (5°C). The activated charcoal filter should be switched off when windows fog up on the inside, or if the passenger compartment needs to be quickly heated or cooled down. Controls in detail Automatic climate control Air conditioning The cooling function, only operational when the engine is running, cools the vehicle interior down to the selected temperature. The cooling function also dehumidifies the air in the vehicle interior, thus preventing the windows from fogging up. i Condensation may drip out from underneath the vehicle. This is normal and not an indication of a malfunction. Warning! G If you turn off the cooling function, the vehicle will not be cooled when weather conditions are warm. The windows can fog up more quickly. Window fogging may impair visibility and endanger you and others. Deactivating ! It is possible to deactivate the air conditioning (cooling) function of the automatic climate control system. The air in the vehicle will then no longer be cooled or dehumidified. If the indicator lamp on the button r does not go out or starts to flash, this indicates that the air conditioning is losing refrigerant. The compressor has turned itself off. The air conditioning cannot be turned on again.  Press button r ( page 214). The indicator lamp on the button r comes on. Activating Have the air conditioning checked at the nearest authorized Maybach Studio. Moist air can fog up the windows. You can dehumidify the air with the air conditioning.  Press button r again ( page 214). The indicator lamp on the button r goes out. The air conditioning uses the refrigerant R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs which are harmful to the ozone layer. 221 Controls in detail Automatic climate control Residual heat and ventilation With the engine switched off, it is possible to continue to heat or ventilate the interior for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes use of the residual heat produced by the engine. Deactivating i  Press button T ( page 214). How long the system will provide heating depends on the coolant temperature and the temperature set by the operator. The blower will run at speed setting 1 regardless of the air distribution control setting. Activating
when the ignition is switched on  Turn the SmartKey in the starter
after about 30 minutes
if the battery voltage drops switch to position 1 or 0 or remove it from the starter switch.  Press button T ( page 214). The indicator lamp on button T comes on. 222 The indicator lamp on button T goes out. The residual heat is automatically turned off: Controls in detail Automatic climate control Temperature-controlled glove box The glove box can be heated or cooled. The air temperature is regulated according to the outside temperature and the temperature set in the front air-conditioning control panel on the right. The adjustable vent is in the glove box.  Turn adjustable vent 1 clockwise. The glove box will be heated or cooled.  Turn adjustable vent 1 counterclock- wise. Operating rear passenger compartment settings at the cockpit control panel  Press button ™ ( page 214) on the front control panel. The display switches over to show the rear passenger compartment settings. At the same time, the indicator lamps in the air distribution buttons come on according to the air distribution set for the rear compartment. The glove box will neither be heated nor cooled. i If you are transporting perishable goods (e.g. groceries) in the glove box, close the air vent while heating the passenger compartment. You can adjust all settings for the rear passenger compartment at the cockpit control panel. Standard display 1 Adjustable vent Approximately 5 seconds after the last button was pressed, the current display disappears and the standard display is called back up. or  Press button ™ again. 223 Controls in detail Automatic climate control Rear passenger compartment Overview of Maybach 57 224 Controls in detail Automatic climate control 1 Thumbwheel for upper left air vent 7 Fixed air vent 8 Center air vent, right, adjustable 2 Upper left air vent 9 Thumbwheel for center air vent 3 Upper right air vent a Automatic climate control panel 4 Thumbwheel for upper right air vent b Thumbwheel for center air vent 5 Thumbwheel for lower right air vent c Center air vent, left, adjustable d Lower left air vent e Thumbwheel for lower left air vent 6 Lower right air vent Warning! G When operating the automatic climate control, the air that enters the passenger compartment through the air vents can be very hot or very cold (depending on the set temperature). This may cause burns or frostbite to unprotected skin in the immediate area of the air vents. Always keep sufficient distance between unprotected parts of the body and the air vents. If necessary, use the air distribution control to direct the air to air vents in the vehicle interior that are not in the immediate area of unprotected skin. 225 Controls in detail Automatic climate control Overview of Maybach 62 226 Controls in detail Automatic climate control 1 Thumbwheel for upper left air vent 7 Fixed air vent 8 Center air vent, right, adjustable 2 Upper left air vent 9 Thumbwheel for center air vent 3 Upper right air vent a Automatic climate control panel 4 Thumbwheel for upper right air vent b Thumbwheel for center air vent 5 Thumbwheel for lower right air vent c Center air vent, left, adjustable d Lower left air vent e Thumbwheel for lower left air vent 6 Lower right air vent Warning! G When operating the automatic climate control, the air that enters the passenger compartment through the air vents can be very hot or very cold (depending on the set temperature). This may cause burns or frostbite to unprotected skin in the immediate area of the air vents. Always keep sufficient distance between unprotected parts of the body and the air vents. If necessary, use the air distribution controls to direct the air to air vents in the vehicle interior that are not in the immediate area of unprotected skin. 227 Controls in detail Automatic climate control 1 Air volume, left (manual) 7 Air distribution, right (manual) 2 Temperature control, left 8 AC cooling on/off 3 Display 9 Residual heat and ventilation/ Automatic climate control on/off button 4 Temperature control, right 5 Air volume, right (manual) 6 Air distribution, right (automatic) Automatic climate control panel, rear 228 a Air distribution, left (manual) b Air distribution, left (automatic) Controls in detail Automatic climate control Activating the climate control system Activating  Switch on the ignition ( page 62).  Press button M or U. Deactivating It is possible to completely deactivate the automatic climate control system.  Press button M. ! The fresh air supply to the vehicle interior is shut off. Operating the climate control system in automatic mode i When operating the climate control system in automatic mode, you will only rarely need to adjust the temperature, air volume and air distribution. In automatic mode, cooling with dehumidify is switched on. This function can be switched off, if necessary. i The automatic climate control system can also be switched on and off separately on each side of the passenger compartment, as required. Activating  Switch on the ignition ( page 62).  Press one button U ( page 228). The indicator lamp on the button comes on. The air volume and air distribution are adjusted automatically.  Use temperature controls 2 for the left side or 4 for the right side to separately adjust the air temperature on each side of the passenger compartment. The temperature of the vehicle interior is adjusted automatically. Deactivating  Press one button U. The indicator lamp on the button goes out. The automatic operation of air volume and air distribution switches off. Setting the temperature Use temperature controls 2 for the left side or 4 for the right side to separately adjust the air temperature on each side of the passenger compartment. You should raise or lower the temperature setting in small increments, preferably starting at 72°F (22°C). i When operating the climate control system in automatic mode, you will only rarely need to adjust the temperature, air volume and air distribution. 229 Controls in detail Automatic climate control Increasing  Push top of temperature control 2 and/or 4 ( page 228) until the dis- play shows the desired temperature. The automatic climate control system will adjust the interior air temperature accordingly. Decreasing  Push bottom of temperature control 2 and/or 4 ( page 228) un- til the display shows the desired temperature. The automatic climate control system will adjust the interior air temperature accordingly. 230 Adjusting air distribution Use the air distribution controls 7 and a ( page 228) to separately adjust the air distribution on each side of the passenger compartment. The following symbols are located on the controls: Symbol Function Ü Directs air to roof vents or upper side, center and lower side vents Û Directs air to roof vents or upper side, footwell, center and lower side vents Ú Directs air to footwell, center and lower side vents a Directs air to center and lower side vents Y Directs air to the footwell air vents  Press the desired air distribution control 7 and/or a ( page 228). The indicator lamp on button U ( page 228) goes out. The air volume is controlled automatically while the air distribution is controlled manually in the respective zone. The selected air distribution is shown in the display 3 ( page 228). Controls in detail Automatic climate control Adjusting air volume Seven blower speeds are available.  Press
to decrease or Q ( page 228) to increase air volume to the desired level. The indicator lamp on button U ( page 228) goes out. The air volume is controlled manually while the air distribution is controlled automatically in the respective zone. The selected blower speed is shown in the display 3 ( page 228). Air conditioning The cooling function, only operational when the engine is running, cools the vehicle interior down to the selected temperature. The cooling function also dehumidifies the air in the vehicle interior, thus preventing the windows from fogging up. i Condensation may drip out from underneath the vehicle. This is normal and not an indication of a malfunction. Warning! G If you turn off the cooling function, the vehicle will not be cooled when weather conditions are warm. The windows can fog up more quickly. Window fogging may impair visibility and endanger you and others. Deactivating It is possible to deactivate the air conditioning (cooling) function of the automatic climate control system. The air in the vehicle will then no longer be cooled or dehumidified.  Press button r ( page 228). The indicator lamp on the button r comes on. Activating Moist air can fog up the windows. You can dehumidify the air with the air conditioning.  Press button r again ( page 228). The indicator lamp on the button r goes out. The air conditioning uses the refrigerant R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs which are harmful to the ozone layer. 231 Controls in detail Automatic climate control i Deactivating If button r on the automatic climate control panel starts to flash, this indicates that the air conditioning is losing refrigerant. The compressor has turned itself off. The air conditioning cannot be turned on again.  Press button T ( page 228). Have the air conditioning checked at the nearest authorized Maybach Studio.
when the ignition is switched on
after about 30 minutes
if the battery voltage drops Residual heat and ventilation With the engine switched off, it is possible to continue to heat or ventilate the interior for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes use of the residual heat produced by the engine. Activating  Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1 or 0 or remove it from the starter switch.  Press button T ( page 228). The indicator lamp on button T comes on. 232 The indicator lamp on button T goes out. The residual heat is automatically turned off: i How long the system will provide heating depends on the coolant temperature and the temperature set by the operator. The blower will run at speed setting 1 regardless of the air distribution control setting. Solar panel* The solar cells convert natural light into electrical energy. When the engine is switched off, the energy generated automatically switches on the ventilation fan. The constant air flow creates a cooler temperature for cars parked in the sunlight. The air flow depends on the intensity of the solar radiation. The ventilation starts 2 minutes after switching off the engine. Controls in detail Power windows  Power windows Opening and closing the power windows The windows are opened and closed electrically. The switches for all of the windows are on the driver’s door. The switches for the respective windows are on the front passenger door and the rear doors. Warning! G When closing the windows, make sure there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure. The closing of the door windows can be immediately halted by releasing the switch or, if switch was pressed past the resistance point and released, by pressing the respective switch. The door windows are equipped with the express-close and automatic reversal function. If a door window encounters an obstruction that blocks its path in a circumstance where you pressed the switch past the resistance point and released it to close the window, the automatic reversal function will stop the window and open it slightly. Power window switches on the driver’s door 1 2 3 4 5 Left front door window Right front door window Right rear door window Left rear door window Rear door windows override switch ( page 105) If the window encounters an obstruction that blocks its path in a circumstance where you are closing the window by pressing and holding the switch, by pressing and holding button ‹ on the SmartKey, by pressing and holding the lock button (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**) on an outside door handle, or by pressing and holding button , or button e on the climate control panel, the automatic reversal function will not operate. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. i You can also open or close the windows using the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO**, see “Summer opening feature” ( page 235) and “Convenience closing feature” ( page 236). Depending on current position, the windows may also open or close when the air recirculation button , or the charcoal filter button e ( page 214) is pressed and held for 2 seconds. 233 Controls in detail Power windows i Opening the windows Operating the windows from the rear is not possible if you activate the override switch ( page 105).  Press switch 1 to 4 at the i With the SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or removed from the starter switch, the windows can be operated

until you open the driver’s or passenger door symbol k to resistance point. The corresponding window will move downwards until you release the switch. Vehicles with rear door window curtains* ( page 309): When opening a rear door window with the rear door window curtain not completely opened, the curtain will open first.  Switch on the ignition ( page 62).  Press switch 1 to 4 at the symbol k past the resistance point and release. The corresponding window opens completely. Closing the windows  Press switch 1 to 4 at the symbol j to resistance point. The corresponding window will move upwards until you release the switch. for at least 5 minutes i 234 Fully opening the windows (Express-open) Warning! G If you press and hold the switch up when closing the window, and upward movement of the window is blocked by some obstruction including but not limited to arms, hands, fingers, etc., the automatic reversal will not operate. Fully closing the windows (Express-close)  Press switch 1 to 4 at the symbol j past the point of resistance and release. The corresponding window closes completely. Warning! G Driver’s door only: If within 5 seconds you again press the switch past the resistance point and release, the automatic reversal will not function.  Controls in detail Power windows  ! If the upward movement of the window is blocked during the closing procedure, the window will stop and open slightly. Remove the obstruction, press the respective power window switch at the symbol j again past the resistance point and release. If the window still does not close when there is no obstruction, press and hold the respective power window switch at the symbol j. The window will then close without the obstruction sensor function. Stopping the power windows during Express-operation Synchronizing the power windows The windows must be synchronized
after the consumer battery has been disconnected
if the windows cannot be fully opened (Express-open) or closed (Express-close) Summer opening feature If the weather is warm, you can ventilate the vehicle before driving off by simultaneously
opening the windows
opening the tilt/sliding sunroof
Each window must be synchronized. turning on the seat ventilation* for the driver’s seat  Switch on the ignition ( page 62). i  Press and hold the power window The seat ventilation* for the driver’s seat is automatically set to the highest level if activated via summer opening feature. switches at the symbol j until the windows are completely closed.  Keep pressing the switches for ap- proximately 1 second. The windows are synchronized.  Briefly press the respective power window switch again. 235 Controls in detail Power windows Convenience closing feature When you lock the vehicle, you can close the windows and tilt/sliding sunroof simultaneously.  Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey  Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** at the driver’s outside door handle. The SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** must be in close proximity to the driver’s door handle.  Press and hold button Œ until the windows and tilt/sliding sunroof have reached the desired position.  Release button Œ to interrupt pro- cedure. or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** at the driver’s outside door handle ( page 236). The SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** must be in close proximity to the driver’s door handle. If potential danger exists, proceed as follows:
windows and tilt/sliding sunroof are completely closed.  Release button ‹ to interrupt pro- cedure. the windows and tilt/sliding sunroof are completely closed. side door handle to interrupt procedure. Release button ‹ to stop the closing procedure. To open, press and hold button Œ. To continue the closing after making sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure, press and hold button ‹. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**:
Release the lock button on the outside door handle ( page 86) to stop the closing procedure.
Pull on the outside door handle and hold firmly. The windows and the tilt/ sliding sunroof will open for as long as the outside door handle is held but the door not opened. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**:  Press and hold the lock button on an outside door handle ( page 86) until G When closing the windows and the tilt/ sliding sunroof, be sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure.  Press and hold button ‹ until the  Release the lock button on the out- 236 Warning! Controls in detail Power tilt/sliding sunroof  Power tilt/sliding sunroof Opening and closing the power tilt/ sliding sunroof (Maybach 57) The tilt/sliding sunroof is opened and closed electrically. The switch for the tilt/ sliding sunroof is on the overhead control panel. Warning! When closing the tilt/sliding sunroof, make sure there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure. 5 Screen With the sunroof closed or tilted open, screen 5 can be slid into the roof opening to help provide shade. When sliding the sunroof open, the screen will also retract. Sunroof switch 1 2 3 4 Push back to slide sunroof open Push forward to slide sunroof closed Pull down to lower sunroof at rear Push up to raise sunroof at rear G The opening/closing procedure of the tilt/ sliding sunroof can be immediately halted by releasing the switch or, if the switch was moved past the resistance point and released, by moving the switch in any direction. The tilt/sliding sunroof is made out of glass. In the event of an accident, the glass may shatter. This may result in an opening in the roof. In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing their seat belts or not wearing them properly may be thrown out of the opening. Such an opening also presents a potential for injury for occupants wearing their seat belts properly as entire body parts or portions of them may protrude from the passenger compartment.  237 Controls in detail Power tilt/sliding sunroof  When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. ! To avoid damaging the seals, do not transport any objects with sharp edges which can stick out of the tilt/sliding sunroof. Do not open the tilt/sliding sunroof if there is snow or ice on the roof, as this could result in malfunctions. The tilt/sliding sunroof can be opened or closed manually should an electrical malfunction occur ( page 454). i You can also open or close the tilt/ sliding sunroof using the SmartKey, see “Summer opening feature” ( page 235) and “Convenience closing feature” ( page 236).  To open, close, raise or lower the tilt/ sliding sunroof, move the switch to the resistance point in the required direction 1 to 4. Depending on current position, the tilt/sliding sunroof may also open or close when the air recirculation button , or the charcoal filter button e ( page 214) is pressed and held for 2 seconds.  Release the sunroof switch when the i  To open, close, raise or lower the tilt/ With the SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or removed from the starter switch, the tilt/sliding sunroof can be operated
until you open the driver’s or passenger door
for up to approximately 5 minutes  Switch on the ignition ( page 62). 238 Opening and closing the power tilt/sliding sunroof tilt/sliding sunroof has reached the desired position. Fully opening (Express-open) and closing (Express-close) the power tilt/sliding sunroof sliding sunroof, move the switch past the resistance point in the required direction 1 to 4 and release. The tilt/sliding sunroof opens or closes completely. Controls in detail Power tilt/sliding sunroof Stopping the power tilt/sliding sunroof  Move the switch in any direction. i If the movement of the tilt/sliding sunroof is blocked during the closing procedure, the sunroof will stop and reopen slightly. Synchronizing the power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 57) The tilt/sliding sunroof must be synchronized  Remove the respective fuse from the fuse box ( page 482).
after the consumer battery has been disconnected  Switch on the ignition ( page 62).
the tilt/sliding sunroof has been closed manually
a malfunction
the tilt/sliding sunroof does not open smoothly  Reinsert the fuse in the main fuse box.  Move and hold the sunroof switch in direction of arrow 4 until the tilt/ sliding sunroof is fully raised at the rear.  Keep holding the sunroof switch in direction of arrow 4 for approximately 1 second.  Check the Express-open feature ( page 238). If the tilt/sliding sunroof opens completely, the roof is synchronized. Otherwise repeat the above steps. 239 Controls in detail Power tilt/sliding sunroof Opening and closing the power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 62) The tilt/sliding sunroof is opened and closed electrically. You can operate the tilt/sliding sunroof from the cockpit or from the rear passenger compartment. Warning! G When closing the tilt/sliding sunroof, make sure there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure. The opening/closing procedure of the tilt/ sliding sunroof can be immediately halted by releasing the switch or, if the switch was moved past the resistance point and released, by moving the switch in any direction. The tilt/sliding sunroof is made out of glass. In the event of an accident, the glass may shatter. This may result in an opening in the roof. In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing their seat belts or not wearing them properly may be thrown out of the opening. Such an opening also presents a potential for injury for occupants wearing 240 their seat belts properly as entire body parts or portions of them may protrude from the passenger compartment. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. Warning! G When closing the screen, make sure no one can be caught and/or injured. In case of danger, release the switch and, if necessary, push the switch in direction “open”. ! To avoid damaging the seals, do not transport any objects with sharp edges which can stick out of the tilt/sliding sunroof. Do not open the tilt/sliding sunroof if there is snow or ice on the roof, as this could result in malfunctions. The tilt/sliding sunroof can be opened or closed manually should an electrical malfunction occur ( page 454). i You can also open or close the tilt/ sliding sunroof using the SmartKey, see “Summer opening feature” ( page 235) and “Convenience closing feature” ( page 236). Depending on current position, the tilt/sliding sunroof may also open or close when the air recirculation button , or the charcoal filter button e ( page 214) is pressed and held for two seconds. Controls in detail Power tilt/sliding sunroof i Operating from the cockpit i With the SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or removed from the starter switch, the tilt/sliding sunroof can be operated The switch for the tilt/sliding sunroof is on the overhead control panel. If the screen is closed, the screen opens first when you push the sunroof switch in direction of arrow 1.
until you open the driver’s or passenger door
for up to approximately 5 minutes Push the sunroof switch again in direction of arrow 1 to open the tilt/ sliding sunroof. The screen only operates with the tilt/ sliding sunroof closed.  Switch on the ignition ( page 62). Opening and closing the screen  To open or close the screen, move the Sunroof switch, front 1 Push back to slide screen or sunroof open 2 Push forward to slide screen or sunroof closed 3 Pull down to lower sunroof at rear 4 Push up to raise sunroof at rear sunroof switch to the resistance point in the required direction of arrow 1 or 2. Release the sunroof switch when the screen has reached the desired position. 241 Controls in detail Power tilt/sliding sunroof Opening and closing the power tilt/sliding sunroof Stopping the power tilt/sliding sunroof during Express-operation Operating from the rear passenger compartment  Open the screen if it is closed.  Move the switch in any direction. The switches are in the storage compartment under the rear center armrest.  To open, close, raise, or lower the tilt/ sliding sunroof, move the sunroof switch to resistance point in the required direction of arrows 1 to 4.  Release the sunroof switch when the i If the movement of the tilt/sliding sunroof is blocked during the closing procedure, the tilt/sliding sunroof will stop and reopen slightly. tilt/sliding sunroof has reached the desired position. Fully opening (Express-open) and closing (Express-close) the power tilt/sliding sunroof  Open the screen if it is closed.  To open, close, raise, or lower the tilt/ sliding sunroof, move the sunroof switch past the resistance point in the required direction of arrows 1 to 4 and release. The tilt/sliding sunroof opens or closes completely. 242 Sunroof switches, rear (The mobile phone shown is not an available option and is subject to change) 1 2 3 4 Press to lower sunroof at rear Press to slide screen or sunroof closed Press to slide screen or sunroof open Switch for screen and sliding portion of roof 5 Press to raise sunroof at rear 6 Switch for tilt portion of roof Controls in detail Power tilt/sliding sunroof The switches are in the storage compartment in the rear center armrest. i If the screen is closed, the screen will open first when you press sunroof switch 4 at 3. Opening and closing the power tilt/sliding sunroof  Open the screen if it is closed.  To open or close the tilt/sliding sun- Press sunroof switch 4 again at 3 to open the tilt/sliding sunroof. roof, press sunroof switch 4 to the resistance point at 3 or 2. The screen only operates with the tilt/ sliding sunroof closed.  Release sunroof switch 4 when the tilt/sliding sunroof has reached the desired position.  Switch on the ignition ( page 62). Opening and closing the screen Sunroof switches, rear (vehicles with rear center seat*) (The mobile phone shown is not an available option and is subject to change) 1 2 3 4 Press to lower sunroof at rear Press to slide screen or sunroof closed Press to slide screen or sunroof open Switch for screen and sliding portion of roof 5 Press to raise sunroof at rear 6 Switch for tilt portion of roof  To open or close the screen, press Fully opening (Express-open) and closing (Express-close) the power tilt/sliding sunroof sunroof switch 4 at 3 or 2.  Open the screen if it is closed. Release the sunroof switch when the screen has reached the desired position.  To open or close the tilt/sliding sun- Fully opening (Express-open) and closing (Express-close) the screen roof, press sunroof switch 4 past the resistance point at 3 or 2 and release. The rear tilt/sliding sunroof opens or closes completely.  To open or close the screen, press sunroof switch 4 past the resistance point at 3 or 2 and release.  The screen opens or closes complete- ly. 243 Controls in detail Power tilt/sliding sunroof Stopping the power tilt/sliding sunroof during Express-operation  To raise or lower the tilt/sliding sun- roof, press sunroof switch 6 past the resistance point at 1 or 5 and release.  Press sunroof switch 4 again. i If the movement of the tilt/sliding sunroof is blocked during the closing procedure, the tilt/sliding sunroof will stop and reopen slightly. Raising and lowering the power tilt/sliding sunroof  To stop the procedure, press the switch again. Synchronizing the power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 62) The tilt/sliding sunroof must be synchronized the rear, lower and close it.  Move and hold the sunroof switch in direction of arrow 4 ( page 241) or press sunroof switch 6 at 5 ( page 242) until the tilt/sliding sunroof is fully raised at the rear.  Keep pressing the respective switch  Check the Express-open feature ( page 242). a malfunction
the tilt/sliding sunroof does not open smoothly 244  If the tilt/sliding sunroof is raised at the tilt/sliding sunroof has been operated manually
 Open the screen if it is closed.  Switch on the ignition ( page 62).
 Release sunroof switch 6 when the Fully raising and lowering the power tilt/ sliding sunroof box. after the consumer battery has been disconnected roof, press sunroof switch 6 to the resistance point at 1 or 5. tilt/sliding sunroof has reached the desired position.  Reinsert the fuse in the main fuse
 Open the screen if it is closed.  To raise or lower the tilt/sliding sun-  Remove the respective fuse from the fuse box ( page 482). for approximately 1 second. If the tilt/sliding sunroof opens completely, the roof is synchronized. Otherwise repeat the above steps. Controls in detail Electrotransparent roof*  Electrotransparent roof* Operating the electrotransparent roof You can operate the electrotransparent roof from the cockpit or from the rear passenger compartment. Warning! G When closing the screen, make sure no one can be caught and/or injured. In case of danger, release the switch and, if necessary, push the switch in direction “open”. The electrotransparent roof is made out of glass. In the event of an accident, the glass may shatter. This may result in an opening in the roof. In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing their seat belts or not wearing them properly may be thrown out of the opening. Such an opening also presents a potential for injury for occupants wearing their seat belts properly as entire body parts or portions of them may protrude from the passenger compartment. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. Operating from the cockpit The switch for the electrotransparent roof is on the overhead control unit. i With the SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or removed from the starter switch, the electrotransparent roof can be operated
until you open the driver’s or passenger door
for up to approximately 5 minutes  Switch on the ignition ( page 62). Electrotransparent roof switches, front 1 Push back to slide screen closed 2 Push forward to slide screen open 3 Pull down to make the electrotransparent roof opaque/switch off roof lighting 4 Push up to make the electrotransparent roof transparent/switch on roof lighting 245 Controls in detail Electrotransparent roof* Opening the screen  Slide the switch to the resistance point in direction of arrow 2.  Release the switch when the screen has reached the desired position. Stopping the screen during Express-operation Operating from the rear passenger compartment  Move the switch in any direction. The switches are in the storage compartment under the rear center armrest. Making the electrotransparent roof transparent Closing the screen The screen must be completely open.  Move the switch to the resistance  Push the switch in direction of point in direction of arrow 1.  Release the switch when the screen has reached the desired position. arrow 4. Making the electrotransparent roof opaque Fully opening the screen (Express-open) The screen must be completely open.  Move the switch past the resistance  Pull the switch in direction of point in direction of arrow 2 and release. The screen opens completely. arrow 3. Switching on roof lighting The screen must be completely closed. Fully closing the screen (Express-close)  Move the switch past the resistance point in direction of arrow 1 and release. The electrotransparent roof turns opaque and the screen closes completely. 246  Press the switch in direction of arrow 4. Switching off roof lighting  Pull the switch in direction of arrow 3. Electrotransparent roof switches, rear (The mobile phone shown is not an available option and is subject to change) 1 2 3 4 5 6 Press to make roof opaque Press to slide screen closed Press to slide screen open Switch for screen Press to make roof transparent Switch for electrotransparent roof Controls in detail Electrotransparent roof* Opening and closing the screen  To open or close the screen, press switch 4 to the resistance point at 3 or 2. Release the switch when the screen has reached the desired position. Electrotransparent roof switches, rear (vehicles with rear center seat*) (The mobile phone shown is not an available option and is subject to change) 1 2 3 4 5 6 Press to make roof opaque Press to slide screen closed Press to slide screen open Switch for screen Press to make roof transparent Switch for electrotransparent roof Making the electrotransparent roof transparent  Press switch 6 at 5. The screen opens automatically and the electrotransparent roof turns transparent. Fully opening (Express-open) and closing (Express-close) the screen Making the electrotransparent roof opaque  To open or close the screen, press  If the screen is closed, open it com- switch 4 past the resistance point at 3 or 2 and release. The screen opens or closes completely. pletely.  Press switch 6 at 1. The electrotransparent roof turns opaque. Stopping the screen during Express-operation  Press switch 4 again. 247 Controls in detail Driving systems The driving systems of your vehicle are described on the following pages:
Cruise control and Distronic**, with which the vehicle can maintain a preset speed. Cruise control Cruise control automatically maintains the speed you set for your vehicle.
Airmatic DC adjusts the vehicle suspension characteristics automatically and controls the vehicle level. Use of cruise control is recommended for driving at a constant speed for extended periods of time. You can set or resume cruise control at any speed over 20 mph (30 km/h).
Vehicle level control, with which you can change the vehicle level. The cruise control function is operated by means of the cruise control lever.
Parktronic and Parking Assist System (PAS), which serves as a parking assistant. For information on the BAS, ABS, ESP® and electro-hydraulic brake, see “Driving safety systems” ( page 107). Warning! G Cruise control is a convenience system designed to assist the driver during vehicle operation. The driver is and must always remain responsible for the vehicle’s speed and for safe brake operation. Only use cruise control if the road, traffic and weather conditions make it advisable to travel at a steady speed.
The use of cruise control can be dangerous on winding roads or in heavy traffic because conditions do not allow safe driving at a steady speed.
The use of cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in tire traction can result in wheel spin and loss of control.
Deactivate cruise control when driving in fog. The “Resume” function should only be operated if the driver is fully aware of the previously set speed and wishes to resume this particular preset speed. 248 Controls in detail Driving systems Cruise control lever Setting current speed Canceling cruise control The cruise control lever is the uppermost lever on the left-hand side of the steering column.  Accelerate or decelerate to the de- There are several ways to cancel cruise control: sired speed.  Briefly lift the cruise control lever in  Step on the brake pedal. direction of arrow 1 or depress in direction of arrow 2. The current speed is set.  Remove your foot from the accelera- tor pedal. Cruise control is activated. 1 2 3 4 Sets current or higher speed Sets current or lower speed Cancels cruise control Resume at last set speed The selected speed appears in the multifunction display for approximately 5 seconds, and the corresponding speedometer segments from the selected speed to the vehicle maximum speed are illuminated. i On uphill or downhill grades, cruise control may not be able to maintain the set speed. Once the grade eases, the set speed will be resumed. Cruise control is canceled. The last speed set is stored for later use. or  Briefly push the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 3. Cruise control is canceled. The last speed set is stored for later use. ! Moving the gear selector lever to position N while driving also cancels cruise control. However, the gear selector lever should not be moved to position N while driving, except to coast when the vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g. on icy roads). i The last stored speed is canceled when you turn off the engine. 249 Controls in detail Driving systems Setting a higher speed i  Lift the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 1 ( page 249) and When you use the cruise control lever to decelerate, the transmission will automatically downshift if the engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle sufficiently. hold it until the desired speed is reached.  Release the cruise control lever. The new speed is set. i Depressing the accelerator pedal does not deactivate cruise control. After brief acceleration (e.g. for passing), cruise control resumes the last speed set. Fine adjustment in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) increments Faster  Briefly tip the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 1 ( page 249). Slower Setting a lower speed  Depress the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 2 ( page 249) and hold it until the desired speed is reached.  Release the cruise control lever. The new speed is set. 250  Briefly tip the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 2 ( page 249). Setting to last stored speed (“Resume” function) Warning! G The speed stored in memory should only be set again if prevailing road conditions permit. Possible acceleration or deceleration differences arising from returning to preset speed could cause an accident and/ or serious injury to you and others.  Briefly push the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 4 ( page 249). The cruise control resumes the last set speed.  Remove your foot from the accelera- tor pedal. The selected speed appears in the multifunction display for approximately 5 seconds, and the corresponding speedometer segments from the selected speed to the vehicle maximum speed are illuminated. Controls in detail Driving systems Distronic** When activated, the Distronic adaptive cruise control system increases driving convenience afforded by the cruise control during travel on expressways and other major roads.

If the Distronic distance sensor detects a slower moving vehicle directly ahead, your vehicle speed will be reduced so that you follow that vehicle at a preset distance. If there is no vehicle directly ahead of you, Distronic will function in the same way as cruise control ( page 248). Warning! G Distronic adaptive cruise control is no substitute for active driving involvement. It does not react to stationary objects, nor does it recognize or predict the curvature and lane layout or the movement of vehicles ahead. Distronic can only apply a maximum of 20% of the vehicle’s braking power. It is the driver’s responsibility at all times to be attentive to road, traffic and weather conditions and to provide the steering, braking and other driving inputs necessary to retain control of the vehicle. Warning! G Distronic is a convenience system. Its speed adjustment reduction capability is intended to make cruise control more effective and usable when traffic speeds vary. However, it is not intended to, nor does it, replace the need for extreme care. The responsibility for the vehicle speed and the distance to the vehicle ahead, including most importantly brake operation to assure safe stopping distance, always rests with the driver. Distronic cannot take street and traffic conditions into account. Warning! G Distronic requires familiarity with its operational characteristics. We strongly recommend that you review the following information carefully before operating the system. i USA only: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. 251 Controls in detail Driving systems i Canada only: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Warning! G Distronic cannot take street and traffic conditions into account. Only use Distronic if the road, weather and traffic conditions make it advisable to travel at a steady speed. 252 Warning! G Warning! G Use of Distronic can be dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in tire traction can result in wheel spin and loss of control. Distronic cannot take weather conditions into account. Switch off Distronic or do not turn it on if: Distronic does not act upon adverse sight distance conditions. Do not use Distronic during conditions of fog and heavy rain, snow or sleet.
roads are slippery or covered with snow or ice. The wheels could lose traction while braking or accelerating, and the vehicle could skid
the sensor is dirty or visibility is diminished due to snow, rain or fog. The distance control could be impaired Always pay attention to traffic conditions even while Distronic is switched on. Otherwise, you may not be able to recognize dangerous situations until it is too late and could cause an accident resulting in personal or fatal injury to you or others. Controls in detail Driving systems Warning! G Close attention to road and traffic conditions is imperative at all times, regardless of whether or not Distronic is activated. Use of Distronic can be dangerous on winding roads or in heavy traffic because conditions do not allow safe driving at a steady speed. Distronic will not react to stationary objects in the roadway (e.g. a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle). Distronic will also not respond to oncoming vehicles. Switch off Distronic:
when changing from the left to the right lane if vehicles are moving more slowly in the left lane
when entering a turn lane or highway off ramp
in complex driving situations, such as in highway construction zones In these situations, Distronic will continue to maintain the set speed unless deactivated. Distronic is designed and intended only to maintain a set speed and keep a set distance from moving objects in front of it. Warning! Distronic displays in the speedometer dial G The “Resume” function should only be operated if the driver is fully aware of the previously set speed and wishes to resume this particular preset speed. Set speed If Distronic is activated, one or two segments come on around the set speed. i The vehicle speed displayed on the speedometer can briefly vary from the speed setting on the Distronic system. 253 Controls in detail Driving systems The intermittent warning sound ceases and the red distance warning lamp l goes out when the necessary distance to the vehicle ahead is again established. Segments If Distronic detects a vehicle directly ahead, the segments from the speed of the vehicle ahead to the set speed come on. If Distronic calculates that there is a danger of collision
the distance warning lamp l in the instrument cluster comes on red
an intermittent warning sounds  Immediately brake the vehicle to avoid a collision. Under no circumstances should the driver await the intermittent warning sound before braking. See the following warning note. 254 Warning! G An intermittent warning sounds and the distance warning lamp l in the instrument cluster is illuminated if the Distronic system calculates that the distance to the vehicle ahead and your vehicle’s current speed indicate that Distronic will not be capable of slowing the vehicle sufficiently to maintain the preset following distance, which creates a danger of a collision. Immediately brake the vehicle to increase the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. The warning sound is intended as a final caution that you have not interceded with your own braking inputs to avoid a potentially dangerous situation. Do not wait for the operation of the warning signal to intercede with your own braking, as that will result in potentially dangerous emergency braking which will not always result in an impact being avoided. Tailgating increases the risk of an accident. Controls in detail Driving systems Warning! G Distronic brakes your vehicle with a maximum of 6.5 ft/s2 (2 m/s2). This corresponds to about 20% of the maximum deceleration ability of your vehicle. Distronic brakes the vehicle in an effort to restore the preset distance or to maintain the speed. The brake pedal is automatically applied as this happens which results in the brake pedal moving. Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times, including the area under the brake pedal. Objects stored in this area may impair pedal movement which could interfere with the braking ability of the Distronic system. Do not place your foot under the brake pedal – your foot could become caught. Distronic menu in the control system In the Distronic menu you can read the current settings for Distronic. What appears in the display depends on whether Distronic and the distance warning function are turned on or off.  Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until you see one of the following displays. Distronic deactivated If Distronic is deactivated, you can see the standard display of Distronic in the multifunction display. Distronic activated If you turn Distronic on, you will see the set speed in the multifunction display for about 5 seconds. If Distronic is activated, you then see the following display in the multifunction display. 1 Distronic activated 1 Vehicle ahead, if detected 2 Actual distance to vehicle ahead 3 Preset distance threshold to vehicle ahead 4 Your vehicle 5 Symbol for activated distance warning function 255 Controls in detail Driving systems Cruise control lever Activating Distronic Setting the current speed The Distronic system is operated by means of the cruise control lever. You can activate Distronic when  Accelerate or decelerate to the de- The cruise control lever is the uppermost lever on the left-hand side of the steering column.

you are driving above 25 mph (40 km/h) ® the ESP is activated ( page 111) i The maximum speed you can set is 110 mph (180 km/h). If Distronic has not been activated after pressing the cruise control lever you will see the message --- in the multifunction display. In the following cases you cannot activate Distronic: 1 2 3 4 Sets current or higher speed Sets current or lower speed Deactivates Distronic Resumes at last set speed 256 sired speed.  Briefly lift the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 1 or depress in direction of arrow 2. Distronic is activated and the current speed is set.  Remove your foot from the accelera- tor pedal. i If you do not take your foot off of the accelerator completely, the following message will appear in the multifunction display:
up to 2 minutes after starting the engine DISTRONIC OVERRIDE
when you brake
if you have set the parking brake
if the gear selector lever is in position P, R or N Distronic will not work to maintain the distance to slower moving vehicles in front of you. Your vehicle speed will then be determined only by the accelerator pedal position.
if the ESP® is switched off Controls in detail Driving systems Setting a higher speed Setting a lower speed  Briefly tip the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 1 ( page 256) to  Briefly tip the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 2 ( page 256) to Setting to last stored speed (“Resume” function) G increase vehicle speed in increments of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h). decrease vehicle speed in increments of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h). Warning! The new speed is set. The new speed is set. The stored speed is displayed in the multifunction display for approximately 5 seconds, and one or two segments around the stored speed come on in the speedometer ( page 253). The stored speed is displayed in the multifunction display for approximately 5 seconds, and one or two segments around the stored speed come on in the speedometer ( page 253). The speed stored in memory should only be set again if prevailing road conditions permit. Possible acceleration or deceleration differences arising from returning to preset speed could cause an accident and/ or serious injury to you and others. i i Depressing the accelerator pedal does not deactivate Distronic. After brief acceleration (e.g. for passing), the cruise control resumes the last speed set. When you use the cruise control lever to decelerate, the brakes will be applied to support deceleration. In addition, the transmission will automatically downshift on long downhill grades.  Briefly tip the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 4 ( page 256). Distronic is set to the last stored speed.  Remove your foot from the accelera- tor pedal. Fine adjustment in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) increments Faster  Briefly tip the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 4 ( page 256). 257 Controls in detail Driving systems Deactivating Distronic Distronic deactivates automatically when: Setting the following distance in Distronic
You set the parking brake.  Briefly tip the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 3 ( page 256).
You drive slower than 22 mph (35 km/h). or
The ESP® is active ( page 111) or you deactivate the ESP®.
You move the transmission gear selector lever into position N. You can set the specified following distance for Distronic by varying the time setting between 1.0 and 2.0 seconds. Using this time setting and the current speed of your vehicle, Distronic calculates and sets the required following distance to the vehicle ahead. The set distance will be shown in the multifunction display. There are several ways to deactivate the Distronic system:  Step on the brake pedal. Distronic is deactivated. The last speed set is stored into memory. i The following message will appear in the multifunction display for approximately 5 seconds: DISTRONIC OFF The last stored speed is deleted when you turn off the engine. 258 A signal will sound. The DISTRONIC OFF message appears in the multifunction display for approximately 5 seconds. Warning! G Distronic switches off and releases the brakes when the vehicle decelerates below the minimum speed of approximately 22 mph (35 km/h) by operation of the system. At that time the driver must apply the brakes in order to reduce vehicle speed further or bring it to a stop. Warning! G It is up to the driver to exercise discretion to select the appropriate setting given road conditions, traffic, driver’s preferred driving style and applicable laws and driving recommendations for safe following distance. Controls in detail Driving systems The distance warning function on/off button and thumbwheel for setting distance are located on the lower part of the front center console.  Turn thumbwheel 3 in direction of arrow 4. Decreasing distance Decreasing the distance setting tells Distronic to maintain a shorter following distance to the vehicle ahead.  Turn thumbwheel 3 in direction of arrow 5. Distance warning function 1 Distance warning function on/off button 2 Indicator lamp 3 Thumbwheel for setting distance 4 Increasing distance 5 Decreasing distance Increasing distance Increasing the distance setting tells Distronic to maintain a greater following distance to the vehicle ahead. When Distronic is deactivated, this function will continue to warn you when recognizing a slower vehicle moving in the vehicle’s path and the danger of a collision exists:
The distance warning lamp l in the instrument cluster comes on.
An intermittent warning sounds. If these warnings are issued, you must brake manually to maintain a safe distance and avoid a collision with the vehicle ahead. When pressing the brake pedal, the warning sound stops. The warning sound also stops when the distance to the vehi- cle ahead is sufficient again without applying the brake pedal. In this case the distance warning lamp l also extinguishes. Warning! G If the distance warning lamp l in the instrument cluster comes on while driving and/or an intermittent warning sounds, immediate attention on the part of the driver is required. As required by the traffic situation, apply the brakes and navigate around a possible obstacle. However, do not drive by relying on the distance warning function, as this will result in an emergency braking application. Especially depending on road surface conditions and driver reaction, this will not always enable you to avoid a collision. i Complex driving situations are not always fully recognized by Distronic. This could result in wrong or missing distance warnings. 259 Controls in detail Driving systems Activating  Press button 1 {. Indicator lamp 2 comes on. A loudspeaker symbol appears in the multifunction display ( page 255). Deactivating  Press button 1 {. The indicator lamp 2 on the button goes out. No loudspeaker symbol appears in the multifunction display. Warning! Distronic works to maintain the speed selected by the driver unless a moving obstacle proceeding directly ahead of it in the same travel direction is detected (e.g. following another vehicle ahead of you at a distance set by Distronic). This means that:
Your vehicle can pass another vehicle after you change lanes.
While in a sharp turn or if the vehicle in front is in a sharp turn, Distronic could lose sight of a vehicle traveling in front of it, then your vehicle could accelerate to the previously selected speed. Driving with Distronic This section describes a number of driving situations where special precaution is required on the part of the driver. Be prepared to brake in such situations. This will deactivate the Distronic system. G Distronic regulates only the distance between your vehicle and those directly ahead of it, but does not register stationary objects in the road, e.g.:
a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam
a disabled vehicle
an oncoming vehicle The driver must always be on the alert, observe all traffic and intercede as required by steering or braking the vehicle. 260 Warning! G Distronic should not be used in snowy or icy road conditions. The most likely cause for a malfunctioning system is a dirty sensor (located behind the hood grille), especially at times of snow and ice or heavy rain. In such a case, Distronic will switch off, and the message: DISTRONIC CURRENTLY UNAVAILABLE SEE OPERATORS MANUAL appears in the multifunction display. For cleaning and care of the Distronic sensor, see “Cleaning the Distronic system sensor” ( page 403). Controls in detail Driving systems i Turns and bends Offset driving In turns or bends, Distronic may not detect a moving vehicle in front, or it may detect one too soon. This may cause your vehicle to brake late or unexpectedly. A vehicle traveling in your lane but offset from your direct line of travel may not be detected by Distronic. There will be insufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. If the message: DISTRONIC CURRENTLY UNAVAILABLE SEE OPERATORS MANUAL disappears during driving and last speed stored flashes for approximately 5 seconds, the dirt (e.g. slush) has dissolved; Distronic is again operational. 261 Controls in detail Driving systems Lane changing Narrow vehicles Distronic has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes. There will be insufficient distance to the lane changing vehicle. Because of their narrow profiles, the vehicles traveling near the outer edges of the lane have not yet been detected by Distronic. There will be insufficient distance to the vehicles ahead. 262 Controls in detail Driving systems Airmatic DC (Dual Control) Airmatic automatically selects the optimum suspension tuning and ride height for your vehicle. Airmatic consists of three components:
Adaptive Damping System (ADS)
Stiffness of spring
Vehicle level control The ADS automatically selects the optimum damping for the respective driving conditions. At the same time the suspension is set to either sporty or regular. Damping and suspension are adjusted automatically according to your driving style and road conditions. In addition to the automatic mode designed for your convenience, you can adjust the suspension tuning yourself by selecting from two other levels using the button on the center console. Suspension tuning The suspension tuning is set according to:
Your driving style
Road surface conditions
Your choice of suspension style, “Comfort”, “Sporty 1” or “Sporty 2”, which you select using the damping button. 263 Controls in detail Driving systems

1 Damping button 2 Indicator lamp 3 Indicator lamp  Start the engine ( page 62).  Press damping button 1 until the de- sired suspension style is set.
If both indicator lamps are out, you have chosen the automatic mode for soft damping. The message: AIRMATIC DC CONVENIENCE for Comfort suspension tuning appears in the multifunction display. 264 i If one indicator lamp is on, the control system supports a primarily dynamic style of driving. The message: The selected suspension style is stored in memory, even after the SmartKey is removed from the starter switch. AIRMATIC DC SPORTS 1 Vehicle level control for Sporty 1 suspension tuning appears in the multifunction display. Your vehicle automatically adjusts its ride height to If both indicator lamps are on, the system is set for a dynamic style of driving. The message:
increase vehicle safety
reduce fuel consumption AIRMATIC DC SPORTS 2 for Sporty 2 suspension tuning appears in the multifunction display. Warning! G To help avoid personal injury, keep hands and feet away from wheel housing area, and stay away from under the vehicle when lowering the vehicle chassis. Controls in detail Driving systems The following vehicle level settings can be selected when the vehicle is stationary (Maybach 57, Maybach 62): Vehicle level Indicator lamp Use for when stationary Ride height increase over Automatic lowering normal (depending on vehicle speed) Normal Lamp off For driving on normal roads. None Max. approx. 0.6 in (15 mm) Raised Lamp on For driving on rough roads or with snow chains. Approx. 0.8 in (20 mm) Max. approx. 1.4 in (35 mm) The normal level of the Maybach 57 S is 0.6 in (15 mm) lower than for other models. The data given in the following table is based on the normal vehicle level of the Maybach 57 S: Vehicle level Indicator lamp Use for when stationary Ride height increase over Automatic lowering normal (depending on vehicle speed) Normal Lamp off For driving on normal roads. None None Raised Lamp on For driving on rough roads or with snow chains. Approx. 1.8 in (45 mm) Max. approx. 1.8 in (45 mm) 265 Controls in detail Driving systems The button is located on the lower part of the front center console.  Press button 1 again to lower the vehicle. The indicator lamp 2 is off. The selected vehicle level setting remains stored in memory even if the engine is turned off and restarted except when you
1 Vehicle level control button 2 Indicator lamp
Normal level (Maybach 57, Maybach 62): At a speed exceeding approximately 68 mph (110 km/h), the ride height is reduced automatically ( page 265).
Raised level: At a speed exceeding approximately 75 mph (120 km/h), the ride height is reduced automatically ( page 265).
With decreasing speed, the ride height is again raised to the normal level. exceed a speed of 75 mph (120 km/h) or
The vehicle chassis ride height is raised or lowered according to the selected level setting and to the vehicle speed: maintain a speed of between 50 mph (80 km/h) and 75 mph (120 km/h) for more than 5 minutes The vehicle then lowers to normal level. The indicator lamp 2 goes out.  Start the engine. i  Briefly press button 1 to change These height adjustments are so small that you may not notice any change. from one level setting to the other. The message: AIRMATIC DC VEHICLE RISING appears for approximately 10 seconds in the multifunction display when changing from normal level to raised level. The indicator lamp 2 is then on. 266 Select the raised level only when required by current driving conditions. Otherwise
handling may be impaired
fuel consumption may increase Controls in detail Driving systems Parktronic system (Parking assist) Warning! Warning! G Parktronic is a supplemental system. It is not intended to, nor does it replace, the need for extreme care. The responsibility during parking and other critical maneuvers always rests with the driver. Special attention must be paid to objects with smooth surfaces or low silhouettes (e.g. trailer couplings, painted posts, or road curbs). Such objects may not be detected by the system and can damage the vehicle. The operational function of the Parktronic can be affected by dirty sensors, especially at times of snow and ice, see “Cleaning the Parktronic system sensors” ( page 403). Interference caused by other ultrasonic signals (e.g. working jackhammers, car wash, or the air brakes of trucks) can cause the system to send erratic indications, and should be taken into consideration. G Make sure no persons or animals are in the area in which you are maneuvering. You could otherwise injure them. The Parktronic system monitors the surroundings of your vehicle with six sensors in the front bumper and four sensors in the rear bumper. The Parktronic system is an electronic aid designed to assist the driver during parking maneuvers. It visually and audibly indicates the relative distance between the vehicle and an obstacle. The Parktronic system is automatically activated when you switch on the ignition, release the parking brake, and placed the gear selector lever in position D, R, or N. The Parktronic system deactivates at speeds over approximately 11 mph (18 km/h). At lower speeds the Parktronic system turns on again. The Parktronic system also deactivates when you place the gear selector lever in position P or depress the parking brake pedal. 1 Sensors in the front bumper Range of the sensors To function properly, the sensors must be free of dirt, ice, snow and slush. Clean the sensors regularly, being careful not to scratch or damage the sensors, see “Cleaning the Parktronic system sensors” ( page 403). 267 Controls in detail Driving systems Front sensors Minimum distance Center approx. 40 in (100 cm) Center approx. 8 in (20 cm) Corners approx. 24 in (60 cm) Corners approx. 6 in (15 cm) Rear sensors Center approx. 48 in (120 cm) Corners approx. 32 in (80 cm) ! During parking maneuvers, pay special attention to objects located above or below the height of the sensors (e.g. street curbs, painted posts, or trailer hitches etc.). The Parktronic system will not detect such objects at close range and damage to your vehicle or the object may result. Ultrasonic signals from outside sources (e.g. truck air brakes, car wash, or jackhammers) may impair the operation of the Parktronic system. 268 If the system detects an obstacle in this range, all the warning lamps come on and you hear a warning signal. If the obstacle is closer than the minimum distance, the actual distance might no longer be indicated by the system. Controls in detail Driving systems Warning indicators Visual signals indicate to the driver the relative distance between the sensors and an obstacle. The warning indicator for the front area is located above the center air vents in the dashboard. The warning indicator for the rear area is integrated in the rear roof lining ( pages 38-46). In case you still cannot see the warning indicator after lifting up the rear view mirror:  Adjust the interior rear view mirror by hand until you can see the warning indicator. The interior rear view mirror returns to its original position as soon as:
the gear selector lever is no longer in position R
you exceed a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h) Maybach 62 with partition* You have an additional warning indicator for the rear area in the roof lining, in front of the partition. In order for you to see this warning indicator, the interior rear view mirror tilts slightly upward if:
the partition and curtain are not completely open
the gear selector lever is in position R 1 Left front area warning indicator 2 Right front area warning indicator 3 Readiness indicators Each warning indicator is divided into five yellow and two red segments for either side of the vehicle. The Parktronic system is ready when the green readiness indicators 3 are illuminated. 269 Controls in detail Driving systems Warning indicators activated The position of the gear selector lever determines which warning indicators will be activated. Gear selector Warning indicator lever position D Front area activated R or N Rear and front area activated P Neither activated 270 As your vehicle approaches an object, one or more segments will come on, depending on the distance between your vehicle and the object. When the second red segment comes on, you have reached the minimum distance.
Front area: An intermittent acoustic warning will sound as the first red segment comes on and a constant acoustic warning lasting a maximum of 2 seconds will sound for the second red segment. The signal is canceled when the gear selector lever is placed in position P or the parking brake is activated.
Rear area: An intermittent acoustic warning will sound as the first red segment comes on and a constant acoustic warning lasting a maximum of 2 seconds will sound for the second red segment. The signal is canceled when the gear selector lever is placed in position D, P, or the parking brake is activated. Switching the Parktronic system on/off The Parktronic system can be switched off manually. The Parktronic button is located on the lower part of the front center console. 1 Parktronic on/off 2 Indicator lamp Controls in detail Driving systems Switching off the Parktronic system Parktronic malfunction  Press button 1. If only the red distance segments illuminate and an acoustic warning sounds, there is a malfunction in the Parktronic system. The Parktronic system will automatically switch off after 20 seconds and the indicator lamp in the Parktronic switch comes on. If only the red segments of the Parktronic warning indicator go out and no warning sounds, then the sensors of the Parktronic system are dirty or malfunctioning. Malfunction may also be caused by interference from other radio or ultrasonic signals. The Parktronic system will switch itself off after 20 seconds.  Have the Parktronic system checked  Switch off the ignition ( page 62). Indicator lamp 2 comes on. Switching on the Parktronic system  Press button 1 again. Indicator lamp 2 goes out. i The Parktronic system is automatically switched on when the ignition is switched on ( page 62). by an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible.  Clean Parktronic system sensors ( page 403).  Switch on the ignition. or  Check Parktronic operation at anoth- er location to rule out interference from outside radio or ultrasonic signals. 271 Controls in detail Driving systems Parking Assist System (PAS) The Parking Assist System (PAS) is an optical parking aid. It shows you the area behind the vehicle on the COMAND display 1. The camera is in the license plate recess next to the handle for the trunk lid. In addition, the PAS contains guide lines to help you with reverse parking (back-in parking) and parallel parking. The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a reverse-mirror image similar to the view in a rear view mirror. 1 Camera For cleaning and care of the camera lens, see “Cleaning of the Parking Assist System (PAS) camera lens” ( page 404). 1 COMAND display 2 To switch COMAND on/off 3 To switch between parallel parking/ reverse parking 272 Controls in detail Driving systems View through the camera The 20 in (50 cm) 1, 40 in (100 cm) 2 and 107 in (270 cm) 3 guide lines correspond to the respective distance on the ground to the rear end of the vehicle. Warning! G Please note that objects which do not touch the ground, such as the bumper of a vehicle parked behind you, a trailer hitch, or the back of a truck, may appear to be further away than they actually are. In this case, you should not use the guide lines to judge distance. The use of the guide lines to judge distance increases the risk of impacting the objects. Warning! 1 2 3 4 20 in (50 cm) guide line 40 in (100 cm) guide line 107 in (270 cm) guide line Guide line for vehicle width G The PAS is a supplement system. It is not intended to, nor does it replace, the need for extreme care. The responsibility during parking and other driving maneuvers always rests with the driver. The PAS may show obstacles with a distorted perspective, incorrectly or not at all. Special attention must be paid to objects outside of the camera’s field of view such as those located very close to or below the rear bumper, or above the recessed grip of the trunk lid. Such objects may not be detected by the system and can damage the vehicle. The PAS does not warn you about impending collisions with objects. The driver is always responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to the immediate surroundings while parking or maneuvering the vehicle. This applies not only to the area behind the vehicle, but also to the area in front of and to the sides of the vehicle. Failure to do so could result in injury to persons and/or damage to the vehicle or other property. We also recommend that the driver use the Parktronic system when parking or maneuvering the vehicle. Warning! G Make sure no persons or animals are in or near the area in which you are maneuvering. You could otherwise injure them. 273 Controls in detail Driving systems Warning! G PAS may not function if:
the camera lens is dirty or covered see “Cleaning of the Parking Assist System (PAS) camera lens” ( page 404)
the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this case, have the position and setting of the camera checked by a qualified technician. Contact an authorized Maybach Studio.
the trunk lid is not completely closed
it is raining or snowing heavily, or if there is thick fog
in a very dark area
the camera is exposed to very strong white light (white stripes may appear on the COMAND display)
the surrounding area is lit with fluorescent light (the COMAND display can flicker) Do not use the PAS if the roads are icy, slippery or covered with snow. The vehicle could slip causing the actual vehicle position to deviate from the one shown on the COMAND display. This may cause injury to you or others, or damage the vehicle or objects.
there is a sudden change in temperature, for example when you drive out of the cold into a heated garage in winter (lens condensation) Mounting tires/rims of other specification than the original equipment tires/rims may impair the function of the PAS. Contact an authorized Maybach Studio.
outside temperatures are very high (lens condensation) Warning! G Use of PAS can be dangerous if you are color-blind or have impaired color vision. Only use PAS if you can see and distinguish all colored guide lines shown by PAS on the COMAND display. 274 Switching on PAS  Switch on the ignition ( page 62).  Switch on the COMAND (please refer to the separate COMAND and RearCabin Audiovisual System operating instructions).  Move gear selector lever to position R (reverse gear). The COMAND display will show the area behind the vehicle with guide lines to help you reverse into a parking place. i If you activate a different function on the driver’s COMAND controls while reverse parking or parallel parking, the image from the back-up camera is interrupted. To reactivate the camera, take the vehicle out of reverse gear and then reengage reverse gear again. Controls in detail Driving systems Reverse parking (back-in parking) Warning! G Please note that objects which do not touch the ground, such as the bumper of a vehicle parked behind you, a trailer hitch, or the back of a truck, may appear to be further away than they actually are. In this case, you should not use the guide lines to judge distance as the use of the guide lines to judge distance increases the risk of impacting the objects. 1 2 3 4 First yellow guide line Red guide line Second yellow guide line Guide line for vehicle width This function helps you when you are reversing in a straight line or backing in at any angle. The guide line for vehicle width 4 shows the width necessary for the vehicle. Even when the object you approach is directly on the ground (and nothing on the object extends above the ground beyond the object’s contours directly touching the ground) and no objects that do not touch the ground, such as the bumper of a vehicle parked behind you, a trailer hitch, or the back of a truck are in the path, do not approach the object on the ground any closer than red guide line 2. 1 Guide line for straight driving 2 Guide line for cornering The guide line for straight driving 1 shows you the space necessary for your vehicle. When you turn the steering wheel, the room required by the vehicle for reversing with the corresponding wheel angle is shown with yellow guide lines 2. 275 Controls in detail Driving systems Backing in straight  Switch on the COMAND.  Move gear selector lever to position R (reverse gear). You will see the guide line for reverse parking on the COMAND display.  Back in straight carefully. The desired parking space is wide enough if nothing protrudes into or is within the guide lines. Backing in at any angle  Switch on the COMAND.  Move gear selector lever to position R (reverse gear). You will see the guide line for reverse parking on the COMAND display. 276  Turn steering wheel so that the guide lines for cornering are pointing towards the desired parking space. The parking space is wide enough if nothing protrudes into the guide lines.  Back in carefully. Parallel parking This function assists you when you wish to park in a row, e.g. in a parking place parallel to the road.  Stop the vehicle in a safe location
at a distance of approximately 3 feet (1 meter) parallel to the vehicle that is in front of the desired parking space.
in such a way that the front of the parked vehicle is parallel to your rear wheel.  When the green guide line for straight driving lies parallel inside the desired parking space, straighten the steering wheel for straight driving.  Back in enough to leave sufficient free space around the vehicle.  Switch on the COMAND.  Move gear selector lever to position R (reverse gear). Controls in detail Driving systems Warning! G If the respective vertical guide line 2 is not yet located at the end of the parked vehicle and you are already turning into the parking space, you could collide with the parked vehicle. Stop the parking procedure immediately. Pull out of the parking space and start the parking procedure over again. 1 Parallel parking/back-in parking selector button  Press parallel parking button 1 on front center console. i If you press the parallel parking/backin parking selector button 1 again, you have selected the reverse parking assistance function once more ( page 275). 2 Vertical guide line  Back up carefully parallel to parked car until the respective vertical guide line 2 is at the end of the parked vehicle next to you.  Stop the vehicle in a safe location. 3 4 5 6 Tire reference point Extension guide line Vehicle contour guide lines Exterior boundary line  277 Controls in detail Driving systems   With the vehicle at a standstill, turn steering wheel in direction of parking until extension guide line 4 intersects the reference point for the rear tire of the vehicle parked next to you 3. or  If there is no vehicle next to you to use as a reference, turn steering wheel until exterior boundary line 6 intersects the curb or some other marking with which you would like to parallel park. i If there is an obstacle within vehicle contour guide lines 5 (e.g. part of the vehicle parked behind you or a part of the curb), the parking space is too small for your vehicle. 278 i If you turn the steering wheel too far, the following appears in the COMAND display: Guidance by PAS not possible. Steering wheel turned too far. Please turn back. Turn the steering wheel back until the COMAND display clears and extension guide line 4 intersects the reference point for the rear tire of the vehicle parked next to you 3. If you back up using the wrong wheel angle, the following appears in the COMAND display: Guidance by PAS no longer possible. Pull out of the parking space and start the parking procedure over again. 7 Bent guide line  Back up with the set wheel angle. The guide lines in the COMAND display disappear. After a short distance, bent guide line 7 appears. Controls in detail Driving systems  Back up using the set wheel angle un- i til guide line 8 for straight driving is parallel to the edge of the parking space, e.g. the curb. If you turn the steering wheel while backing up, the following appears in the COMAND display: Guidance by PAS no longer possible. The calculated course is no longer being followed. Pull out of the parking space and start the parking procedure over again.  Back up until bent guide line 7 inter- sects the edge of the parking space, e.g. the curb.  Stop the vehicle in a safe location.  Now straighten out steering wheel and back up until you still have just enough room behind the vehicle. While doing so, observe the Parktronic warning indicators ( page 269). 8 Guide line for straight driving 9 Guide line for cornering  With the vehicle at a standstill, turn steering wheel as far as it will go in the opposite direction. The guide lines for straight driving 8 and cornering 9 appear in the COMAND display. 279 Controls in detail Loading Cargo tie-down hooks Six hooks are located in the trunk. Carefully secure cargo by applying even load on all hooks with rope of sufficient strength to hold down the cargo. Loading instructions The total load weight including vehicle occupants and luggage/cargo should not exceed the load limit or vehicle capacity weight indicated on the corresponding placard located on the driver’s door B-pillar ( page 368). Warning! G Always fasten items being carried as securely as possible. In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around inside the vehicle and can cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items are securely fastened in the vehicle. To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care when transporting cargo. Put luggage or cargo in the trunk if possible. Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat backs. Do not place anything on the rearwindow shelf. Never drive vehicle with trunk open. Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness and death. 280 Controls in detail Useful features  Useful features Vanity mirror in the rear Vanity mirrors Vanity mirror in the sun visor Warning! G Do not use the vanity mirror while driving. Keep the mirrors in the sun visors closed while the vehicle is in motion. Reflected glare can endanger you and others. ! Close the vanity mirror cover (if open) before you disengage the sun visor from the mounting and pivot it to the side ( page 210). 1 Mirror lamp 2 Mirror cover  To use mirror, lift up cover 2. Mirror lamp 1 comes on. i If you disengage the sun visor from mounting, mirror lamp 1 will switch off. Example illustration from Maybach 57 3 Vanity mirror 4 Chrome label Opening the vanity mirror  Press chrome label 4. Vanity mirror 3 folds down and the mirror lamp comes on. Adjusting the vanity mirror  Slide the mirror to the left or to the right. Images in the mirror appear in normal size or larger, depending on the position of the mirror. Closing the vanity mirror  Push vanity mirror 3 up until it en- gages in place. 281 Controls in detail Useful features Ventilation grille with upper storage box Storage compartments Warning! G Closing the upper storage box  Fold the cover down until it engages in the lock. Luggage nets cannot secure hard or heavy objects.
braking
vehicle maneuvers or
an accident. 282  Press the chrome label. The storage box opens. To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care when storing objects in the vehicle. Put luggage or cargo in the trunk if possible. Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat backs. Keep compartment lids closed. This will help to prevent stored objects from being thrown around and injuring vehicle occupants during Opening the upper storage box 1 Upper storage box Controls in detail Useful features Glove box i Unlocking the glove box separately An AUX socket is located in the glove box. Portable audio devices can be plugged in here.  Pull the mechanical key out of the SmartKey ( page 452).  Insert the mechanical key into the Opening glove box lock and turn it to unlocked position 3.  Press button 1. You can now open the glove box. The glove box lid 2 swings down. Storage compartment in the glove box Closing 1 2 3 4 Glove box lid release Glove box lid Unlocked position Locked position  Push lid 2 up to close. A storage compartment for pens, a flashlight and a coin holder is located in the cover of the glove box. Locking the glove box separately Opening i You can lock the glove box separately, e.g. when the vehicle is in the shop for service. The glove box can be heated or cooled.  Pull the mechanical key out of the SmartKey ( page 452). Closing  Insert the mechanical key into the  Lightly push the cover plate up until The glove box can get very warm due to its confined space ( page 223). When storing heat-sensitive objects in the glove box, close the air vent while heating the passenger compartment. glove box lock and turn it to locked position 4.  Lightly touch cover plate. The cover opens automatically. it engages in lock. i The separate locking status of the glove box can only be canceled by means of the mechanical key. 283 Controls in detail Useful features Compartment for the front telephone Warning! Closing  Press button 1 to close. G ! To prevent any damage, the telephone flap must be folded down before closing the telephone compartment. Always keep the compartment for the front telephone closed while driving. The protruding telephone could otherwise cause injury to you and others during
braking
vehicle maneuvers or
an accident. i 1 Compartment lid release button 2 Compartment for telephone Opening  Press release button 1. The compartment lid opens downward. The telephone handset swings out. 284 The Roadside Assistance button • and the Information button ¡ ( page 330) are located in the compartment for the front telephone. Controls in detail Useful features Storage compartments in the front doors Warning! G Always keep the door storage compartments closed while the vehicle is in motion. Failure to do so may cause the seat belt to catch at the rear and prevent proper positioning of the seat belt. Opening the storage compartment  Lift the lid 1 up. Storage compartments in the rear doors (Maybach 57) Closing the storage compartment  Press the lid 1 down. Opening the storage compartment  Press button 2. The storage compartment 3 opens. Closing the storage compartment  Push the cover plate 3 up until it en- gages in the lock. 1 Headphones storage compartment 2 Storage compartment (for ashtray in vehicles with a rear center seat*) Opening the storage compartment  Lift the lid 1 or 2 up. Closing the storage compartment 1 Storage compartment 2 Opening button 3 Storage compartment with storage space for change and CDs  Press the lid 1 or 2 down. 285 Controls in detail Useful features Storage compartments in the rear doors (Maybach 62) Opening the storage compartment  Lift the lid 1 or 2 up. Storage compartment under the driver’s seat Closing the storage compartment  Press the lid 1 or 2 down. Opening the storage compartment  Press button 3.  Storage compartment 4 opens. Closing the storage compartment 1 2 3 4 Headphones storage compartment Storage compartment Opening button Storage compartment (for ashtray in vehicles with a rear center seat*)  Push the cover plate 4 up until it en- gages in the lock. 1 Tabs Opening the storage compartment  Press tabs 1 together.  Fold the cover forward. Closing the storage compartment  Close the cover until both tabs 1 of lock engage. 286 Controls in detail Useful features Storage compartment and storage compartment/drawer between the front seats (Maybach 62 with partition*) Opening storage compartment  Press button 2 briefly. The storage compartment 1 opens upward. Storage compartments in rear center console Opening/closing the storage compartment/drawer in rear center console Closing storage compartment  Push storage compartment 1 down- ward until it engages in the lock. Opening storage compartment/drawer  Press button 4 briefly. 1 Storage compartment 2 Opening button for storage compartment 3 Storage compartment/drawer 4 Opening button for storage compartment/drawer The storage compartment/drawer 3 opens. Closing storage compartment/drawer  Push storage compartment/ drawer 3 until it engages in the lock. Example illustration from Maybach 57 1 Opening button for storage compartment/drawer 2 Storage compartment/drawer i The remote control for the rear-cabin audiovisual system (see the separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions) is located in the storage compartment/ drawer. 287 Controls in detail Useful features i Maybach 62 with rear center seat*: In the storage compartment/drawer is the rear center console ( page 52). Maybach 57:  To open, press button 1. The storage compartment/drawer 2 opens.  To close, push storage compartment/ drawer 2 in until it engages in the lock. i There is no storage compartment/ drawer in Maybach 57 with rear center seat* if your vehicle configuration has the control panel for the rear functions* on the lower rear enter console. Maybach 62:  To open, press button 1. The storage compartment/drawer 2 opens slightly. If necessary: 288  Close the champagne flute/bottle holder ( page 296). or Opening/closing the upper storage compartment in rear center console (only Maybach 62)  Close the folding table* ( page 302).  Press button 1 again. The storage compartment/drawer 2 opens fully.  To close, push storage compartment/ drawer 2 in until it engages in the lock. Maybach 62 with partition* 1 Cover 2 Opening button for upper storage compartment  To open, press button 2. Cover 1 swings upward.  To close, press the cover 1 down- ward. Cover 1 engages automatically. Controls in detail Useful features Multifunction compartment* on the driver’s and/or front passenger’s seat backrest Closing the multifunction compartment  To close, press multifunction compartment 1 until it engages. Storage pocket (only Maybach 62) Warning! G The storage pocket is intended for storing light-weight items only. Maybach 62 without partition* 1 Cover 2 Opening button for upper storage compartment 3 Opening button for upper storage compartment  To open, press button 2 or 3. Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges or fragile objects may not be transported in the storage pocket. Example illustration from Maybach 57 The storage pocket cannot protect transported goods in the event of an accident. 1 Multifunction compartment 2 Button for opening multifunction compartment Cover 1 swings upward.  To close, press the cover 1 down- ward. Cover 1 engages automatically. Opening the multifunction compartment  Press button 2. Multifunction compartment 1 folds out. 289 Controls in detail Useful features Storage pockets for Maybach 62 without partition* Storage pockets for Maybach 62 with partition* Storage pockets are located on the left and right side of the rear center console. Storage pockets are located on the back of the front seats. Storage compartments between the rear seats Example illustration from Maybach 57 1 Storage pocket 290 1 Storage pocket 1 Upper storage compartment with insert for champagne flutes 2 Opening button for upper storage compartment 3 DVD player compartment and AUX sockets, headphone jacks 4 CD changer compartment 5 Middle storage compartment 6 Rear center armrest with compartment for telephone, storage compartment/refrigerator** underneath 7 Release catch 8 Ashtray/storage compartment* Controls in detail Useful features Warning! G Always fold the rear center armrest 6 downward while the vehicle is in motion. Without the armrest 6 folded down, the rear center armrest could open the storage compartment 5 in an accident or during abrupt vehicle maneuvers. Objects stored there then could be thrown around in the vehicle interior and cause vehicle damage and/or personal injury. i For more information on DVD player, AUX sockets, headphone jacks and CD changer, refer to the separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions. Opening the upper storage compartment 1  Press button 2. The upper storage compartment opens upward. Opening storage compartments 3, 4, 5 and 8 Opening/closing the storage compartment under the rear center armrest  Press the chrome label on the cover.  To open, lift up armrest 6. The compartment opens.  To close, press the armrest 6 down- ward. Closing storage compartments 3, 4, 5 and 8  Press the cover closed. The cover engages automatically. Opening/closing the storage compartment in the rear center armrest  To open, release catch 7 and swing cover of the rear center armrest 6 upward.  To close, press the cover of the rear center armrest 6 downward. The cover engages automatically. i There is an additional storage compartment in front of the telephone compartment. 291 Controls in detail Useful features Storage compartments in vehicles with a rear center seat* Opening/closing the telephone compartment If the third seat is not occupied, you can also use the seat backrest as an armrest. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 DVD player CD changer AUX sockets and headphone jacks Storage compartment Cover Release catch To open telephone compartment and access control panel for respective rear functions*  Press release catch 6 and swing cover 5 upward 7. i For more information on DVD player, AUX sockets, headphone jacks and CD changer, refer to the separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions. Example illustration from Maybach 57 1 Rear armrest  Pull the top of armrest 1 out and fold it downward. ! Do not sit on or lean your body weight against the armrest when it is folded down, as you could otherwise damage it. 292 Example illustration from Maybach 57 (vehicles with rear center seat*) Controls in detail Useful features Storage compartments in trunk Opening the compartment  Turn handle 1 or 4 90°. Umbrella An umbrella is located in the trunk.  Swing the cover down. Closing the compartment  Swing the cover up.  Turn handle 1 or 4 90°. 1 Handle 2 Compartment for navigation system DVD drive 3 Storage compartment 4 Handle 1 Umbrella 2 Straps  Use straps 2 on the inside of the trunk lid to store and secure umbrella 1. 293 Controls in detail Useful features Floormats Warning! G Whenever you are using floormats, make sure there is enough clearance and that the floormats are securely fastened. Floormats should always be securely fastened using eyelets 1 and retainer pins 2. 1 Eyelet 2 Retainer pin i Installing and removing for the front seats: To install or remove the floormat more easily, move the driver’s seat or front passenger seat as far to the rear as possible ( page 66). Installing and removing in the rear: To install or remove the floormat more easily, move the driver’s seat or front passenger seat as far to the front as possible ( page 66). 294 Before driving off, check that the floormats are securely in place and adjust them if necessary. A loose floormat could slip and hinder proper functioning of the pedals. Do not place several floormats on top of each other as this may impair pedal movement. Removing  Pull floormats off of retainer pins 2.  Remove the floormats. Installing  Lay down the floormat.  Press the floormat eyelets 1 onto re- tainer pins 2. Controls in detail Useful features Cup holders, cockpit Cup holders Warning! The cover engages automatically. G In order to help prevent spilling liquids on vehicle occupants and/or vehicle equipment, only use containers that fit into the cup holder. Use lids on open containers and do not fill containers to a height where the contents, especially hot liquids, could spill during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident. Liquids spilled on vehicle occupants may cause serious personal injury. Liquids spilled on vehicle equipment may cause damage not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. When not in use, keep the cup holder closed. An open cup holder may cause injury to you or others when contacted during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident. Keep in mind that objects placed in the cup holder may come loose during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident and be thrown around in the vehicle interior. Objects thrown around in the vehicle interior may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.  Press the cover closed. Rear cup/bottle holders 1 Cup holder, left 2 Cup holder, right Opening  Press the chrome label on the cover. The compartment opens.  Press the chrome label of the desired 1 Rear cup holder 2 Release catch for champagne flute/ bottle holder 3 Release catch for cup holder cup holder. Opening The cup holder slides out.  Press release catch on cup holder 3. Closing  Remove cup from holder. The cup holder slides out automatically.  Push the cup holder in until it engag- es. 295 Controls in detail Useful features Closing Opening  Remove cup from holder.  Press the label of the desired cup  Take the cups out of the holder. holder.  Press the holder back in until it en- The cup holder slides out. gages. Cup holder (vehicles with a rear center seat*) Closing  Remove cup from holder.  Push the cup holder in until it engag- es. Champagne flute/bottle holder Warning! G When not in use, keep the champagne flute/bottle holder closed while the vehicle is in motion. Place only champagne flutes from the Maybach Accessory range into the champagne flute holder. Only use those flutes designed for use with the holder. Make sure the champagne flutes are held in place by the retaining clips whenever the flutes are placed in the holder. This will reduce the risk of the flutes becoming loose during vehicle maneuvers. Place only bottles that fit fully within the bottle holder to reduce the possibility of the bottle becoming loose and being thrown around in the vehicle interior during vehicle maneuvers. 1 Cup holder, right 2 Cup holder, left 296 Loose objects being thrown around in the vehicle during vehicle maneuvers may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. Controls in detail Useful features Warning! G Always obey applicable state or province laws regarding passengers consuming alcoholic beverages in the vehicle and/or carrying alcoholic beverages in the vehicle interior. Inserting champagne flutes i Use the champagne flutes from the Maybach Accessory range. Only those flutes are designed for use with the holder.  Place the champagne flutes in the re- tainers and press them down lightly. The champagne flutes are held in place by the retaining clips.  To remove the champagne flutes, pull them upright carefully. Closing Opening  Take the champagne flutes/bottle  Press release catch on champagne flute/bottle holder 2 ( page 295).  With the champagne flute/bottle out of the holder. holder open, remove the drip tray from the transmission tunnel and place it in the opening for the bottle. The champagne flute/bottle holder slides out automatically.  Take the drip tray out of the opening Press the holder closed until it engages. for the bottle and place it under the opening on the carpet. Magnets hold the drip tray in the correct position. Example illustration from Maybach 57 297 Controls in detail Useful features Ashtrays Center console ashtray Rear compartment ashtray Removing ashtray insert Warning! G Remove front ashtray only with vehicle standing still. Set the parking brake to secure vehicle from movement. Move gear selector lever to position P. With gear selector lever in position P, turn off the engine.  Push sliding button 1 to the right. 1 Sliding button 2 Insert slides out Opening ashtray  Tap lightly on the chrome label on the cover. The ashtray opens automatically. The ashtray is disengaged and slides a short way out 2. 1 Sliding button 2 Insert slides out  Remove insert from ashtray frame. Opening ashtray Reinstalling the ashtray insert  Tap lightly on the chrome label on  Install insert by pushing back into frame until it engages again.  Close the ashtray. the cover. The ashtray opens automatically. Removing ashtray insert  Push sliding button 1 to the right. The ashtray is disengaged and slides a short way out 2. 298 Controls in detail Useful features Reinstalling the ashtray insert Removing ashtray insert  Install insert by pushing back into  Lift lid 1 up. frame until it engages again.  Close the ashtray. Rear compartment ashtray (vehicles with a rear center seat*)  Lift ashtray lid 3.  Press sliding button 2 forward. Insert 4 slides out a short distance.  Remove insert 4 from ashtray frame. Reinstalling the ashtray insert  Install insert 4 by pushing back into frame until it engages again.  Close the ashtray. 1 2 3 4 Lid Sliding button Ashtray lid Insert Cigarette lighters Warning! G Never touch the heating element or sides of the lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold the knob only. To avoid possible injury to children sitting in the rear seat, deactivate the operation of the rear door windows ( page 105). Deactivation of the rear windows also deactivates the rear compartment lighter. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. Opening ashtray  Lift lid 1 up.  Lift ashtray lid 3. 299 Controls in detail Useful features ! The lighter socket can be used to accommodate 12V DC electrical accessories (up to a maximum of 85 W) designed for use with the standard “cigarette lighter” plug type. Keep in mind, however, that connecting accessories to the lighter socket (for example extensive connecting and disconnecting, or using plugs that do not fit properly) can damage the lighter socket. With the socket damaged, the lighter may no longer be able to be placed in the heating (pushed-in) position, or the lighter may pop out too early with the lighter not hot enough. To help avoid damaging the cigarette lighter socket, we recommend connecting 12V DC electrical accessories designed for use with a standard “cigarette lighter” plug type to the 12V power outlets ( page 305) in your vehicle whenever possible. 300 1 Center console lighter 1 Rear compartment lighter (vehicles with a rear center seat*)  Switch on the ignition ( page 62).  Push in cigarette lighter 1. The lighter will pop out automatically when hot. i 1 Rear compartment lighter Make sure the override switch is not activated ( page 105). The rear lighter will not function if the override switch is activated. Controls in detail Useful features Non-smokers package* Storage compartment in rear center console Storage compartment in front center console 1 Storage compartment 2 Chrome label 1 Storage compartment 2 Chrome label  Tap lightly on chrome label 2 on the cover.  Tap lightly on chrome label 2 on the cover. Storage compartment 1 opens. Storage compartment 1 opens. 301 Controls in detail Useful features Opening the folding table Folding table* (standard on Maybach 62; optional on Maybach 57) Warning! G Keep the folding table closed while the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, you could be injured by the table or by objects flying off the table during
braking
vehicle maneuvers or
an accident. Always fold the rear center armrest 1 downward while the vehicle is in motion. Without the armrest 1 folded down, the rear center armrest could open the storage compartment in an accident or during abrupt vehicle maneuvers. Objects stored there then could be thrown around in the vehicle interior and cause vehicle damage and/or personal injury. 302 4 To pull out the table 5 To swing the table to the side 6 Table 1 To raise the armrest 2 Loop 3 Folding table  Pull table 6 out vertically 4.  Lift up armrest 1.  Swing the table to the side 5.  Pull up folding table 3 vertically, us-  Lower armrest 1. ing loop 2. Controls in detail Useful features Closing the folding table Refrigerator** in rear center console  Fold the table halves together.  Swing the table upward vertically.  Press the table until it engages at the base of the folding table.  If necessary, lift up the armrest.  Swing the folding table back com- pletely. 7 8 9 a Fold out table half Table half Move table surface fore and aft Tilt table surface  Fold out table half 8 from 7.  Press button 9 and adjust the table fore or aft to the desired position.  Press button a to adjust the table surface tilt. When you have obtained the desired tilt, release the button.  Lower the armrest. Warning! G Always fold the rear center armrest downward while the vehicle is in motion. Without the armrest folded down, the rear center armrest could open the storage compartment in an accident or during abrupt vehicle maneuvers. Objects stored there then could be thrown around in the vehicle interior and cause vehicle damage and/or personal injury. ! In especially humid regions, water can condense inside the refrigerator. For this reason, wipe out the refrigerator regularly. For more information on vehicle care ( page 399). 303 Controls in detail Useful features i Opening the refrigerator Turning refrigerator on The refrigerator continues to operate for up to 2 hours after the ignition has been switched off. If the onboard voltage falls below the minimum level, the refrigerator will be turned off automatically.  Lift up the rear center armrest up-  Turn knob 4 from OFF position 7 Therefore, do not leave any perishable goods in the refrigerator. ward.  Reach into the opening and lift up re- clockwise. The refrigerator is on. lease catch 1.  Open cover 2. Turning refrigerator off  Turn knob 4 counterclockwise to Refrigerator control Do not leave any open groceries in the refrigerator. OFF position 7. Make sure the rotary control is turned fully counterclockwise, until an audible “click” is heard. Regulating the temperature  Turn knob 4 to the desired position. ! 1 To release the cover 2 To open the refrigerator 3 Refrigerator 304 4 5 6 7 Control knob To increase cooling To decrease cooling To turn off the refrigerator When setting max. cooling, the temperature in the refrigerator may fall below freezing point. Objects stored in the refrigerator such as water bottles may burst. Closing the refrigerator  Press the lid down until it engages. Controls in detail Useful features The power outlet can be used to accommodate 12V DC electrical accessories (e.g. air pump, auxiliary lamps) up to a maximum of 180 W. Power outlets  Switch on the ignition ( page 62).  Flip up cover. i 1 Socket in the trunk Make sure the override switch is not activated ( page 105). The socket in the rear center console will not function if the override switch is activated. 1 Socket in the rear center console ! Make sure no fluids come into contact with the socket, as this could cause a short circuit. 1 Socket in the rear center console (vehicles with a rear center seat*) 1 Socket in the front passenger footwell (vehicles with non-smokers package*) 305 Controls in detail Useful features Battery charge socket The vehicle is equipped with a battery charge socket. The socket allows for the connection of the Maybach battery charger* designed to charge the vehicle consumer battery or to maintain the existing charge in the vehicle consumer battery while the vehicle is parked and not being driven for long periods of time (on average approximately 3 weeks or more). Not driving the vehicle for such extended periods of time may cause the charge in the vehicle batteries to drop. The socket is located in the storage compartment on the left side of the trunk. Only the Maybach battery charger* should be connected to this socket. i If the battery for electrical consumers is deeply discharged, it may take up to approximately 20 hours for the battery to be charged using the Maybach battery charger*. 1 Handle 2 Battery charge socket 3 Storage compartment  Turn handle 1 90°.  Swing the cover down.  Connect the Maybach battery charg- er* to battery charge socket 2. Follow the separate operating instructions for the Maybach battery charger*. i You can obtain the Maybach battery charger* at any authorized Maybach Studio. Check with an authorized Maybach Studio for availability. 306 If faster charging is required, a standard battery charger may be needed. Using a standard battery charger will require that you disconnect and remove the battery for electrical consumers. For more information, see “Practical hints” ( page 471). Controls in detail Useful features Rear window curtain The driver’s button is in the lower part of the front center console under the cover for the cup holders. Depending on vehicle equipment configuration, the button in the rear is either in the center console or in the top of the center armrest. Operating from the cockpit  To stop the procedure, press the but- ton again. Opening the curtain  Briefly press button 2. The curtain opens automatically.  To stop the procedure, press the but- ton again. Operating from the rear Rear button (only Maybach 57 without rear door window curtains* and with rear seat*) 1 To close/open the curtain Closing the curtain  Briefly press button 1. The curtain closes automatically.  To stop the procedure, press the but- ton again. Button in cockpit 1 To close the curtain 2 To open the curtain Rear button (only Maybach 57 without rear door window curtains*) Closing the curtain 1 To close/open the curtain  Briefly press button 1. The curtain closes automatically. 307 Controls in detail Useful features Opening the curtain Opening the curtain  Briefly press button 1.  Lightly press button 2 to resistance point. The curtain opens automatically. The curtain will open until you release the button.  To stop the procedure, press the but- ton again. Fully closing the curtain (Express-close)  Press button 1 past the resistance point and release. Rear button (example illustration from vehicles with rear door window curtains* and with rear center seat*) (The mobile phone shown is not an available option and is subject to change) Rear button (example illustration from vehicles with rear door window curtains*) (The mobile phone shown is not an available option and is subject to change) 1 To close the curtain 2 To open the curtain  Open the storage compartment in the rear center armrest ( page 291). 308 1 To close the curtain 2 To open the curtain  Open the storage compartment in the rear center armrest ( page 292). Closing the curtain  Lightly press button 1 to resistance point. The curtain will close until you release the button. The curtain closes completely.  To stop the procedure, press the but- ton again. Fully opening the curtain (Express-open)  Press button 2 past the resistance point and release. The curtain opens completely.  To stop the procedure, press the but- ton again. Controls in detail Useful features Rear door window curtains* The driver’s switches are in the lower part of the front center console under the cover for the cup holders. Depending on equipment, the button in the rear is either in the center console or in the top of the center armrest. Operating from the cockpit i If you open a rear door window without rear door window curtain completely open, the curtain will open first. Closing the curtain  Briefly press upper part 1 of button 3 or 4. The respective curtain closes.  To stop the procedure, press the but- ton again. Opening the curtain  Briefly press lower part 2 of button 3 or 4. Warning! G When operating the curtains, make sure there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the opening or closing procedure. The opening or closing procedure can be immediately halted by pressing the respective button again. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. The respective curtain opens.  To stop the procedure, press the butButton in cockpit ton again. 1 To close the curtain 2 To open the curtain 3 Button for rear left door window curtain 4 Button for rear right door window curtain 309 Controls in detail Useful features Closing the curtain Operating from the rear  Lightly press upper part 1 of button 3 or 4 to resistance point. The respective curtain will close until you release the button. Opening the curtain  Lightly press lower part 2 of button 3 or 4 to resistance point. Rear button (The mobile phone shown is not an available option and is subject to change) 1 To close the curtain 2 To open the curtain 3 Button for rear left door window curtain 4 Button for rear right door window curtain  Open the storage compartment in the rear center armrest ( page 291). 310 Rear button (vehicles with rear center seat*) (The mobile phone shown is not an available option and is subject to change) 1 To close the curtain 2 To open the curtain 3 Button for rear left door window curtain 4 Button for rear right door window curtain  Open the storage compartment in the rear center armrest ( page 292). The respective curtain will open until you release the button. Controls in detail Useful features Fully closing the curtain (Express-close) Fully opening the curtain (Express-open)  Press upper part 1 of  Press lower part 2 of button 3 or 4 button 3 or 4 past the resistance point and release. past the point of resistance and release. The curtain closes completely. The curtain opens completely.  To stop the procedure, press the but- ton again.  To stop the procedure, press the but- ton again. Warning! G When operating the curtains, make sure there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the opening or closing procedure. The opening or closing procedure can be immediately halted by releasing the respective button or, if button was pressed past the resistance point and released, by pressing the respective button 3 or 4 again. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. 311 Controls in detail Useful features Partition* Operating the partition Warning! G When operating the partition, make sure there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the opening or closing procedure. The opening or closing procedure can be immediately halted by releasing the button or, if the button was pressed past the resistance point and released, by pressing the respective button again. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. 312 Button in cockpit 1 To close the partition 2 To open the partition Button in rear passenger compartment (The mobile phone shown is not an available option and is subject to change) i 1 To close the partition 2 To open the partition Closing the partition from the rear is not possible if you activate the override switch ( page 105).  Open the storage compartment in the rear center armrest ( page 291). Controls in detail Useful features Closing the partition  Lightly press button 1 to resistance point. The partition will close until you release the button. Opening the partition Fully closing the partition (Express-close)  Press button 1 past the resistance point and release. The partition closes completely.  To stop the procedure, press the but- ton again.  Lightly press button 2 to resistance point. Button in rear passenger compartment (vehicles with rear center seat*) (The mobile phone shown is not an available option and is subject to change) 1 To close the partition 2 To open the partition The partition will open until you release the button. Fully opening the partition (Express-open)  Press button 2 past the point of re- sistance and release. The partition opens completely.  To stop the procedure, press the but- ton again.  Open the storage compartment in the rear center armrest ( page 292). 313 Controls in detail Useful features Operating the partition curtain Warning! G When operating the curtains, make sure there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the opening or closing procedure. The opening or closing procedure can be immediately halted by releasing the button or, if the button was pressed past the resistance point and released, by pressing the respective button again. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. 314 Button in cockpit 1 To close the curtain 2 To open the curtain Button in rear passenger compartment (The mobile phone shown is not an available option and is subject to change) 1 To close the curtain 2 To open the curtain  Open the storage compartment in the rear center armrest ( page 291). Controls in detail Useful features Opening the curtain  Lightly press button 2 to resistance point. The curtain will open until you release the button. Fully closing the curtain (Express-close)  Press button 1 past the resistance point and release. Button in rear passenger compartment (vehicles with rear center seat*) (The mobile phone shown is not an available option and is subject to change) 1 To close the curtain 2 To open the curtain  Open the storage compartment in the rear center armrest ( page 292). Closing the curtain  Lightly press button 1 to resistance The curtain closes completely. Two-way intercom* (Maybach 62: standard with partition*) With the partition closed, you can communicate between the cockpit and the rear passenger compartment using the two-way intercom. You can only initiate a voice connection from the rear passenger compartment. The driver can only signal a connection request from the cockpit.  To stop the procedure, press the but- ton again. Fully opening the curtain (Express-open)  Press button 2 past the resistance point and release. The curtain opens completely.  To stop the procedure, press the but- ton again. point. The curtain will close until you release the button. 315 Controls in detail Useful features Signaling a connection request from the cockpit Initiating a voice connection from the rear The button is located on the lower part of the front center console. In Maybach 62 with a rear center seat* in the storage compartment/drawer in rear center console the buttons are on the rear center console. In Maybach 62 with a rear center seat* the buttons are in the storage compartment/drawer in the rear center console. 1 On/off button  Press button 1. A gong sounds in the rear passenger compartment, and the indicator lamp on the button comes on. 1 Volume control 2 Speak button Maybach 62 with rear center seat* 1 Volume control 2 Speak button  Press button 2. A gong sounds in the cockpit, and a voice connection is established between the cockpit and the rear passenger compartment. 316 Controls in detail Useful features Adjusting the volume  Turn thumbwheel 1 until the de- sired volume has been set. Ending the voice connection  Press button 2 again in the rear pas- senger compartment. External communication (special order equipment) With the communication system, you can communicate with persons outside the vehicle over a loudspeaker and an outside microphone, without having to open a door or window.  Take the control unit out of the glove box. Listening  Push microphone switch-over 5 downward. You will hear what is being said outside of the vehicle. Speaking  Press speak button 1 and keep it pressed. You can speak as long as you keep button 1 pressed.  Adjust volume with the volume con- trol button 2. 1 2 3 4 5 Speak button for inside microphone Volume control Loudspeaker for outside microphone Inside microphone Microphone switch-over 317 Controls in detail Useful features Heated steering wheel The steering wheel heating warms up the leather area of the steering wheel. The stalk is located on the lower lefthand side of the steering wheel. Switching on Switching off  Switch on the ignition ( page 62).  Turn switch at the tip of stalk in direc-  Turn switch at the tip of stalk in direc- tion of arrow 1. The steering wheel is heated. Indicator lamp 2 comes on. The steering wheel heating is switched off. Indicator lamp 2 goes out. i i The steering wheel heating is temporarily suspended while indicator lamp 2 remains on when

1 Switching on 2 Indicator lamp 3 Switching off tion of arrow 3. the temperature of the vehicle interior is above 86°F (30°C) the temperature of the steering wheel is above 79°F (26°C) When these conditions do not apply anymore, steering wheel heating continues. Indicator lamp 2 flashes or switches off
in case of power surge or undervoltage
in case of a steering wheel heating malfunction i The steering wheel heating switches off automatically when you remove the SmartKey from the starter switch or, on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**, when you switch off the ignition ( page 62) and open the driver’s door. For information on the steering wheel, see “Steering wheel” ( page 68). 318 Controls in detail Useful features Telephone Warning! G Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna) from inside the vehicle while the engine is running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/or serious personal injury. Radio transmitters, such as a portable telephone or a citizens band unit, should only be used inside the vehicle if they are connected to an antenna that is installed on the outside of the vehicle. Warning! G Please do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s attention to the road must always be his/her primary focus when driving. For your safety and the safety of others, we recommend that you pull over to a safe location and stop before placing or taking a telephone call. The external antenna must be approved for Maybach vehicles. Please contact an authorized Maybach Studio for information on the installation of an approved external antenna. Refer to the radio transmitter operation instructions regarding use of an external antenna. If you choose to use the telephone1 while driving, please use the hands-free device and only use the telephone when road, weather and traffic conditions permit. Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a mobile telephone while driving a vehicle. Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit Management and Data System)1 if road, weather and traffic conditions permit. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second. 1 Observe all legal requirements. 319 Controls in detail Useful features You can receive and place telephone calls using the s and t buttons on the steering wheel. To carry out other telephone functions, use the control system ( page 181). Warning! Always keep the compartment for the front telephone closed while the vehicle is in motion. The protruding telephone could otherwise cause injury to you and others during See the separate operating manual COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System for instructions on how to use the telephone. Mobile phone in the front Mobile phone cradles for GSM or CDMA phones can be installed in the cockpit. These mobile phone cradles can be obtained from an authorized Maybach Studio. The functions and services available to you while using the mobile phone depend on your service provider and the type of mobile phone you are using. G 1 Compartment lid release button 2 Compartment lid Opening  Press release button 1. Compartment lid 2 opens downward. The telephone handset swings out.
braking
vehicle maneuvers or
an accident. Closing  Press button 1 to close. ! To prevent any damage, the mobile phone flap must be folded down before closing the telephone compartment. i The Roadside Assistance button • and the Information button ¡ ( page 330) are located in the compartment for the front telephone. 320 Controls in detail Useful features  Push the top of the mobile phone in Inserting the mobile phone in the mobile phone cradle direction of arrow 1, until the lug on the mobile phone release button engages. Once the mobile phone has been inserted in the mobile phone cradle, calls can only be made via the hands-free system. The mobile phone is connected to the network via the external antenna. ! The mobile phone is linked to the hands-free device and the multifunction steering wheel. Do not try to remove the mobile phone along with the cradle. You could otherwise damage the mobile phone cradle.  Remove the cover for the external an- tenna connection from the back of the mobile phone and store it in a safe place. 1 Insert the mobile phone 2 Connector contact 3 Mobile phone cradle  Slide the lower end of the mobile phone into connector contact 2 on cradle 3. The battery is charged depending on its charge status and the position of the key in the ignition switch. The charge procedure will be indicated in the mobile phone’s display. i GSM mobile phone: The phone books contained on the SIM card and in the mobile phone’s memory will be imported. If an identical entry has been stored in both phone books, the entry will appear twice in the multifunction display. 321 Controls in detail Useful features You can place or receive phone calls using the í and ì buttons in the steering wheel. You can control other functions of the mobile phone via the control system ( page 181). Removing the mobile phone from the cradle i When you take the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** out of the starter switch, the mobile phone remains switched on for approx. 10 minutes (run-on time). If you place or receive a call during this time, the mobile phone switches off 10 minutes after the call has been completed. Changing the mobile phone cradle Please contact an authorized Maybach Studio if you require a different mobile phone cradle for your GSM or CDMA mobile phone. Removing an existing mobile phone cradle 1 Release catch for mobile phone 2 Mobile phone cradle  Press release catch in direction of arrow 1 and take mobile phone out of mobile phone cradle 2. 1 To release the mobile phone cradle 2 To remove the mobile phone cradle 3 Mobile phone cradle  Press release button in direction of arrow 1 and take mobile phone cradle 3 out in direction of arrow 2. 322 Controls in detail Useful features Installing a different mobile phone cradle Cellular phone in the rear Your vehicle is equipped with Bluetooth®. The Bluetooth® interface is located in the rear armrest.  Open the storage compartment in the rear center armrest ( page 291). Inserting the Bluetooth® interface into cradle 4 Engage the Bluetooth® interface into cradle 5 Release button 6 Button with indicator lamp 1 Contact plate 2 Recesses 3 Mobile phone cradle  Push the top of the Bluetooth® inter- face in direction of arrow 4, until the release button 5 engages.  Insert mobile phone cradle 3 into recesses 2 of contact plate 1.  Push mobile phone cradle 3 forward until it engages. 1 Insert the Bluetooth® interface 2 Contact 3 Cradle The indicator lamp in the button 6 will flash slowly in blue, to indicate that the interface is ready for pairing with a Bluetooth® compatible mobile phone.  Slide the lower end of the Bluetooth® interface into contact 2 on cradle 3. 323 Controls in detail Useful features Initializing pairing of Bluetooth® interface and mobile phone  Enter “0000” (four zeros), when prompted to enter the passkey. The indicator lamp in the button 1 will stop flashing and remain illuminated in blue. The pairing of the Bluetooth® interface with your mobile phone was successful. i Pairing is only required once for each handset. 1 Button with indicator lamp  To initialize pairing, press and hold button 1 on the Bluetooth® interface until the indicator lamp in the button begins to flash rapidly in blue. ®  Depending on which Bluetooth ca- pable mobile phone you have, conduct a search for “devices within range”, until you find the Bluetooth® interface with the symbol “MB BTUM”.  Select this symbol. 324 You will be able to make and receive hands-free phone calls using the speakers and microphones installed in your vehicle. You can also switch from hands-free mode to privacy phone mode. i Please contact a authorized Maybach Studio for the most recent list of Bluetooth® capable mobile phones that have been approved for use in your vehicle. For detailed instructions on how to pair the Bluetooth® interface with the mobile phone, please refer to the mobile phone operating instructions. Controls in detail Useful features Tele Aid ! The initial activation of the Tele Aid system may only be performed by completing the subscriber agreement and placing an acquaintance call using the Information button ¡, located in the phone compartment to the left of the glove box. Failure to complete either of these steps will result in a system that is not activated. If you have any questions regarding activation, please call the Maybach Assistance Center at 1-866-FOR-MAYBach (in the USA) or 1-888-881-6611 (in Canada). The Tele Aid system (Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand) The Tele Aid system consists of three types of response:
automatic and manual emergency
Roadside Assistance and
information The Tele Aid system is operational providing that the vehicle’s battery is charged, properly connected, not damaged and cellular and GPS coverage is available. The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can be adjusted when using the volume control on the multifunction steering wheel or the volume control on the COMAND. To raise, press button æ and to lower, press button ç on the steering wheel or use the volume knob on your COMAND head unit.  To activate, press one of the SOS but- tons, the Roadside Assistance button • or the Information button ¡, depending on the type of response required. Warning! G Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second. 325 Controls in detail Useful features i i The SOS button is located in the overhead control panel ( page 328). An additional SOS button is located in the middle armrest of the rear seat or, in Maybach 62 vehicles with rear center seat* and partition* or twoway intercom*, in the storage compartment/drawer in rear center console. The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular network for communication and the GPS (Global Positioning System) satellites for vehicle location. If either of these signals are unavailable, the Tele Aid system may not function and if this occurs, assistance must be summoned by other means. The Roadside Assistance button • and the Information button ¡ are located in the front telephone compartment ( page 330). Shortly after the completion of your Tele Aid acquaintance call, you will receive a user ID and password. System self-check Initially, after switching on the ignition, malfunctions are detected and indicated (the indicator lamps in the SOS button, the Roadside Assistance button • and the Information button ¡ stay on longer than 10 seconds or do not come on). The message TELE AID MALFUNCTION DRIVE TO WORKSHOP appears for approximately 10 seconds in the multifunction display. 326 Warning! G If the indicator lamps in the SOS button, in the Roadside Assistance button • and/ or in the Information button ¡ do not come on during the system self-check or if any of these indicators remain illuminated constantly in red and/or the message TELE AID MALFUNCTION DRIVE TO WORKSHOP is displayed in the multifunction display after the system self-check, a malfunction in the system has been detected. If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above, the system may not operate as expected. Have the system checked at the nearest authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. Controls in detail Useful features Emergency calls An emergency call is initiated automatically following an accident in which the emergency tensioning devices (ETDs) or airbags deploy. An emergency call can also be initiated manually by opening the cover in the overhead control panel labeled SOS, then briefly pressing the button located under the cover. An additional SOS button is located in the middle armrest of the rear seat or, in Maybach 62 vehicles with rear center seat* and partition* or with rear center seat* and two-way intercom*, in the storage compartment/ drawer in rear center console. For instructions on initiating an emergency call manually ( page 328). When the connection is established, the message The Tele Aid system is available if:
it has been activated and is operational. Activation requires a subscription for monitoring services, connection and cellular air time.
the relevant cellular phone network and GPS signals are available and pass the information on to the Response Center. CALL CONNECTED appears in the multifunction display. All information relevant to the emergency, such as the location of the vehicle (determined by the GPS satellite location system), vehicle model, identification number and color are generated. A voice connection between the Response Center and the occupants of the vehicle will be established automatically soon after the emergency call has been initiated. The Response Center will attempt to determine more precisely the nature of the emergency provided they can speak to an occupant of the vehicle. i Location of the vehicle on a map is only possible if the vehicle is able to receive signals from the GPS satellite network and pass the information on to the Response Center. Once the emergency call is in progress, the indicator lamp in the SOS button will begin to flash. The message CONNECTING CALL appears in the multifunction display. 327 Controls in detail Useful features Warning! G Initiating an emergency call manually If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is illuminated continuously and there was no voice connection to the Response Center established, then the Tele Aid system could not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network is not available). The message CALL FAILED appears in the multifunction display for approximately 10 seconds. Should this occur, assistance must be summoned by other means. SOS button in the rear center console SOS button in the overhead control panel 1 Cover 2 SOS button 328 1 Cover 2 SOS button Controls in detail Useful features For Maybach 57 with rear center seat*: the additional SOS button is located in the rear center console. For Maybach 62 with rear center seat*: the additional SOS button is located in the storage compartment/drawer.  Briefly press on the cover of the emergency call button 1 with the inscription SOS. The cover will open.  Press SOS button 2 briefly. The indicator lamp in SOS button 2 flashes until the emergency call is concluded.  Wait for a voice connection to the Re- sponse Center.  Close cover 1 after the emergency call is concluded. SOS button* in the rear center console Warning! 1 Cover 2 SOS button SOS button* in the storage compartment/ drawer 1 Cover 2 SOS button G If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, vehicle in a dangerous road location), please do not wait for voice contact after you have pressed the emergency button. Carefully leave the vehicle and move to a safe location. The Response Center will automatically contact local emergency officials with the vehicle’s approximate location if they receive an automatic SOS signal and cannot make voice contact with the vehicle occupants. 329 Controls in detail Useful features Roadside Assistance button • When the connection is established, the message The Roadside Assistance button • is located in the front telephone compartment. CALL CONNECTED appears in the multifunction display. The Tele Aid system will transmit data generating the vehicle identification number, model, color and location (subject to availability of cellular and GPS signals). 1 Compartment lid release 2 Information button ¡ 3 Roadside Assistance button •  Press and hold Roadside Assistance 1 Compartment lid release 2 Compartment lid  Press button 1. The compartment lid 2 opens downward. button • (for longer than 2 seconds). A call to a Maybach Roadside Assistance dispatcher will be initiated. The button • flashes while the call is in progress. The message CONNECTING CALL will appear in the multifunction display and the audio system is muted. 330 A voice connection between the Roadside Assistance dispatcher and the occupants of the vehicle will be established.  Describe the nature of the need for assistance. The Maybach Roadside Assistance dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified Maybach technician or arrange to tow your vehicle to the nearest authorized Maybach Studio. For services such as labor and/or towing, charges may apply. Refer to the Roadside Assistance manual for more information. Controls in detail Useful features The following is only available in the USA:
Sign and Drive services: Services such as a jump start, a few gallons of fuel or the replacement of a flat tire with the vehicle spare tire are obtainable. i The indicator lamp on the Roadside Assistance button • remains illuminated in red for approximately 10 seconds during the system self-check after switching on ignition (together with the SOS button and the Information button ¡). See system self-check ( page 326) when the indicator lamp does not come on in red or stays on longer than approximately 10 seconds. If the indicator lamp on the Roadside Assistance button • is illuminated continuously and there was no voice connection to the Response Center established, then the Tele Aid system could not initiate a Roadside Assistance call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network is not available). The message CALL FAILED appears in the multifunction display. Roadside Assistance calls can be terminated using the t button on the multifunction steering wheel or the respective button for ending a telephone call on the COMAND head unit. Information button ¡ The Information button ¡ is located in the front telephone compartment ( page 330).  Press and hold Information button ¡ (for longer than 2 seconds). A call to the Customer Assistance Center will be initiated. The button ¡ flashes while the call is in progress. The message CONNECTING CALL will appear in the multifunction display and the audio system is muted. 331 Controls in detail Useful features When the connection is established, the message CALL CONNECTED appears in the multifunction display. The Tele Aid system will transmit data generating the vehicle identification number, model, color and location (subject to availability of cellular and GPS signals). A voice connection between the Customer Assistance Center representative and the occupants of the vehicle will be established. Information regarding the operation of your vehicle, the nearest authorized Maybach Studio or Maybach USA products and services is available to you. i The indicator lamp on the Information button ¡ remains illuminated in red for approximately 10 seconds during the system self-check after switching on ignition (together with the SOS button and the Roadside Assistance button •). 332 See system self-check ( page 326) when the indicator lamp does not come on in red or stays on longer than approximately 10 seconds. If the indicator lamp on the Information button ¡ is illuminated continuously and there was no voice connection to the Response Center has been established, then the Tele Aid system could not initiate an Information call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network is not available). The message CALL FAILED appears in the multifunction display. Information calls can be terminated using the t button on the multifunction steering wheel or the respective button for ending a telephone call on the COMAND head unit. ! If the indicator lamps do not start flashing after pressing one of the buttons or remain illuminated (in red) at any time, the Tele Aid system has detected a malfunction or the service is not currently active, and may not initiate a call. Visit your Maybach Studio and have the system checked or contact the Maybach Assistance Center at 1-866-FOR-MAYBach (in the USA) or 1-888-881-6611 (in Canada) as soon as possible. Controls in detail Useful features Call priority i Remote door unlock If other service calls such as a Roadside Assistance call or Information call are active, an Emergency call is still possible. In this case, the Emergency call will take priority and override all other active calls. When a Tele Aid call has been initiated, the COMAND system audio is muted and the selected mode (radio, tape or CD) pauses. The mobile phone switches off. If it is necessary for you to use this phone, then the vehicle must be parked. Disconnect the coiled cord and place the call. The COMAND navigation system (if engaged) will continue to run. The display in the instrument cluster is available for use and spoken commands are only available by pressing the  button on the COMAND unit. A pop-up window will appear in the COMAND display to indicate that a Tele Aid call is in progress. In case that you have locked your vehicle unintentionally (e.g. SmartKey inside vehicle), and the reserve SmartKey is not mobile phone: i The indicator lamp in the corresponding button flashes until the call is concluded. Calls can only be terminated by a Response Center or Customer Assistance Center representative except Roadside Assistance and Information calls, which can also be terminated by pressing button t on the multifunction steering wheel or the respective button for ending a telephone call on the COMAND head unit.  Contact the Maybach Assistance Cen- ter at 1-866-FOR-MAYBach (in the USA) or 1-888-881-6611 (in Canada). You will be asked to provide your password which you provided when you completed the subscriber agreement.  Then return to your vehicle and pull the trunk recessed handle for a minimum of 20 seconds until the SOS button is flashing. The message CALL CONNECTED ! If the indicator lamp continues to flash or the system does not reset, contact the Maybach Assistance Center at 1-866-FOR-MAYBach (in the USA) or 1-888-881-6611 (in Canada). appears in the multifunction display. As an alternative, you may unlock the vehicle via Internet using the ID and password sent to you shortly after the completion of your acquaintance call. 333 Controls in detail Useful features The Response Center will then unlock your vehicle with the remote door unlocking feature. i The remote door unlock feature is available if the relevant cellular phone network is available. The SOS button flashes and the message CALL CONNECTED will appear in the multifunction display to indicate receipt of the door unlock command. Once the vehicle is unlocked, a Response Center specialist will attempt to establish voice contact with the vehicle occupants. If the trunk recessed handle was pulled for more than 20 seconds before door unlock authorization was received by the Response Center, you must wait 15 minutes before pulling the trunk recessed handle. 334 Stolen Vehicle Recovery services i In the event your vehicle was stolen: When the anti-theft alarm or the tow-away alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, a call is initiated automatically to the Response Center. See anti-theft alarm system ( page 115) and tow-away alarm ( page 117).  Report the incident to the police. The police will issue a numbered incident report.  Pass this number on to the Maybach Response Center along with your password issued to you when you subscribed to the service. The Response Center will then attempt to covertly contact the vehicle’s Tele Aid system. Once the vehicle is located, the Response Center will contact the local law enforcement and you. The vehicle’s location will only be provided to law enforcement. Controls in detail Useful features Garage door opener The integrated remote control is capable of operating up to three separately controlled devices. It provides a convenient way to replace up to three hand-held remote controls used to operate devices such as garage door openers, gate openers, or other devices compatible with HomeLink® or some other systems. Before the integrated remote control can be used, it must be programmed to the garage door opener, gate operator or other device you wish to operate. See the following instructions for programming information. Warning! Interior rear view mirror with integrated remote control 1 Indicator lamp 2 3 4 Signal transmitter button Needed for programming (not part of vehicle equipment): 5 Hand-held remote control of garage door opener, gate operator or other device 6 Hand-held remote control button G Before programming the integrated remote control to a garage door opener or gate operator, make sure people and objects are out of the way of the device to prevent potential harm or damage. When programming a garage door opener, the door moves up or down. When programming a gate operator, the gate opens or closes. Do not use the integrated remote control with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by U.S. federal safety standards (this includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door that cannot detect an object – signaling the door to stop and reverse – does not meet current U.S. federal safety standards. When programming a garage door opener, park the vehicle outside the garage. Do not run the engine while programming the integrated remote control. Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and possible death. 335 Controls in detail Useful features Programming or reprogramming the integrated remote control Step 1:  Switch on the ignition ( page 62). Step 2:  If you have previously programmed an signal transmitter button and wish to retain its programming, proceed to step 3. If you are programming the integrated remote control for the first time, press and hold the two outer signal transmitter buttons 3 and 4 and release them only when the indicator lamp 1 begins to flash after approximately 20 seconds (do not hold the button for longer than 30 seconds). This procedure erases any previous settings for all three channels and initializes the memory. If you later wish to program a second and/or third hand-held transmitter to the remaining two signal transmitter buttons, do not repeat this step and begin directly with step 3. 336 Step 3: Step 5:  Hold the end of the hand-held re-  After the indicator lamp 1 changes mote control 5 of the device you wish to train approximately 2 to 5 in (5 to12 cm) away from the signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) to be programmed, while keeping the indicator lamp 1 in view. Step 4:  Using both hands, simultaneously press the hand-held remote control button 6 and the desired signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4). Do not release the buttons until step 5 is completed. The indicator lamp 1 will flash, first slowly and then rapidly. i The indicator lamp 1 flashes immediately the first time the signal transmitter button is programmed. If this button has already been programmed, the indicator lamp will only start flashing after 20 seconds. from a slow to a rapidly flashing light, release the hand-held remote control button and the signal transmitter button. Step 6:  Press and hold the just-trained signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) and observe the indicator lamp 1. If the indicator lamp 1 stays on constantly, programming is complete and your device should activate when the respective signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) is pressed and released. i If the indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly for about 2 seconds and then turns to a constant light, continue with programming steps 8 through 12 as your garage door opener may be equipped with the “rolling code” feature. Controls in detail Useful features Step 7: Step 9: Step 12:  To program the remaining two signal  Press the “training” button on the  Confirm the garage door operation transmitter buttons, repeat the steps above starting with step 3. Rolling code programming To train a garage door opener (or other rolling code devices) with the rolling code feature, follow these instructions after completing the “Programming” portion (steps 1 through 6) of this text. (A second person may make the following training procedures quicker and easier.) Step 8:  Locate “training” button on the ga- rage door opener motor head unit. Exact location and color of the button may vary by garage door opener brand. Depending on manufacturer, the “training” button may also be referred to as “learn” or “smart” button. If there is difficulty locating the transmitting button, refer to the garage door opener operator’s manual. garage door opener motor head unit. The “training light” is activated. You have 30 seconds to initiate the following two steps. Step 10:  Return to the vehicle and firmly press, by pressing the programmed signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4). Step 13:  To program the remaining two signal transmitter buttons, repeat the steps above starting with step 3. hold for 2 seconds and release the programmed signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4). Step 11:  Press, hold for 2 seconds and release same signal transmitter button a second time to complete the training process. i Some garage door openers (or other rolling code equipped devices) may require you to press, hold for 2 seconds and release the same signal transmitter button a third time to complete the training process. 337 Controls in detail Useful features Gate operator/Canadian programming Step 4: Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for the integrated signal transmitter to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to “time-out” in the same manner.  Press and hold the signal transmitter If you live in Canada or if you are having difficulties programming a gate operator (regardless of where you live) by using the programming procedures, replace step 4 with the following: 338 button (2, 3 or 4). Do not release this button until it has been successfully trained.  While still holding down the signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4), “cycle” your hand-held remote control button 6 as follows: Press and hold button 6 for 2 seconds, then release it for 2 seconds, and again press and hold it for 2 seconds. Repeat this sequence on the hand-held remote control until the frequency signal has been learned. Upon successful training, the indicator lamp 1 will flash slowly and then rapidly after several seconds.  Proceed with programming step 5 and step 6 to complete. i Upon completion of programming the integrated remote control, make sure you retain the hand-held remote control that came with the garage door opener, gate operator or other device. You may need it for use in other vehicles, for future programming of an integrated remote control, or simply for continued use as a hand-held remote control to operate the respective device in other situations. Controls in detail Useful features Reprogramming a single signal transmitter button Erasing the remote control memory To program a device using a signal transmitter button previously trained, follow these steps:  Simultaneously press and hold down the outer signal transmitter buttons 3 and 4, for approximately 20 seconds, until the indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly. Do not hold for longer than 30 seconds.  Press and hold the desired signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4). Do not release the button. flash after 20 seconds. Without releasing the signal transmitter button, proceed with programming starting with step 3.  Select and press the appropriate inte- grated signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) to activate the remote controlled device. The integrated remote control transmitter continues to send the signal as long as the button is pressed – up to 20 seconds.
While performing step 3, hold the hand-held remote control 5 at different lengths and angles from the signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) you are programming. Attempt varying angles at the distance of 2 to 5 inches (5 to 12 cm) away or the same angle at varying distances.
If another hand-held remote control is available for the same device, try the programming steps again using that other hand-held remote control. Make sure new batteries are in the hand-held remote control before beginning the procedure.
Straighten the antenna wire from the garage door opener assembly. This may help improve transmitting and/ or receiving signals. The codes of all three channels are erased.  The indicator lamp 1 will begin to  Switch on the ignition ( page 62). Put a new battery in the hand-held remote control 5. This will increase the likelihood of the hand-held remote control sending a faster and more accurate signal to the integrated remote control.  Switch on the ignition ( page 62).  Switch on the ignition ( page 62). Operation of integrated remote control
i If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes of all three channels. Programming tips If you are having difficulty programming the integrated remote control, here are some helpful tips:
Check the frequency of the handheld remote control 5 (typically located on the reverse side of the remote). The integrated remote control is compatible with radio-frequency devices operating between 288-399 MHz. 339 340 Operation The first 1000 miles (1500 km) Driving instructions At the gas station Engine compartment Tires and wheels Winter driving Maintenance Vehicle care 341 Operation The first 1000 miles (1500 km) In the “Operation” section, you will find detailed information on operating, maintaining and caring for your vehicle. The more cautiously you treat your vehicle during the break-in period, the more satisfied you will be with its performance later on.
Drive your vehicle during the first 1000 miles (1500 km) at varying but moderate vehicle and engine speeds.
During this period, avoid heavy loads (full throttle driving) and excessive engine speeds (no more than 2⁄3 of maximum rpm in each gear).
Avoid accelerating by kickdown.
Do not attempt to slow the vehicle down by shifting to a lower gear using the gear selector lever.
Select gear positions 3, 2 or 1 only when driving at moderate speeds (for hill driving).
Select C as the preferred shift program ( page 203) for the first 1000 miles (1500 km). After 1000 miles (1500 km) you may gradually increase vehicle and engine speeds to the permissible maximum. 342 ! All of the above instructions, as may apply to your vehicle type, also apply when driving the first 1000 miles (1500 km) after the engine or the rear differential has been replaced. i Always obey applicable speed limits. Operation Driving instructions  Driving instructions Drive sensibly – save fuel Fuel consumption, to a great extent, depends on driving habits and operating conditions. Drinking and driving To save fuel you should: Warning! Pedals G
Keep tires at the recommended tire inflation pressures.
Remove unnecessary loads. Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and driving are very dangerous combinations. Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions and judgment.
Allow engine to warm up under low load use. The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident are greatly increased when you drink or take drugs and drive.
Avoid frequent acceleration and deceleration.
Have all maintenance work performed at the intervals specified in the Maintenance Booklet and as required by the Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada vehicles). Contact an authorized Maybach Studio. Warning! G Make sure that absolutely no objects are obstructing the pedals’ range of movement. Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all obstacles. If there are any floormats or carpets in the footwell, make sure that the pedals still have sufficient clearance. Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow anyone to drive who has been drinking or taking drugs. Fuel consumption is also increased by driving in cold weather, in stop-and-go traffic, on short trips and in hilly area. 343 Operation Driving instructions Power assistance Warning! G The electro-hydraulic brake system requires electrical power to operate. A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply or electrical system may impair brake system operation and switch it into its emergency operation mode. In such a case, the red brake warning lamp ( page 414) and warning messages in the instrument cluster come on while driving (see page 429 to page 430). To brake, the driver must then apply significantly greater brake pedal pressure and depress the pedal much further to obtain the expected braking effect. If necessary, apply full pressure to the brake pedal. Brakes may only be applied to the front wheels. Stopping distance is increased! 344 If there is a malfunction in the electro-hydraulic brake system, we recommend that the vehicle be transported with all wheels off the ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly equipment. A tow bar must be used if circumstances do not permit the use of the recommended towing methods and the vehicle requires towing with all four wheels on the ground. Towing the vehicle with all four wheels on the ground is only permissible for distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). For more information, refer to “Towing the vehicle” ( page 478). With the engine not running, there is no power assistance for the brake and steering systems. In this case, it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle. Brakes Warning! G After driving in heavy rain for some time without applying the brakes or through water deep enough to wet brake components, the first braking action may be somewhat reduced and increased pedal pressure may be necessary to obtain expected braking effect. Maintain a safe distance from vehicles in front. Resting your foot on the brake pedal will cause excessive and premature wear of the brake pads. It can also result in the brakes overheating, thereby significantly reducing their effectiveness. It may not be possible to stop the vehicle in a safe location in sufficient time to avoid an accident. Operation Driving instructions To help prevent brake disk corrosion after driving on wet road surfaces (particularly salted roads), it is advisable to brake the vehicle with considerable force prior to parking. The heat generated serves to dry the brakes. Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may be the reason for low brake fluid in the reservoir. If your brake system is normally only subjected to moderate loads, you should occasionally test the effectiveness of the brakes by applying above-normal braking pressure at higher speeds. This will also enhance the grip of the brake pads. All checks and service work on the brake system should be carried out by qualified technicians only. Contact an authorized Maybach Studio. Warning! G Make sure not to endanger any other road users when carrying out these braking maneuvers. Refer to the description of the Brake Assist System (BAS) ( page 108). If the parking brake is released and the brake warning lamp in the instrument cluster stays on, the brake fluid level in the reservoir is too low. Have the brake system inspected immediately. Contact an authorized Maybach Studio. Only install brake pads and brake fluid recommended by us for use on Maybach vehicles. Warning! ! When driving down long and steep grades, relieve the load on the brakes by shifting into a lower gear to use the engine’s braking power. This helps prevent overheating of the brakes and reduces brake pad wear. After hard braking, it is advisable to drive on for some time, rather than immediately park the vehicle, so that the air stream can cool down the brakes faster. G If other than recommended brake pads are installed, or other than recommended brake fluid is used, the braking properties of the vehicle can be degraded to an extent that safe braking is substantially impaired. This could result in an accident. 345 Operation Driving instructions Driving off Apply the brakes to test them briefly after driving off. Perform this procedure only when the road is clear of other traffic. Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached. When starting off on a slippery surface, do not allow a drive wheel to spin for an extended period with the ESP® switched off. Doing so may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. i Simultaneously depressing the accelerator pedal and applying the brake reduces engine performance and causes premature brake and drivetrain wear. 346 ! Parking Warning! G Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system, as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire. To reduce the risk of personal injury as a result of inadvertent vehicle movement, before turning off the engine and leaving the vehicle always:
Keep right foot firmly on brake pedal.
Firmly depress parking brake pedal.
Move the gear selector lever to position P.
Slowly release brake pedal.
When parked on an incline, turn front wheels towards the road curb.
Turn the SmartKey to starter switch position 0 and remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, or press the start/stop button ( page 63) (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**).
Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** with you and lock vehicle when leaving. Set the parking brake whenever parking or leaving the vehicle. In addition, move gear selector lever to position P. When parking on hills, turn front wheels towards the curb. Operation Driving instructions Tires Warning! Warning! G If you feel a sudden significant vibration or ride disturbance, or you suspect that possible damage to your vehicle has occurred, you should turn on the hazard warning flashers, carefully slow down, and drive with caution to an area which is a safe distance from the road. Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires appear unsafe, have the vehicle towed to the nearest authorized Maybach Studio or tire dealer for repairs. Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by law. These indicators are located in six places on the tread circumference and become visible at a tread depth of approximately 1⁄16 in (1.6 mm), at which point the tire is considered worn and should be replaced. G Although the applicable federal motor vehicle safety laws consider a tire to be worn when the treadwear indicators (TWI) become visible at approximately 1⁄16 in (1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not allow your tires to wear down to that level. As tread depth approaches 1⁄8 in (3 mm), the adhesion properties on a wet road are sharply reduced. Depending upon the weather and/or road surface (conditions), the tire traction varies widely. Specified tire inflation pressures must be maintained. This applies particularly if the tires are subject to extreme operating conditions (e.g. high speeds, heavy loads, high ambient temperatures). Warning! G Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire or driving at high speed with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire. Hydroplaning Depending on the depth of the water layer on the road, hydroplaning may occur, even at low speeds and with new tires. Reduce vehicle speed, avoid track grooves in the road and apply brakes cautiously in the rain. The treadwear indicator appears as a solid band across the tread. 347 Operation Driving instructions Tire traction The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy road is always lower than on a dry road. ( page 491) for a listing of winter tires approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles. You should pay particular attention to the condition of the road whenever the outside temperatures are close to the freezing point. Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. ! Maybach 57, Maybach 62 Your vehicle is factory equipped with “W”-rated tires, which have a speed rating of 168 mph (270 km/h). An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 155 mph (250 km/h). Maybach 57 S Warning! G If ice has formed on the road, tire traction will be substantially reduced. Under such weather conditions, drive, steer and brake with extreme caution. We recommend winter tires ( page 395) for the winter season for all four wheels to insure normal balanced handling characteristics. On packed snow, they can reduce your stopping distance in comparison to summer tires. Stopping distance, however, is still considerably greater than when the road is not covered with snow or ice. Exercise appropriate caution. Refer to “Rims and tires” in the “Technical data” section 348 Tire speed rating Regardless of the tire rating, local speed limits should be obeyed. Use prudent driving speeds appropriate to prevailing conditions. Warning! G Even when permitted by law, never operate a vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum speed rating of the tires. Exceeding the maximum speed for which tires are rated can lead to sudden tire failure, causing loss of vehicle control and possibly resulting in an accident and/or personal injury and possible death, for you and for others. Your vehicle is factory equipped with “Y”-rated tires, which have a speed rating of 186 mph (300 km/h). An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 171 mph (275 km/h). i For more Information, see “Tire speed rating for winter tires” ( page 394). For additional general information on tire speed markings on tire sidewall, see “Tire speed rating” ( page 382). Operation Driving instructions Winter driving instructions The most important rule for slippery or icy roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid abrupt acceleration, braking and steering maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control system under such conditions. When the vehicle is in danger of skidding, move gear selector lever to position N. Try to keep the vehicle under control by corrective steering action. i For more Information on driving with snow chains, see “Snow chains” ( page 395). Warning! G On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in order to obtain braking action. This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of control loss. Road salts and chemicals can adversely affect braking efficiency. Increased pedal force may become necessary to produce the normal braking effect. Depressing the brake pedal periodically when traveling at length on salt-strewn roads can bring road-salt-impaired braking efficiency back to normal. If the vehicle is parked after being driven on salt-treated roads, the braking efficiency should be tested as soon as possible after driving is resumed. Warning! G Make sure not to endanger any other road users when carrying out these braking maneuvers. Warning! G If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make sure snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipe and from around the vehicle with the engine running. Otherwise, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness and death. To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation, open a window slightly on the side of the vehicle not facing the wind. Warning! G The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice. For more information, see “Winter driving” ( page 394). 349 Operation Driving instructions Standing water Passenger compartment ! G Do not drive through flooded areas or water of unknown depth. Before driving through water, determine its depth. Never accelerate before driving into water. The bow wave could force water into the engine and auxiliary equipment, thus damaging them. Warning! If you must drive through standing water, drive slowly to prevent water from entering the passenger compartment or the engine compartment. Water in these areas could cause damage to electrical components or wiring of the engine or transmission, or could result in water being ingested by the engine through the air intake causing severe internal engine damage. Any such damage is not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. The trunk is the preferred place to carry objects. 350 Control and operation of radio transmitters COMAND, radio and telephone Always fasten items being carried as securely as possible. Warning! In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around inside the vehicle, and cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items are securely fastened in the vehicle. Driving abroad Abroad, there is an extensive Maybach service network at your disposal. If you plan to drive into areas which are not listed in the index of your Maybach Studio directory, you should request pertinent information from an authorized Maybach Studio. G Please do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle safely. Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit Management and Data System), radio or telephone1 if road, weather and traffic conditions permit. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second. 1 Observe all legal requirements. Operation Driving instructions Telephones and two-way radios Warning! G Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna) from inside the vehicle while the engine is running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/ or personal injury. Catalytic converter Your Maybach is equipped with monolithic-type catalytic converters, an important element in conjunction with the oxygen sensors to achieve substantial control of the pollutants in the exhaust emissions. Keep your vehicle in proper operating condition by following our recommended maintenance instructions as outlined in your Maintenance Booklet. ! Radio transmitters, such as a portable telephone or citizens band unit should only be used inside the vehicle if they are connected to an antenna that is installed on the outside of the vehicle. Refer to the radio transmitter operation instructions regarding use of an external antenna. To prevent damage to the catalytic converters, use only premium unleaded gasoline in this vehicle. Any noticeable irregularities in engine operation should be dealt with promptly. Otherwise, excessive unburned fuel may reach the catalytic converter, causing it to overheat and potentially start a fire. Warning! G As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or operate this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system, as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire. Emission control Certain systems of the engine serve to keep the toxic components of the exhaust gases within permissible limits required by law. These systems, of course, will function properly only when maintained strictly according to factory specifications. Any adjustments to the engine should therefore be carried out only by qualified Maybach Studio authorized technicians. Engine adjustments should not be altered in any way. Moreover, the specified service jobs must be carried out regularly according to Maybach servicing requirements. For details refer to the Maintenance Booklet. 351 Operation Driving instructions Warning! G Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and possible death. Do not run the engine in confined areas (such as a garage) which are not properly ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas fumes are entering the vehicle while driving, have the cause determined and corrected immediately. If you must drive under these conditions, drive with at least one window fully open at all times. 352 Coolant temperature During severe operating conditions, e.g. stop-and-go traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to approximately 248°F (120°C). ! The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature over 248°F (120°C). Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. Warning! G Driving when your engine is badly overheated can cause some fluids, which may have leaked into the engine compartment, to catch fire. You could be seriously burned. Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns and can occur just by opening the engine hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it. Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. Operation At the gas station  At the gas station Refueling Warning! G The fuel filler flap is located on the right hand side of the vehicle towards the rear. the point indicated by the arrow 1. The fuel filler flap opens slightly.  Push up the fuel filler flap to fully Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous. It burns violently and can cause serious injury. Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid inhaling fumes and skin contact, extinguish all smoking materials. Never allow sparks, flame or smoking materials near gasoline! Locking/unlocking the vehicle with the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** automatically locks/ unlocks the fuel filler flap.  Open the fuel filler flap by pushing at open.  Turn the fuel cap to the left and hold on to it until possible pressure is released.  Take off the cap and set it in the re- cess on the fuel filler flap 2.  To prevent fuel vapors from escaping 1 Push to open the fuel filler flap 2 Set the fuel cap  Turn the engine off
by using the SmartKey, remove the SmartKey from the starter switch
by pressing the KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button ( page 63), open the driver’s door (with the driver’s door open, starter switch is now in position 0, same as SmartKey removed from the starter switch). into open air, fully insert filler nozzle unit.  Only fill your tank until the filler noz- zle unit cuts out – do not top up or  overfill. 353 Operation At the gas station  Warning! G Overfilling of the fuel tank may create pressure in the system which could cause a gas discharge. This could cause the gas to spray back out when removing the fuel pump nozzle, which could cause personal injury.  Replace fuel cap by turning it clock- wise until it audibly engages.  Close the fuel filler flap. 354 i i Use only premium unleaded gasoline with a minimum Posted Octane Rating of 91 (average of 96 RON/ 86 MON). Leaving the engine running and the fuel cap open can cause the ? lamp to illuminate. Information on gasoline quality can normally be found on the fuel pump. For more information on gasoline, see the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet. For more information, see “Practical hints” ( page 415). Operation At the gas station Check regularly and before a long trip Brake fluid ! 1 Brake fluid electro-hydraulic brake system only 2 Coolant level 3 Brake fluid 4 Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system i Opening hood ( page 356). If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below, have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks immediately. Notify an authorized Maybach Studio immediately. Do not add brake fluid as this will not solve the problem. For more information, see “Practical hints” ( page 414). Coolant For more information, see “Coolant level” ( page 361) and see “Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.” ( page 495). Engine oil level For more information, see “Engine oil” ( page 357). Vehicle lighting Check function and cleanliness. For more information on replacing light bulbs, see “Replacing bulbs” ( page 458). See also the section on the exterior lamp switch ( page 155). Tire inflation pressure For more information on tire inflation pressure ( page 375). Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system For more information on refilling the reservoir, see “Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system” ( page 363). 355 Operation Engine compartment  Pull handle 2 to its stop out of radi- Hood ator grille. Warning! G  Lift bottom of hood at edge of radia- tor grille. Do not pull the release lever while the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise the hood could be forced open by passing air flow. The hood will be automatically held open at shoulder height. Warning! Opening 2 Handle for opening the hood  Lift hood slightly. Handle 2 will extend out of the radiator grille. ! Do not pull up the hood on handle 2. 1 Release lever  Pull release lever 1 in direction of ar- row. The hood is unlocked. 356 To avoid damage to the windshield wipers or hood, never open the hood if the wiper arms are folded forward away from the windshield. G To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of moving parts when the hood is open and the engine is running. Make sure the hood is properly closed before driving. When closing the hood, use extreme caution not to catch hands or fingers. The radiator fan may continue to run for approximately 30 seconds or even restart after the engine has been turned off. Stay clear of fan blades. Operation Engine compartment Warning! G If you see flames or smoke coming from the engine compartment, or if the coolant temperature gauge indicates that the engine is overheated, do not open the hood. Move away from vehicle and do not open the hood until the engine has cooled. If necessary, call the fire department. Closing Warning! G Be careful that you do not close the hood on anyone.  Let the hood drop from a height of approximately 1 ft (30 cm). The hood will lock audibly. Warning! G The engine is equipped with a transistorized ignition system. Because of the high voltage it is dangerous to touch any components (ignition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnostic socket) of the ignition system
with the engine running
while starting the engine
if ignition is “on” and the engine is turned manually  Check to make sure the hood is fully closed. If you can raise the hood at a point above the headlamps, then it is not properly closed. Open it again and let it drop with somewhat greater force. Engine oil The amount of oil your engine needs will depend on a number of factors, including driving style. Higher oil consumption can occur when
the vehicle is new
the vehicle is driven frequently at higher engine speeds Engine oil consumption checks should only be made after the vehicle break-in period. ! Do not use any special lubricant additives, as these may damage the drive assemblies. Using special additives not approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles may cause damage not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. More information on this subject is available at any Maybach Studio. 357 Operation Engine compartment Checking engine oil level with the control system When checking the oil level
the vehicle must be parked on level ground
with the engine at operating temperature, the vehicle must have been stationary for at least 5 minutes with the engine turned off
with the engine not at operating temperature yet, the vehicle must have been stationary for at least 30 minutes with the engine turned off You can check the engine oil level on the multifunction display.  Press button k or j on the steering wheel until the following message is seen in the multifunction display: For adding oil ( page 360). One of the following messages will subsequently appear in the indicator:
ENGINE OIL LEVEL OK
ADD 1.0 QT. TO REACH MAX. OIL LEVEL (Canada: 1.0 LITER)
ADD 1.5 QTS. TO REACH MAX. OIL LEVEL (Canada: 1.5 LITERS)
ADD 2.0 QTS. TO REACH MAX. OIL LEVEL (Canada: 2.0 LITERS) 358 If you want to interrupt the checking procedure, press button k or j on the multifunction steering wheel.  If necessary, add engine oil.  Switch on the ignition ( page 62). The standard display ( page 178) should appear in the multifunction display. i For more information on engine oil, see “Technical data” ( page 495) and ( page 496). Operation Engine compartment Other display messages If you see the message: If the ignition is not switched on, the following message will appear: ENGINE OIL LEVEL NOT WHEN ENGINE ON FOR ENGINE OIL LEVEL SWITCH IGNITION ON  Turn off the engine.  Switch on the ignition. If you see the message: PERF. SERV. ON TIME  If engine is at operating temperature, wait 5 minutes before repeating check procedure.  If engine is not at operating temper- ature yet, wait 30 minutes before repeating check procedure.  If the engine is at operating tempera- ture, wait 5 minutes before checking oil.  If the engine is not at operating tem- perature yet, you must wait 30 minutes before checking oil. If there is excessive engine oil with the engine at normal operating temperature, the following message will appear: ENGINE OIL LEVEL REDUCE OIL LEVEL  Have excess oil siphoned or drained off. Contact an authorized Maybach Studio. ! Excessive oil must be siphoned or drained off. It could cause damage to the engine and catalytic converter not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. For more information on messages in the multifunction display concerning engine oil, see “Practical hints” ( page 437). 359 Operation Engine compartment ! Adding engine oil Excessive oil must be siphoned or drained off. It could cause damage to the engine and catalytic converter not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. ! Only use approved engine oils and oil filters required for vehicles with Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada vehicles). For a listing of approved engine oils and oil filters, refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet in your vehicle literature portfolio, or contact an authorized Maybach Studio. Using engine oils and oil filters of specification other than those expressly required for the Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada vehicles), or changing of oil and oil filter at change intervals longer than those called for by the Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada vehicles) will result in engine damage not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. 360  Screw the filler cap 1 back on the filler neck. 1 Filler cap  Unscrew the filler cap 1 from filler neck.  Add engine oil as required. Be careful not to overfill with oil. Be careful not to spill any oil when adding. Avoid environmental damage caused by oil entering the ground or water. For more information on engine oil, see “Technical data” ( page 495) and ( page 496). Transmission fluid level The transmission fluid level does not need to be checked. If you notice transmission fluid loss or gear shifting malfunctions, have an authorized Maybach Studio check the automatic transmission. Operation Engine compartment Coolant level The engine coolant is a mixture of water and anticorrosion/antifreeze. To check the coolant level, the vehicle must be parked on level ground and the engine must be cool. Warning! G
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts.

Use extreme caution when opening the hood if there are any signs of steam or coolant leaking from the cooling system, or if the coolant temperature gauge indicates that the coolant is overheated. Do not remove pressure cap on coolant reservoir if coolant temperature is above 158°F (70°C). Allow engine to cool down before removing cap. The coolant reservoir contains hot fluid and is under pressure. proximately one half turn counterclockwise to release any excess pressure.  Continue turning cap 2 counter- The coolant expansion tank is located on the passenger side of the engine compartment. In order to avoid any possibly serious burns:
 Using a rag, turn cap 2 slowly ap- clockwise and remove it. The coolant level is correct if the level
for cold coolant: reaches the marking 3 inside coolant reservoir
for warm coolant: is approximately 0.6 in (1.5 cm) higher  Add coolant as required.  Replace and tighten cap 2. For more information on coolant, see “Technical data” ( page 499). 1 Coolant expansion tank 2 Cap 3 Cold coolant level mark Using a rag, slowly open the cap approximately 1/2 turn to relieve excess pressure. If opened immediately, scalding hot fluid and steam will be blown out under pressure. 361 Operation Engine compartment Batteries Your vehicle is equipped with two batteries: G Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries. E Wear eye protection.
Starter battery (located in the engine compartment). Risk of explosion. Electrical consumer battery (located in the trunk). C Keep children away.
A D Keep flames or sparks away from battery. Do not smoke. F Follow the instructions in this Operator’s Manual. B Battery acid is caustic. Do not allow it to come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing. These batteries should always be sufficiently charged in order to achieve their rated service life. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for battery maintenance intervals. If you use your vehicle mostly for shortdistance trips, you will need to have the battery charge checked more frequently. When replacing batteries, always use batteries approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles. If you do not intend to operate your vehicle for an extended period of time, consult an authorized Maybach Studio about steps you need to observe. 362 In case it does, immediately flush affected area with clean water and seek medical help if necessary. Batteries contain materials that can harm the environment if disposed of improperly. Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of disposal. Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for recycling. Operation Engine compartment Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system The windshield washer reservoir is located in the engine compartment. Warning! G Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/ antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may ignite and burn. You could be seriously burned.  Refill the reservoir with MB Wind- ! Only use washer fluid which is suitable for plastic lenses. Improper washer fluid can damage the plastic lenses of the headlamps. For more information, see “Windshield and headlamp washer system” ( page 501). shield Washer Concentrate and water (or commercially available pre-mixed windshield washer solvent/ antifreeze, depending on ambient temperatures). 1 Washer fluid reservoir Fluid for the windshield washer system and the headlamp cleaning system is supplied from the windshield washer reservoir. It has a capacity of approximately 7.1 US qt (6.7 l). Always use washer solvent/antifreeze where temperatures may fall below freezing point. Failure to do so could result in damage to the washer system/reservoir. During all seasons, add MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “MB Summerfit” to water. Premix the windshield washer fluid in a suitable container. 363 Operation Tires and wheels See an authorized Maybach Studio for information on tested and recommended rims and tires for summer and winter operation. They can also offer advice concerning tire service and purchase. Warning! G Replace rims or tires with the same designation, manufacturer and type as shown on the original part. See an authorized Maybach Studio for further information. If incorrectly sized rims and tires are mounted:
The wheel brakes or suspension components can be damaged.
The correct operating clearance of the wheels and the tires are no longer guaranteed. 364 Warning! G Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have sustained damage, replace them. When replacing rims, use only Genuine Maybach wheel bolts specified for the particular rim type. Failure to do so can result in the bolts loosening and possibly an accident. Retreaded tires are not tested or recommended by us for use on Maybach vehicles, since previous damage cannot always be recognized on retreads. We can therefore not assure the operating safety of the vehicle when such tires are used. See an authorized Maybach Studio for information on tested and recommended rims and tires for summer and winter operation. Important guidelines
Only use sets of tires and rims of the same type and make.
Tires must be of the correct size for the rim.
Break in new tires for approximately 60 miles (100 km) at moderate speeds.
Regularly check the tires and rims for damage. Dented or bent rims can cause tire inflation pressure loss and damage to the tire beads.
If vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire inflation pressure and correct as required.
Do not allow your tires to wear down too far. Adhesion properties on wet roads are sharply reduced at tread depths under 1/8 in (3 mm).
When replacing individual tires, you should mount new tires on the front wheels first (on vehicles with samesized wheels all around). Operation Tires and wheels Tire inspection Life of tire Every time you check your tire inflation pressure, you should also inspect your tires for the following: The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to: Regularly check the tires for damage. Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle.
excessive treadwear ( page 366)
Driving style
cord or fabric showing through the tire’s rubber
Tire inflation pressure
Distance driven Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have sustained damage, replace them.
Tire care and maintenance Warning! G Regularly check your tire inflation pressure at least once a month. For more information on checking tire inflation pressure, see “Recommended tire inflation pressure” ( page 373). bumps, bulges, cuts, cracks or splits in the tread or side of the tire Replace the tire if you find any of the above conditions. Make sure you also inspect the spare tire periodically for condition and inflation. Spare tires will age and become worn over time even if never used, and thus should be inspected and replaced when necessary. Warning! G Tires and spare tire should be replaced after 6 years, regardless of the remaining tread. 365 Operation Tires and wheels Tread depth Do not allow your tires to wear down too far. Adhesion properties on wet roads are sharply reduced at tread depths under 1/8 in (3 mm). Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by law. These indicators are located in six places on the tread circumference and become visible at a tread depth of approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), at which point the tire is considered worn and should be replaced. As tread depth approaches 1/8 in (3 mm), the adhesion properties on a wet road are sharply reduced. Depending upon the weather and/or road surface (conditions), the tire traction varies widely. Summer tires 1/8 in (3 mm)
Winter tires 1/6 in (4 mm) Warning! G Although the applicable federal motor safety laws consider a tire to be worn when the treadwear indicators (TWI) become visible at approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not allow your tires to wear down to that level. 366 ! Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with oil, grease and gasoline. Cleaning tires ! Never use a round nozzle to powerwash tires. The intense jet of water can result in damage to the tire. Recommended minimum tire tread depth:
Storing tires Always replace a damaged tire. 1 TWI (TreadWear Indicator) The treadwear indicator appears as a solid band across the tread. Operation Tires and wheels Direction of rotation Unidirectional tires offer added advantages, such as better hydroplaning performance. To benefit, however, you must make sure the tires rotate in the direction specified. An arrow on the sidewall indicates the intended direction of rotation (spinning) of the tire. i Spare wheels may be mounted against the direction of rotation (spinning) even with a unidirectional tire for temporary use only until the regular drive wheel has been repaired or replaced. Always observe and follow applicable temporary use restrictions and speed limitations indicated on the spare wheel. Loading the vehicle Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly carry.
The Tire and Loading Information placard (Example A) or the Vehicle Tire Information placard (Example B) can be found on the driver’s door B-pillar. This placard tells you important information about the number of people that can be in the vehicle and the total weight that can be carried in the vehicle. It also contains information on the proper size and recommended tire inflation pressures for the original equipment tires on your vehicle.
The Certification label, also found on the driver’s door B-pillar tells you about the gross weight capacity of your vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo. The Certification label also tells you about the front and rear axle weight capacity, called the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). The GAWR is the total allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). Never exceed the GVWR or GAWR for either the front axle or rear axle. 367 Operation Tires and wheels Tire and Loading Information Warning! 1 Driver’s door B-pillar Following is a discussion on how to work with the information contained on the two placards with regards to loading your vehicle. Placard (Example A) G Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit or vehicle capacity weight as indicated on the placard on the driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires can overheat them, possibly causing a blowout. Overloading the tires can also result in handling or steering problems, or brake failure. Your vehicle is equipped with either the Tire and Loading Information placard (Example A) or the Vehicle Tire Information placard (Example B). i Data shown on placard examples are for illustration purposes only. Load limit data are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in the illustrations below. Refer to placard on vehicle for actual data specific to your vehicle. 368 1 Load limit information on the Tire and Loading Information placard The placard showing the load limit information is located on the driver’s door B-pillar. If your vehicle is equipped with the Tire and Loading Information placard (Example A), locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.” on this placard. The combined weight of all occupants, cargo/ luggage and trailer tongue load (if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced in that statement. Operation Tires and wheels Placard (Example B) Seating capacity The seating capacity gives you important information on the number of occupants that can be in the vehicle. Observe front and rear seating capacity. Your vehicle is equipped with either placard Example A or placard Example B located on the driver’s door B-pillar ( page 368). i 1 Load limit information on the Vehicle Tire Information placard The placard showing the load limit information is located on the driver’s door B-pillar. If your vehicle is equipped with the Vehicle Tire Information placard (Example B), locate the heading “Vehicle Capacity Weight” on this placard. The combined weight of all occupants, cargo/ luggage and trailer tongue (if applicable) should never exceed the weight listed next to vehicle capacity weight. Data shown on placard examples are for illustration purposes only. Seating data are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in the illustrations below. Refer to placard on vehicle for actual data specific to your vehicle. Placard (Example A) 1 Seating capacity Placard (Example B) 1 Seating capacity 369 Operation Tires and wheels Steps for determining correct load limit Step 3 Step 6 (if applicable) The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the “National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.  Subtract the combined weight of the  If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX lbs. load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle ( page 372). Step 1 (Vehicles equipped with placard Example A)  Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard. Step 4  The resulting figure equals the avail- able amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lbs. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 – 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.) Step 1 (Vehicles equipped with placard Example B) Step 5  Locate the heading “Vehicle Capacity  Determine the combined weight of Weight” on your vehicle’s placard. Step 2  Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. 370 luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4. The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use a load limit of 1500 lbs. This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on the vehicle’s placard ( page 368). Operation Tires and wheels Example Combined weight limit of occupants and cargo from placard Number of Seating occupants configura(driver and tion passengers) Occupants weight Combined Available cargo/luggage and trailer weight of all tongue weight (total load limit or occupants vehicle capacity weight from placard minus combined weight of all occupants) 1 5 Occupant 1: 150 lbs 750 lbs 1500 lbs – 750 lbs = 750 lbs 540 lbs 1500 lbs – 540 lbs = 960 lbs 150 lbs 1500 lbs – 150 lbs = 1350 lbs 1500 lbs front: 2 Occupant 2: 180 lbs rear: 3 Occupant 3: 160 lbs Occupant 4: 140 lbs Occupant 5: 120 lbs 2 1500 lbs 3 front: 1 Occupant 1: 200 lbs rear: 2 Occupant 2: 190 lbs Occupant 3: 150 lbs 3 1500 lbs 1 front: 1 Occupant 1: 150 lbs The higher the weight of all occupants, the less cargo and luggage load capacity is available. For more information, see “Trailer tongue load” ( page 372). 371 Operation Tires and wheels Certification label Even after careful determination of the combined weight of all occupants, cargo and the trailer tongue load (if applicable) ( page 372) as to not exceed the permissible load limit, you must make sure your vehicle never exceeds the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the front or rear axle. You can obtain the GVWR and GAWR from the Certification label. The Certification Label can be found on the driver’s door B-pillar, see “Technical data” ( page 488). 372 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): The total weight of the vehicle, all occupants, all cargo, and the trailer tongue load ( page 372) must never exceed the GVWR. Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The total allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). To assure that your vehicle does not exceed the maximum permissible weight limits (GVWR and GAWR for front and rear axle), have the loaded vehicle (including driver, passengers and all cargo and, if applicable, trailer fully loaded) weighed on a suitable commercial scale. Trailer tongue load The tongue load of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the load you can carry in your vehicle. If a trailer is towed, the tongue load must be added to the weight of all occupants riding and any cargo you are carrying in the vehicle. The tongue load typically is 10 percent of the trailer weight and everything loaded in it. Your Maybach has been designed primarily to carry passengers and their cargo. We not recommend trailer towing with your vehicle. Operation Tires and wheels Recommended tire inflation pressure Warning! G Follow recommended tire inflation pressures. Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated. Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc. Your vehicle is equipped with either the Tire and Loading Information placard (Example A) or the Vehicle Tire Information placard (Example B) located on the driver’s door B-pillar ( page 368). The tire inflation pressure should be checked regularly and should only be adjusted on cold tires. The tires can be con- sidered cold if the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). Placard (Example A) Follow recommended cold tire inflation pressures listed on placard. Keeping the tires properly inflated provides the best handling, tread life and riding comfort. In addition to the tire placard on the driver’s door B-pillar, also consult the fuel filler flap for any additional information pertaining to special driving situations. For more information, see “Important notes on tire inflation pressure” ( page 374). i Data shown on placard examples are for illustration purposes only. Tire data are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in the illustrations below. Refer to placard on vehicle for actual data specific to your vehicle. 1 Tire and Loading Information placard with recommended cold tire inflation pressures Placard (Example A) lists the recommended cold tire inflation pressures for maximum loaded vehicle weight. The tire inflation pressures listed apply to the tires installed as original equipment. 373 Operation Tires and wheels Placard (Example B) Important notes on tire inflation pressure Warning! G If the tire inflation pressure repeatedly drops: 1 Vehicle Tire Information placard with recommended cold tire inflation pressures Placard (Example B) lists the recommended cold tire inflation pressures for maximum loaded vehicle weight. The tire inflation pressures listed apply to the tires installed as original equipment. i Placard (Example B) may list recommended cold tire inflation pressures for different vehicle loads. 374
Check the tires for punctures from foreign objects.
Check to see whether air is leaking from the valves or from around the rim. Tire temperature and tire inflation pressure are also increased while driving, depending on the driving speed and the tire load. If you will be driving your vehicle at high speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher, where it is legal and conditions allow, consult the placard on the inside of the fuel filler flap on how to adjust the cold tire inflation pressure. If you do not adjust the tire inflation pressure, excessive heat can build up and result in sudden tire failure. Be sure to readjust the tire inflation pressure for normal driving speeds. You should wait until the tires are cold before adjusting the tire inflation pressure. Some vehicles may have supplemental tire inflation pressure information for vehicle loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition. If such information is provided, it can be found on the placard located on the inside of the fuel filler flap. Tire inflation pressure changes by approximately 1.5 psi (0.1 bar) per 18°F (10°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire inflation pressure where the temperature is different from the outside temperature. Operation Tires and wheels Checking tire inflation pressure Regularly check your tire inflation pressure at least once a month. Check and adjust the tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold. The tires can be considered cold if the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). If you check the tire inflation pressure when the tires are warm (the vehicle has been driven for several miles or sitting less than 3 hours), the reading will be approximately 4 psi (0.3 bar) higher than the cold reading. This is normal. Do not let air out to match the specified cold tire inflation pressure. Otherwise, the tire will be underinflated. Checking tire inflation pressure manually Follow the steps below to achieve correct tire inflation pressure:  Remove the cap from the valve on one tire.  Firmly press a tire gauge onto the valve.  Read tire inflation pressure on tire gauge and check against the recommended tire inflation pressure on the placard on the driver’s door B-pillar ( page 368). If necessary, add air to achieve the recommended tire inflation pressure. i If you have overfilled the tire, release tire inflation pressure by pushing the metal stem of the valve with e.g. a tip of a pen. Then recheck the tire inflation pressure with the tire gauge. You can call up the tire inflation pressure monitoring display using the control system ( page 173). i After you have reactivated the tire inflation pressure monitor, the current tire inflation pressures will only be shown after a few minutes’ driving time. During this time, you will see the following message in the multifunction display:  Repeat this procedure for each tire. TIRE PRES. DISPLAY APPEARS AFTER DRIVING A FEW MINUTES Checking tire inflation pressure electronically i  Install the valve cap. The tire inflation pressure monitor only functions on wheels that are equipped with the proper electronic sensors. It monitors the tire inflation pressure, as selected by the driver, in all four tires. A warning is issued to alert you to a decrease in tire inflation pressure in one or more of the tires. Possible differences between the readings of a tire inflation pressure gauge of an air hose, e.g. gas station equipment, and the vehicle’s control system can occur. The readings issued by the control system are more precise. 375 Operation Tires and wheels  Switch on the ignition ( page 62).  Press button è or ÿ on the mul- tifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the standard display menu appears in the multifunction display ( page 178).  Press button j or k repeatedly until the current tire inflation pressures for each tire appear in the multifunction display. Warning! G When the tire inflation pressure monitoring system warning light is lit, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. You should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper tire inflation pressure as indicated on the vehicle’s tire information placard. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Each tire, including the spare, should be checked monthly when cold and set to the recommended tire inflation pressure as specified in the vehicle placard and owner’s manual. i The recommended tire inflation pressures for your vehicle can be found on the tire placard located on the driver’s door B-pillar ( page 368). The tire inflation pressures are not listed in the owner’s manual. 376 Warning! G The tire inflation pressure monitor does not indicate a warning for wrongly selected tire inflation pressures. Always adjust tire inflation pressure according to the placard on the driver’s door B-pillar or, if available, the inside of the fuel filler flap. The tire inflation pressure monitor is not able to issue a warning due to a sudden dramatic loss of tire inflation pressure (e.g. tire blowout caused by a foreign object). In this case bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully applying the brakes and avoiding abrupt steering maneuvers. i Operating radio transmission equipment (e.g. wireless headsets, twoway radios) in or near the vehicle could cause the tire inflation pressure monitor to malfunction. Operation Tires and wheels Warning! G Follow recommend tire inflation pressures. Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated. Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit or vehicle capacity weight as indicated on the placard on the driver’s door B-pillar ( page 368). Overloading the tires can overheat them, possibly causing a blowout. Reactivating the tire inflation pressure monitor The tire inflation pressure monitor must be reactivated in the following situations:  Press button j or k repeatedly until you see the current tire inflation pressures for each tire appear in the multifunction display or the following message appears in the multifunction display:
if you have changed the tire inflation pressure
if you have replaced the wheels or tires TIRE PRES. DISPLAY APPEARS AFTER DRIVING A FEW MINUTES
if you have installed new wheels or tires i  Using the tire placard on the driver’s door B-pillar or, if available, the inside of the fuel filler flap, make sure the tire inflation pressure of all four tires is correct.  Press button è or ÿ on the mul- tifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the standard display menu appears in the multifunction display ( page 173). If you are transporting a deflated tire in the vehicle, do not activate the tire inflation pressure monitor until
the deflated tire is no longer in the vehicle
you have inflated the tire to the correct tire inflation pressure  Press the reset button J in the instrument cluster ( page 169). The following message will appear in the multifunction display: MONITOR CURRENT TIRE PRESSURES?  377 Operation Tires and wheels   Press the æ button. The following message will appear in the multifunction display: TIRE PRES. MONITOR REACTIVATED The tire inflation pressure monitor will now monitor the tire inflation pressure values of all four tires. The following message will appear in the multifunction display: TIRE PRES. DISPLAY APPEARS AFTER DRIVING A FEW MINUTES This display appears until the individual tire inflation pressure values are matched with the tires. The individual values are then displayed ( page 376). 378 If you wish to cancel activation:  Press the ç button. If one of the following messages appears in the multifunction display:

TIRE PRES. MONITOR REACTIVATE AFTER CORRECTING PRESSURE TIRE PRESSURE PLEASE CORRECT  Check the tire inflation pressures and correct them if necessary.  Reactivate the tire inflation pressure monitor. Speed limitation in the event of tire problems If the tire inflation pressure falls below a certain value or in case of a flat tire, your vehicle speed is automatically limited to 50 mph (80 km/h) and the message: LIMIT 50 MPH TIRE FAILURE (Canada: LIMIT 80 KM/H TIRE FAILURE) appears in the multifunction display. Additional warning messages may also appear in the multifunction display. Read and observe the warning messages in the multifunction display and follow the instructions for each message. See the “Practical hints” section ( page 424) for a listing of warning messages and instructions. Operation Tires and wheels Should the driving situation require and allow it, you can override the automatic speed limitation as set by the tire inflation pressure monitoring system by depressing the accelerator pedal fully and briskly. This will shift the transmission to a lower gear and accelerate the vehicle until the accelerator pedal is released slightly or the top speed for a particular gear is reached. Warning! G Driving with underinflated or damaged tire(s) produces worse than normal and unexpected vehicle operational characteristics. Overriding the speed limitation is potentially dangerous as higher speeds and quick acceleration, as produced by your depressing the accelerator pedal fully and briskly, may intensify adverse vehicle handling characteristics. Warning! G You should pull over immediately. The vehicle no longer has steering stability and may skid. Change the wheel. Warning! G Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire. Potential problems associated with underinflated and overinflated tires Underinflated tires Underinflated tires can:
cause excessive and uneven tire wear
adversely affect fuel economy
lead to tire failure from being overheated
adversely affect handling characteristics Warning! G Follow recommended tire inflation pressures. Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated. 379 Operation Tires and wheels Overinflated tires Tire labeling Besides tire name (sales designation) and manufacturer name, a number of markings can be found on a tire. Overinflated tires can:
adversely affect handling characteristics
cause uneven tire wear
be more prone to damage from road hazards
adversely affect ride comfort
increase stopping distance Warning! G Follow recommended tire inflation pressures. Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc. 380 Following are some explanations for the markings on your vehicle’s tires: 1 Uniform Quality Grading Standards ( page 387) 2 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) ( page 385) 3 Maximum tire load ( page 386) 4 Maximum tire inflation pressure ( page 387) 5 Manufacturer 6 Tire ply material ( page 389) 7 Tire size designation, load and speed rating ( page 381) 8 Load identification ( page 384) 9 Tire name i For illustration purposes only. Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration. For more information, see “Rims and tires” ( page 491). Operation Tires and wheels Tire size designation, load and speed rating General: Aspect ratio Depending on the design standards used, the tire size molded into the sidewall may have no letter or a letter preceding the tire size designation. The aspect ratio 2 ( page 381) is the dimensional relationship between tire section height and section width and is expressed in percentage. The aspect ratio is arrived at by dividing section height by section width. No letter preceding the size designation (as illustrated above): Passenger car tire based on European design standards. Letter “P” preceding the size designation: Passenger car tire based on U.S. design standards. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Tire width Aspect ratio in % Radial tire code Rim diameter Tire load rating Tire speed rating i For illustration purposes only. Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration. Letter “LT” preceding the size designation: Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards. Letter “T” preceding the size designation: Temporary spare tires which are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only. Tire width The tire width 1 ( page 381) indicates the nominal tire width in mm. Tire code The tire code 3 ( page 381) indicates the tire construction type. The “R” stands for radial tire type. Letter “D” means diagonal or bias ply construction; letter “B” means belted-bias ply construction. At the tire manufacturer’s option, any tire with a speed capability above 149 mph (240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the size designation (for example: 245/ 40 ZR 18). For additional information, see “Tire speed rating” ( page 382). Rim diameter The rim diameter 4 ( page 381) is the diameter of the bead seat, not the diameter of the rim edge. Rim diameter is indicated in inches (in). 381 Operation Tires and wheels Tire load rating The tire load rating 5 ( page 381) is a numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can support. For example, a load rating of 91 corresponds to a maximum load of 1356 lbs (615 kg) the tire is designed to support. See also “Maximum tire load” ( page 386) where the maximum load associated with the load index is indicated in kilograms and lbs. Warning! G The tire load rating must always be at least half of the GAWR ( page 390) of your vehicle. Otherwise, tire failure may be the result which may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury to you or others. Always replace rims and tires with the same designation, manufacturer and type as shown on the original part. 382 Warning! G Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit or vehicle capacity weight as indicated on the placard located on the driver’s door B-pillar ( page 368). Overloading the tires can overheat them, possibly causing a blowout. Overloading the tires can also result in handling or steering problems, or brake failure. For additional information on tire load rating, see “Load identification” ( page 384). i Tire load rating 5 ( page 381) and tire speed rating 6 ( page 381) are also referred to as “service description”. Tire speed rating The tire speed rating 6 ( page 381) indicates the approved maximum speed for the tire. Warning! G Even when permitted by law, never operate a vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum speed rating of the tires. Exceeding the maximum speed for which tires are rated can lead to sudden tire failure, causing loss of vehicle control and possibly resulting in an accident and/or personal injury and possible death, for you and for others. i Tire load rating 5 ( page 381) and tire speed rating 6 ( page 381) are also referred to as “service description”. Operation Tires and wheels Summer tires Index Speed rating Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h) R up to 106 mph (170 km/h) S up to 112 mph (180 km/h) T up to 118 mph (190 km/h) H up to 130 mph (210 km/h) V up to 149 mph (240 km/h) W up to 168 mph (270 km/h) Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h) (Y) above 186 mph (300 km/h) ZR above 149 mph (240 km/h)
At the tire manufacturer’s option, any tire with a speed capability above 149 mph (240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the size designation (for example: 245/40 ZR18). To determine the maximum speed capability of the tire, the service description for the tire must be referred to. The service description is comprised of the tire load rating 5 ( page 381) and the tire speed rating 6 ( page 381). If your tire includes “ZR” in the size designation and no service description 5 and 6 ( page 381) is given, the tire manufacturer must be consulted for the maximum speed capability.
Any tire with a speed capability above 186 mph (300 km/h) must include a “ZR” in the size designation AND the service description must be placed in parenthesis. Example: 275/40 ZR 18 (99Y). The “(Y)” speed rating in parenthesis designates the maximum speed capability of the tire as being above 186 mph (300 km/h). Consult the tire manufacturer for the actual maximum permissible speed of the tire. If a service description 5 and 6 ( page 381) is given, the speed capability is limited by the speed symbol in the service description. Example: 245/40 ZR18 97Y. In this example, “97Y” is the service description. The letter “Y” designates the speed rating and the speed capability of the tire is limited to 186 mph (300 km/h). 383 Operation Tires and wheels All-season and winter tires Index Speed rating 1 Q M+S T Load identification up to 100 mph (160 km/h) M+S1 up to 118 mph (190 km/h) No specification given: absence of any text (like in above example) indicates a standard load (SL) tire. H M+S1 up to 130 mph (210 km/h) V M+S1 up to 149 mph (240 km/h) 1 XL (Extra Load): designates an extra load (or reinforced) tire. or M+S.for winter tires Light Load: designates a light load tire. i Not all M+S rated tires provide special winter performance. Make sure the tires you use show M+S and the mountain/snowflake.marking on the tire sidewall. These tires meet specific snow traction performance requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) and have been designed specifically for use in snow conditions. 384 In addition to tire load rating, special load information may be molded into the tire sidewall following the letter designating the tire speed rating 6 ( page 381). 1 Load identification i For illustration purposes only. Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration. C, D, E: designates load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure. Operation Tires and wheels DOT (Department of Transportation) DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) U.S. tire regulations require each new tire manufacturer or tire retreader to mold a TIN into or onto a sidewall of each tire produced. The TIN is a unique identifier which facilitates efforts by tire manufactures to notify purchasers in recall situations or other safety matters concerning tires and gives purchasers the means to easily identify such tires. The TIN is comprised of “Manufacturer’s identification mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type code” and “Date of manufacture”. A tire branding symbol 1 ( page 385) which denotes the tire meets requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation. Manufacturer’s identification mark The manufacturer’s identification mark 2 ( page 385) denotes the tire manufacturer. 1 2 3 4 DOT Manufacturer’s identification mark Tire size Tire type code (at the option of the tire manufacturer) 5 Date of manufacture i For illustration purposes only. Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration. New tires have a mark with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a mark with four symbols. For more information on retreaded tires ( page 364). Tire size The code 3 ( page 385) indicates the tire size. 385 Operation Tires and wheels Tire type code Maximum tire load Warning! The code 4 ( page 385) may, at the option of the manufacturer, be used as a descriptive code for identifying significant characteristics of the tire. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit or vehicle capacity weight as indicated on the placard located on the driver’s door B-pillar ( page 368). Overloading the tires can overheat them, possibly causing a blowout. Overloading the tires can also result in handling or steering problems, or brake failure. Date of manufacture The date of manufacture 5 ( page 385) identifies the week and year of manufacture. The first two figures identify the week, starting with “01” to represent the first full week of the calendar year. The second two figures represent the year. For example, “3305” represents the 33rd week of 2005. 1 Maximum tire load rating i For illustration purposes only. Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration. The maximum tire load is the maximum weight the tires are designed to support. 386 G For more information on tire load rating ( page 382). For information on calculating total and cargo load capacities ( page 370). Operation Tires and wheels Maximum tire inflation pressure Warning! G Never exceed the max. tire inflation pressure. Follow recommended tire inflation pressures. Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated. 1 Maximum permissible tire inflation pressure i For illustration purposes only. Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration. This is the maximum permissible tire inflation pressure for the tire. Always follow the recommended tire inflation pressure ( page 373) for proper tire inflation. Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards (U.S. vehicles) Tire manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three performance factors: treadwear, traction and temperature resistance. Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc. 1 Treadwear 2 Traction 3 Temperature resistance i For illustration purposes only. Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration. 387 Operation Tires and wheels Quality grades can be found, where applicable, on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear Traction Temperature 200 A AA All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these grades. 388 Treadwear Traction The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Warning! G The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. Operation Tires and wheels Temperature The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. Warning! G Tire ply material The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause excessive heat build-up and possible tire failure. 1 Plies in sidewall 2 Plies under tread i For illustration purposes only. Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration. This marking tells you about the type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread. 389 Operation Tires and wheels Tire and loading terminology Accessory weight The combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that these items are available as factory-installed equipment (whether installed or not). Air pressure The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi), or kilopascal (kPa) or bars. Aspect ratio Dimensional relationship between tire section height and section width expressed in percentage. 390 Bar DOT (Department of Transportation) Another metric unit for air pressure. There are 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) to 1 bar; there are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to 1 bar. A tire branding symbol which denotes the tire meets requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation. Bead The GAWR is the maximum permissible axle weight. The gross vehicle weight on each axle must never exceed the GAWR for the front and rear axle indicated on the Certification label located on the driver’s door B-pillar. GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim. Cold tire inflation pressure Tire inflation pressure when your vehicle has been sitting for at least 3 hours or driven no more than 1 mi (1.6 km). Curb weight The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so equipped, air conditioning and additional optional equipment, but without passengers and cargo. GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) The GVW comprises the weight of the vehicle including fuel, tools, spare wheel, installed accessories, passengers and cargo and, if applicable, trailer tongue load. The GVW must never exceed the GVWR indicated on the Certification label located on the driver’s door B-pillar. Operation Tires and wheels GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) Maximum tire inflation pressure PSI (Pounds per square inch) This is the maximum permissible vehicle weight of the fully loaded vehicle (weight of the vehicle including all options, passengers, fuel, and cargo and, if applicable, trailer tongue load). It is indicated on Certification label located on the driver’s door B-pillar. This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should ever be put in the tire under normal driving conditions. A standard unit of measure for air pressure -> bar, kilopascal (kPa). Kilopascal (kPa) The metric unit for air pressure. There are 6.9 kilopascals (kPa) to 1 psi; another metric unit for air pressure is bars. There are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to 1 bar. Maximum load rating The maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire. Maximum loaded vehicle weight The sum of curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity weight and production options weight. Recommended tire inflation pressure Normal occupant weight The number of occupants the vehicle is designed to seat, multiplied by 68 kilograms (150 lbs). Recommended tire inflation pressure listed on placard located on driver’s door B-pillar for normal driving conditions. Provides best handling, tread life and riding comfort. Occupant distribution The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at their designated seating positions. Production options weight The combined weight of those installed regular production options weighing over 5 lbs (2.3 kilograms) in excess of those standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim. Rim A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated. Sidewall The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead. 391 Operation Tires and wheels TIN (Tire Identification Number) Tire speed rating Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards Unique identifier which facilitates efforts by tire manufacturers to notify purchasers in recall situations or other safety matters concerning tires and gives purchases the means to easily identify such tires. The TIN is comprised of “Manufacturer’s identification mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type code” and “Date of manufacture”. Part of tire designation; indicates the speed range for which a tire is approved. Force exerted by the vehicle on the road via the tires. The amount of grip provided. A tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature and treadwear. Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using government testing procedures. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire. Tread Vehicle capacity weight Tire load rating The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road. Rated cargo and luggage load plus 68 kilograms (150 lbs) times the vehicle’s designated seating capacity. Numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can support. Tire ply composition and material used This indicates the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the tire and sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others. 392 Traction Treadwear indicators Narrow bands, sometimes called “wear bars” that show across the tread of a tire when only 1/16 in (1.6 mm) of tread remains. Vehicle maximum load on the tire Load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing it by two. Operation Tires and wheels Rotating tires Warning! G Rotate front and rear wheels only if the tires are of the same dimension. If your vehicle is equipped with mixed-size tires (different tire dimensions front vs. rear), tire rotation is not possible. Tire rotation can be performed on vehicles with tires of the same dimension all around. If your vehicle is equipped with tires of the same dimension all around, tires can be rotated, observing a frontto-rear rotation pattern that will maintain the intended rotation (spinning) direction of the tire ( page 367). In some cases, such as when your vehicle is equipped with mixed-size tires (different tire dimension front vs. rear), tire rotation is not possible. If applicable to your vehicle’s tire configuration, tires can be rotated according to the tire manufacturer’s recommended intervals in the tire manufacturer’s warranty pamphlet located in your vehicle literature portfolio. If none is available, tires should be rotated every 3000 to 6000 miles (5000 to 10000 km), or sooner if necessary, according to the degree of tire wear. The same rotation (spinning) direction must be maintained ( page 367). Rotate tires before the characteristic tire wear pattern becomes visible (shoulder wear on front tires and tread center wear on rear tires). Thoroughly clean the mounting face of wheels and brake disks, i.e. the inner side of the wheels/tires, during each rotation. Check for and ensure proper tire inflation pressure, activating the tire inflation pressure monitor if necessary. Warning! G Have the tightening torque checked after changing a wheel. Wheels could become loose if not tightened with a torque of 110 lb-ft (150 Nm). Only use Genuine Maybach wheel bolts specified for your vehicle’s rims. ! Your vehicle is equipped with a tire inflation pressure monitor. Electronic components are built into the wheel. Do not use mounting tools in the area of the valve as they could damage the electronic components. To prevent damage or incorrect installation, have the tires changed at an authorized Maybach Studio. For information on wheel change, see the “Practical hints” section ( page 451) and ( page 466). 393 Operation Winter driving Before the onset of winter, have your vehicle winterized at an authorized Maybach Studio. This service includes:
Check of anticorrosion and antifreeze concentration.
Addition of cleaning concentrate to the water of the windshield and headlamp cleaning system. Add MB Concentrate “S” to a pre-mixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze which is formulated for temperatures below freezing point ( page 500).

Tire speed rating for winter tires If you install winter tires, have an authorized Maybach Studio limit the speed of your vehicle to the speed rating of the winter tires installed. When the speed limitation is activated, the segments up to the set speed limitation are illuminated, for example, 130 mph (210 km/h) as in the illustration below. Warning! G Even when permitted by law, never operate a vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum speed rating of the tires. Battery test. Battery capacity drops with decreasing ambient temperature. A well-charged battery helps to make sure the engine can be started even at low ambient temperatures. Exceeding the maximum speed for which tires are rated can lead to sudden tire failure, causing loss of vehicle control and possibly resulting in an accident and/or personal injury and possible death, for you and for others. Tire change. Vehicle speed limitation for winter tires in speedometer 394 Always observe the speed rating of the winter tires installed on your vehicle. If the maximum speed for which your tires are rated is below the speed rating of your vehicle, you must place a notice to this effect where it will be seen by the driver. Such notices are available from your tire dealer or from any authorized Maybach Studio. Operation Winter driving Winter tires Always use winter tires at temperatures below 45°F (7°C) and whenever wintry road conditions prevail. Not all M+S rated tires provide special winter performance. Make sure the tires you use show the mountain/snowflake.marking on the tire sidewall. These tires meet specific snow traction performance requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) and have been designed specifically for use in snow conditions. Use of winter tires is the only way to achieve the maximum effectiveness of the ABS and the ESP® in winter operation. For safe handling, make sure all mounted winter tires are of the same make and have the same tread design. Warning! G Winter tires with a tread depth under 0.16 in (4 mm) must be replaced. They are no longer suitable for winter operation. Warning! i G If you use your spare tire when winter tires are fitted on the other wheels, be aware that the difference in tire characteristics may very well impair turning stability and that overall driving stability may be reduced. Adapt your driving style accordingly. Have the spare tire replaced with a winter tire at the nearest authorized Maybach Studio. Snow chains When using snow chains, the vehicle should only be driven at vehicle height Raised ( page 264). Snow chains should only be driven on snow-covered roads at speeds not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains as soon as possible when driving on roads without snow. When driving with snow chains, you may wish to deactivate the ESP® ( page 110) before setting the vehicle in motion. This will improve the vehicle‘s traction. Please observe the following guidelines when using snow chains:
Using snow chains is not permissible with all wheel/tire combinations.
Chains should only be used on the rear wheels. Follow the manufacturer’s mounting instructions.
Use only snow chains that are approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles. your authorized Maybach Studio will be glad to advise you on this subject.
Use of snow chains may be prohibited depending on location. Always check local and state laws before installing snow chains. 395 Operation Maintenance We strongly recommend that you have your vehicle serviced by an authorized Maybach Studio, in accordance with the Maintenance Booklet at the times called for by the maintenance service indicator display. Failure to have the vehicle maintained in accordance with the Maintenance Booklet and maintenance service indicator at the designated times /mileage will result in vehicle damage not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. Maintenance service indicator message The maintenance service indicator message will notify you when your next maintenance service is due. Starting approximately 1 month before your next maintenance service is due, one of the following messages will appear in the multifunction display while you are driving or when you switch on the ignition (example service A): 'A' SERVICE IN XXXXX MI (Canada: IN XXXXX KM) 'A' SERVICE IN XXX DAYS 'A' SERVICE IN X DAY 'A' SERVICE DUE NOW 396 The type of maintenance service due is indicated in the multifunction display: 9 Basic service (A) ´ Extended service (B) i Vehicles equipped with FSS (Flexible Service System) only (Canada vehicles): The interval between services depends on your driving habits. A gentle driving style, moderate engine speeds and the avoidance of short-distance trips will lengthen the interval between services. Operation Maintenance Clearing the maintenance service indicator message The maintenance service indicator message is automatically cleared after approximately 30 seconds when you switch on the ignition or when reaching the maintenance service threshold while driving. You can also clear it yourself. Maintenance service term exceeded If you have exceeded the suggested maintenance service term, you will see the following message in the multifunction display example service A): 'A' SERVICE EXCEEDED BY XXXX MI (Canada: XXXXX KM) 'A' SERVICE EXCEEDED BY XXX DAYS 'A' SERVICE EXCEEDED BY X DAY Calling up the maintenance service indicator display You can call up the maintenance service indicator display at any time to check when the next maintenance service is due.  Switch on the ignition ( page 62).  Press button è or ÿ on the mul- tifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the standard display appears in the multifunction display ( page 173).  Press button k or j until the maintenance service indicator display with the service symbol 9 or ´ and the service deadline appear in the multifunction display. In addition, a signal sounds when the message appears. 1 Reset button J  Press reset button J 1 on the instru- ment cluster. Any authorized Maybach Studio will reset the maintenance service indicator following a completed maintenance service. The maintenance service indicator message is cleared and the standard display appears in the multifunction display ( page 173). 397 Operation Maintenance i If the battery is disconnected, the days of disconnection will not be included in the count shown by the maintenance service indicator. To arrive at the true maintenance service deadline, you will need to subtract these days from the days shown in the maintenance service indicator display. Do not confuse the maintenance service indicator with the engine oil level indicator :. 398 Resetting the maintenance service indicator In the event that the maintenance service on your vehicle is not carried out by an authorized Maybach Studio, you can have the maintenance service indicator reset. The automotive maintenance facility carrying out the maintenance service will find the information for resetting the maintenance service indicator in the maintenance-relevant information for your vehicle. Such information is available from either your authorized Maybach Studio or directly from Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. i If the maintenance service indicator was inadvertently reset, have an authorized Maybach Studio correct it. Only reset if the proper maintenance service has been performed. Resetting the system without performing the proper service as called for by the maintenance service indicator will result in engine damage and/or other vehicle damage not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. Operation Vehicle care  Vehicle care Cleaning and care of vehicle Warning! G Many cleaning products can be hazardous. Some are poisonous, others are flammable. Always follow the instructions on the particular container. Always open your vehicle’s doors or windows when cleaning the inside. Never use fluids or solvents that are not designed for cleaning your vehicle. Such damage is caused not only by extreme and varying climatic conditions, but also by:
near the ocean
in industrial areas (smoke, exhaust emissions) Tar
during winter operation Gravel and stone chipping You should check your vehicle from time to time for stone chipping or other damage. Any damage should be repaired as soon as possible to prevent corrosion.
Air pollution
Road salt

To avoid paint damage, you should immediately remove:
Grease and oil
Fuel
Coolant i
Brake fluid Your authorized Maybach Studio offers a high-end care product case* to ensure that your Maybach receives optimal care at all times and at any location.
Bird droppings
Insects
Tree resins, etc. Always lock away cleaning products and keep them out of reach of children. While in operation, even while parked, your vehicle is subjected to varying external influences which, if gone unchecked, can attack the paintwork as well as the vehicle underbody and cause lasting damage. More frequent washings are necessary to deal with unfavorable conditions: Frequent washing reduces and/or eliminates the aggressiveness and potency of the above adverse influences. In doing so, do not neglect the underbody of the vehicle. A prerequisite for a thorough check is a washing of the underbody followed by a thorough inspection. Damaged areas need to be re-undercoated. Your vehicle has been treated at the factory with a wax-base rustproofing in the body cavities which will last for the lifetime of the vehicle. Post-production treatment is neither necessary nor recommended by us for use on Maybach vehicles because of the possibility of incompatibility between materials used in the production process and others applied later. 399 Operation Vehicle care We have selected car-care products and compiled recommendations which are specially matched to our vehicles and which always reflect the latest technology. You can obtain car-care products approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles at an authorized Maybach Studio. Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or damage due to negligent or incorrect care cannot always be removed or repaired with the car-care products recommended here. In such cases it is best to seek aid at an authorized Maybach Studio. The following topics deal with the cleaning and care of your vehicle and give important “how-to” information as well as references to car-care products approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles. Refrigerator** Clean out the refrigerator regularly with a vinegar-and-water solution. Mix the solution in a ratio of 1 part vinegar to 10 parts water. Allow the refrigerator to dry before using it again. 400 Power washer ! Follow the instructions provided by the power washer manufacturer on maintaining a distance between the vehicle and the nozzle of the power washer. Never use a round nozzle to powerwash tires. The intense jet of water can result in damage to the tire. Always replace a damaged tire. Always keep the jet of water moving across the surface. Do not aim directly at electrical parts, electrical connectors, seals, or other rubber parts. i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**: If an outside door handle is hit by a strong jet of water, and a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** is in close proximity, i.e. within approximately 3 ft (approximately 1 m), the vehicle could be inadvertently locked or unlocked. Tar stains Quickly remove tar stains before they dry and become more difficult to remove. A tar remover is recommended. Paintwork, painted body components ! Affixing stickers, adhesive tape or similar materials to painted body components may damage the paintwork. Paint Care approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles should be applied when water drops on the paint surface do not “bead up”. This should normally be done every 3 to 5 months, depending on climate and washing detergent used. Paint Cleaner approved for use on Maybach vehicles should be applied if the paint surface shows signs of embedded dirt (i.e. loss of gloss). Operation Vehicle care Do not apply any of these products or wax if your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the hood is still hot.  Use the appropriate Touch-Up Stick approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles for quick and provisional repairs of minor paint damage (i.e. chips from stones, vehicle doors, etc.). Engine cleaning Prior to cleaning the engine compartment make sure to protect electrical components and connectors from contact with water and cleaning agents. Corrosion protection, such as Anticorrosion Wax approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles, should be applied to the engine compartment after every engine cleaning. Before applying, all control linkage bushings and joints should be lubricated. The poly-V-belt and all pulleys should be protected from any wax. Vehicle washing In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces of road salt as soon as possible. When washing the vehicle underbody, do not forget to clean the inner sides of the wheels. i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**: If an outside door handle is hit by a strong jet of water, and a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** is in close proximity, i.e. within approximately 3 ft (approximately 1 m), the vehicle could be inadvertently locked or unlocked. Hand-wash Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle in direct sunlight.  Only use a mild car wash detergent, such as Car Shampoo approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles.  Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a diffused jet of water. Direct only a very weak spray towards the ventilation intake.  Use plenty of water and rinse the sponge and chamois frequently.  Rinse with clean water and thorough- ly dry with a chamois. Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on the finish. Automatic car wash You can have your car washed in an automatic car wash from the start. Automatic car washes without brushes are preferable. If the vehicle is very dirty, prewash it before running it through the automatic car wash. ! Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in exterior rear view mirrors prior to running the vehicle through an automatic car wash to prevent damage to the mirrors. Make sure the windshield wiper switch is set to 0 ( page 80). Otherwise, the rain sensor could activate and cause the wipers to move unintentionally. This may lead to vehicle damage. 401 Operation Vehicle care i ! Headlamps, tail lamps, turn signal lenses After running the vehicle through an automatic car wash, wipe any wax off of the windshield ( page 404). This will prevent smears and reduce wiping noise which can be caused by residual wax on the windshield. Do not use chrome cleaner on ornamental moldings. Although ornamental moldings may have chrome appearance, they could be made of anodized aluminum that will be damaged when cleaned with chrome cleaner. Instead, use a damp cloth to clean those ornamental moldings.  Use a mild car wash detergent, such When leaving the car wash, make sure the mirrors are folded out. Otherwise they may vibrate. Ornamental moldings For regular cleaning and care of ornamental moldings, use a damp cloth. For very dirty ornamental moldings of which you are sure are chromeplated, use a chrome cleaner. If in doubt whether an ornamental molding is chrome-plated, contact an authorized Maybach Studio. as Car Shampoo approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles, with plenty of water. ! Only use window cleaning solutions that are suitable for plastic lamp lenses. Window cleaning solutions which are not suitable may damage the plastic lamp lenses of the headlamps. Therefore, do not use abrasives, solvents or cleaners that contain solvents. Never apply strong force and only use a soft, non-scratching cloth when cleaning the lenses. Do not attempt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry cloth or sponge. Otherwise you may scratch or damage the lens surface. 402 Operation Vehicle care Cleaning the Distronic** system sensor cover ! To prevent scratches or damage, never apply strong force and only use a soft, non-scratching cloth when cleaning the sensor cover 1. Do not attempt to wipe dirty sensors with a dry cloth or sponge.  Restart the engine after cleaning sen- sor cover 1. Cleaning the Parktronic system sensors 1 Distronic system sensor cover  Switch off the ignition ( page 62).  Use a mild car wash detergent, such as Car Shampoo approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles, with plenty of water and a soft, non-scratching cloth to clean sensors 1 on the bumpers. ! Do not apply strong pressure to the sensor covers. Applying strong pressure may damage the sensor covers. Follow the instructions provided by the power washer manufacturer on maintaining a distance between the vehicle and the nozzle of the power washer.  Use a mild car wash detergent, such as Car Shampoo approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles, with plenty of water and a non-scratching cloth to clean sensor cover 1. ! To prevent scratches, never apply strong force and only use a soft, nonscratching cloth when cleaning the sensors. Do not attempt to wipe dirty sensors with a dry cloth or sponge. 1 Parktronic system sensors in front bumper 403 Operation Vehicle care Cleaning of the Parking Assist System (PAS) camera lens The camera is in the license plate recess next to the handle for the luggage compartment lid. ! Do not clean the camera and the area around the camera:
with a high-pressure cleaner
with a dry cloth and high pressure
with aggressive cleaning agents You could otherwise damage the camera. Cleaning the windows and the wiper blades ! 1 Camera lens  Only clean the camera lens 1 with clean water and a soft cloth.  Be careful not to apply wax to the camera lens 1 when waxing the vehicle. If necessary, remove the wax using a mixture of commercially available car shampoo and water. The windshield wipers must be in a vertical position before folding them away from the windshield. They could otherwise damage the hood. Never open the hood when the wiper arms are folded forward.  Switch on the ignition ( page 62).  Turn combination switch to wiper setting II ( page 80).  With wiper arms in vertical position, switch off the ignition ( page 62). 404 Warning! G For safety reasons, switch off wipers and remove SmartKey from starter switch (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**: Make sure the vehicle’s on board electronics have status 0) before cleaning the windshield and/or the wiper blades. Otherwise, the wiper motor could suddenly turn on and cause injury.  Fold the wiper arms forward until they snap into place.  Clean the wiper blade inserts with a clean cloth and detergent solution.  Use a soft, clean cloth and a mild win- dow cleaning solution on all outside and inside glass surfaces. An automotive glass cleaner is recommended. Operation Vehicle care ! ! Plastic and rubber parts Fold the windshield wiper arms back onto the windshield before turning the SmartKey in the starter switch or pressing the KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**). Only use acid-free cleaning materials. Acid may cause corrosion or damage the clear coat. Pour Interior Care approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles onto a soft lint-free cloth and apply with light pressure. Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm back. If released, the force of the impact from the tensioning spring could crack the windshield. ! To clean the window interior, do not use a dry cloth, abrasives, solvents or cleaners containing solvents. Do not touch the inside of the front, rear or side windows with hard objects such as an ice scraper or ring. Doing so may damage the windows. Light alloy wheels If possible, clean wheels once a week. ! The vehicle should not be parked for an extended period of time immediately after it has been cleaned, especially not after the wheel rims have been cleaned with wheel rim cleaner. Wheel rim cleaners can lead to increased corrosion of the brake disks and brake pads. Therefore, the vehicle’s brake system should always be warmed-up before it is parked after cleaning. To do so, please drive your vehicle for several minutes to allow the brakes to dry. ! Do not use oil or wax on these parts. Instrument cluster and front cup holders  Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a washing solution.  Wipe with a cloth moistened in a lukewarm solution. ! To prevent scratches, do not use scouring agents. When applying Tire Care and Wheel Care products approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles, take care not to spray them on the brake disks.  Use Wheel Care approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles, a soft bristle brush and a strong spray of water for cleaning the light alloy wheels. 405 Operation Vehicle care Hard plastic trim items Rear cup holder/bottle holder  Use Interior Care approved by us for For cleaning purposes, you can push back the cover plate of the cup holder. use on Maybach vehicles, a soft, lintfree cloth and apply with light pressure.  Push the cover plate 4 back. To prevent scratches, do not use scouring agents.  Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a washing solution. Steering wheel and gear selector lever  Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thor- Carpets  Use Carpet and Fabric Care approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles for cleaning the carpets. The cup holder opens.  Push one of the release catches 3 upward and, at the same time, press release catch 1 for the cup/bottle holder. ! oughly or clean with Leather Care approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles.  Press button 2.  Wipe with a cloth moistened in a lukewarm solution. Example illustration from Maybach 57 1 2 3 4 Release catch for cup/bottle holder Release catch for cup holder Release catch for cover plate Cover plate ! To prevent scratches, do not use scouring agents.  After cleaning, close the cup/bottle holder. The next time the holder is opened, the cover plate slides out with it. 406 Operation Vehicle care  Carefully dab nubuck leather uphol- Headliner and shelf below rear window Upholstery  Use a soft bristle brush or a dry-sham- Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing clothing that have the tendency to give off coloring (e.g. when wet, etc.) may cause the upholstery to become permanently discolored. By lining the seats with a proper intermediate cover, contact-discoloration will be prevented. stery with a dry microfiber cloth to remove oil stains. Leather upholstery Avoid hard scrubbing on nubuck leather. poo cleaner in case of excessive dirt. Roof lining  Use a soft bristle brush or a dry-sham- poo cleaner in case of excessive dirt. Seat belts  Only use clear, lukewarm water and soap. ! The webbing must not be treated with chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the webbing at temperatures above 176°F (80°C) or in direct sunlight.  Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly or clean with Leather Care approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles. Exercise particular care when cleaning perforated leather as its underside should not become wet. ! Do not use Leather Care approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles on nubuck leather or any solvents to clean nubuck leather. If in doubt about cleaning any nubuck stain, please consult your Maybach Studio for assistance. Wood trims  Dampen cloth using water and use Nubuck leather damp cloth to clean wood trims in your vehicle. G The nubuck leather upholstery is treated with a protective coating. ! Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them. In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection.  Wipe nubuck leather upholstery with Warning! damp microfiber cloth to remove dust and other light stains. Do not use solvents like tar remover or wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as these may be abrasive. 407 Operation Vehicle care  Press and pull both switches until you Electrotransparent roof* You can lower the inside panel of the electrotransparent roof. Warning! G Make sure no passengers are sitting in the rear passenger compartment when the inside panel of the electrotransparent roof is being lowered. The passengers could otherwise be injured by the panel. see the message ROOF INSIDE PANEL UNLOCKED or PRIVALITE ROOF UNLOCKED appear in the multifunction display. ! Do not clean the screen! Allow the cleaned surfaces to dry before closing the electrotransparent roof. The inside panel is unlocked.  Push the switch for the electrotrans- parent roof on the overhead control panel forward (to open the screen). Closing the inside panel  After cleaning, pull the switch for the The inside panel of the electrotransparent roof is lowered and the screen is opened. electrotransparent roof on the overhead control panel backward (to close the screen) until the screen is completely closed. Lowering the inside panel ! Push the inside panel upward until it engages.  Switch on the ignition ( page 62). Make sure the rear passenger compartment is empty and that the inside panel does not come into contact with any objects left in the rear compartment.  Make sure the vehicle is stationary and that the gear selector lever is in position P.  Pull the switch for the electrotrans- parent roof on the overhead control panel backward (to close the screen) ( page 245). At the same time, push the switch for the rear interior lighting ( page 162). 408 Do not lean against the lowered inside panel.  You can clean the glass panels with a commercially available glass cleaner and a moist cloth.  The message disappears from the multifunction display.  Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0. Warning! G No passengers may ride in the rear passenger compartment if the inside panel has not been or cannot be locked. Have the inside panel repaired immediately by an authorized Maybach Studio. Practical hints What to do if … Where will I find ...? Unlocking/locking in an emergency Opening/closing in an emergency Replacing SmartKey batteries Replacing bulbs Replacing wiper blades Flat tire Batteries Jump starting Towing the vehicle Fuses 409 Practical hints What to do if … Lamps in instrument cluster General information: If any of the following lamps in the instrument cluster fails to come on during Problem v v Possible cause/consequence ABS/ESP® ESP® The yellow The is deactivated. warning lamp comes on Risk of accident! while driving. Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road, weather and traffic conditions. The yellow ABS/ESP® warning lamp flashes while driving. the lamp self-check when switching on ignition, have it checked and replaced if necessary. Suggested solution  Turn the ESP® back on ( page 111). If the ESP® cannot be turned back on, have the system checked at an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. The ESP®, ABS or traction control has come  When driving off, apply as little throtinto operation because of detected tractle as possible. tion loss in at least one tire.  While driving, ease up on the accelerator. Distronic** is deactivated.  Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather conditions.  Do not deactivate the ESP® - exceptions ( page 110). Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident. The yellow fuel tank re- The fuel level has dropped below the reserve warning lamp serve mark. comes on while driving. 410  Refuel at the next gas station ( page 353). Practical hints What to do if … Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solution l Only vehicles with You are too close to the vehicle in front of  Apply the brakes immediately to inDistronic**: The red dis- you to maintain selected speed. crease the following distance. tance warning lamp comes on while driving. l Only vehicles with
You are gaining too rapidly on the vehi-  Apply the brakes immediately. Distronic**: The red discle ahead of you.  Carefully observe the traffic situation. tance warning lamp
The distance warning system has recogYou may need to brake or maneuver comes on while driving nized a stationary obstacle on your to avoid hitting an obstacle. and you hear a warning probable line of travel. sound. - The yellow Antilock Brake System (ABS) indicator lamp comes on while driving. The ABS has detected a malfunction and  Continue driving with added caution. has switched off. The BAS and the ESP® are Wheels may lock during hard braking, also switched off (see messages in display). reducing steering capability. The brake system is still functioning normally but without the ABS available.  Have the system checked at an autho- rized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. If the ABS control unit is malfunctioning, Failure to follow these instructions inother systems such as Parktronic, Distronic**, the navigation system and the creases the risk of an accident. automatic transmission can also malfunction. The charging voltage has fallen below 10 volts and the ABS has switched off.  When the voltage is above this value again, the ABS is operational again.  If necessary, have the generator and battery checked. 411 Practical hints What to do if … Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solution < The red seat belt telltale The driver has not fastened his or her seat  Fasten your seat belt. illuminates for a brief belt. The telltale goes out. period after starting the engine. H The yellow warning lamp for the tire inflation pressure monitor comes on. The tire inflation pressure monitor detects  Bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding a rapid or significant loss of pressure in at abrupt steering and braking maneuleast one tire. vers. Observe the traffic situation around you.  Read and observe messages in the multifunction display. Warning! G When the tire inflation pressure monitoring system warning light is lit, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. You should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehicle’s tire information placard. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. 412 Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Each tire, including the spare, should be checked monthly when cold and set to the recommended inflation pressure as specified in the vehicle placard and owner’s manual. i The recommended tire inflation pressure for your vehicle can be found on the driver’s door B-pillar or, if available, the inside of the fuel filler flap, not in the owner’s manual. Practical hints What to do if … Problem 1 Warning! Possible cause/consequence The red Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) indicator lamp comes on while driving. Suggested solution There is a malfunction in the restraint sys-  Drive with added caution to the neartems. The airbags or emergency tensioning est authorized Maybach Studio. devices (ETDs) could deploy unexpectedly or fail to activate in an accident. G In the event that a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not be operational. For your safety, we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized Maybach Studio immediately to have the system checked; otherwise the SRS may not be activated when needed in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could result in an accident and/or injury to you or to others. 413 Practical hints What to do if … Problem ; (USA only) 3 Possible cause/consequence The red brake warning lamp comes on while driving and you hear a warning sound. Suggested solution You are driving with the parking brake set.  Release the parking brake ( page 77). (Canada only) The red brake warning
There is a malfunction in the electro-hy-  Read and observe the message in the lamp comes on when draulic brake system. multifunction display ( page 429). (USA only) the engine is running
There is insufficient brake fluid in the  Risk of accident! Carefully stop the veand you hear a warning 3 reservoir. hicle in a safe location and notify an (Canada only) sound. authorized Maybach Studio. Do not add brake fluid! This will not solve the problem. ; Warning! G Driving with the brake warning lamp illuminated can result in an accident. Have your brake system checked immediately if the brake warning lamp stays on. Do not add brake fluid before checking the brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You can be seriously burned. 414 ! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below, have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks. Practical hints What to do if … Problem Possible cause/consequence ? The yellow engine mal- There is a malfunction in: function indicator
The fuel management system lamp comes on while
The ignition system driving. ±
The emission control system (Canada only)
Systems which affect emissions (USA only) Such malfunctions may result in excessive emissions values and may switch the engine to its emergency operation mode. Your fuel tank is empty. Suggested solution  Have the vehicle checked as soon as possi- ble by an authorized Maybach Studio. An on-board diagnostic connector is used by the service station to link the vehicle to the shop diagnostics system. It allows the accurate identification of system malfunctions through the readout of diagnostic trouble codes. It is located in the front left area of the footwell next to the parking brake pedal.  After refuelling, start, turn off, and re- start the engine three or four times in succession. The limp-home mode is canceled. You do not need to have your vehicle checked. i Some states may by law require you to visit a workshop immediately as soon as the engine malfunction indicator lamp comes on. Check local requirements. 415 Practical hints What to do if … Lamp in center console Lamp Problem Possible cause/consequence PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF The front passenger front airbag off indicator lamp comes on and remains illuminated. A BabySmartTM child seat is installed on the front passenger seat. Therefore the passenger front airbag is switched off. Suggested solution The front passenger front airbag The system is malfunctioning. off indicator lamp comes on and remains illuminated if there is no BabySmartTM child seat installed on the front passenger seat.  Have the system checked as soon as The front passenger front airbag The system is malfunctioning. off indicator lamp does not come on or does not remain illuminated with a BabySmartTM child seat properly installed on the front passenger seat.  Make sure there is nothing between possible by an authorized Maybach Studio. the seat cushion and the child seat.  Check installation of the child seat. If the light remains out:  Have the system checked as soon as possible by an authorized Maybach Studio. Do not use the BabySmartTM restraint to transport children on the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired. 416 Practical hints What to do if … Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display Warning and malfunction messages appear in the multifunction display located in the instrument cluster. Certain warning and malfunction messages are accompanied by an audible signal. Address these messages accordingly and follow the additional instructions given in this Operator’s Manual. Selecting the vehicle status message memory menu in the control system ( page 186) displays both cleared and uncleared messages. If the message memory menu is not displayed, there are no messages. High-priority messages appear in the multifunction display with in red color. Certain messages of high priority cannot be cleared from the multifunction display using reset button J ( page 169) or button j, k, ÿ, or è on the multifunction steering wheel ( page 174). Other messages of high priority and messages of less immediate priority can be cleared from the multifunction display using reset button J ( page 169) or button j, k, ÿ, or è on the multifunction steering wheel ( page 174). They are then stored in the vehicle status message memory ( page 186). Remember that clearing a message will only make the message disappear. Clearing a message will not correct the condition that caused the message to appear. Warning! G Warning! G No messages will be displayed if either the instrument cluster or the multifunction display is inoperative. As a result, you will not be able to see information about your driving conditions, such as speed or outside temperature, warning/ indicator lamps, malfunction/ warning messages or the failure of any systems. Driving characteristics may be impaired. If you must continue to drive, please do so with added caution. Bring the vehicle to your authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. All categories of messages contain important information which should be taken note of and, where a malfunction is indicated, addressed as soon as possible at an authorized Maybach Studio. Failure to repair condition noted may cause damage not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty, or result in property damage or personal injury. 417 Practical hints What to do if … i Switching on the ignition causes all instrument cluster lamps (except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated) as well as the multifunction display to come on. Make sure the lamps and multifunction display are in working order before starting your journey. On the pages that follow, you will find a compilation of the most important warning and malfunction messages that may appear in the malfunction display. High priority messages appear in red color. For your convenience the messages are divided into two sections:
Text messages ( page 419)
Symbol messages ( page 426) 418 Practical hints What to do if … Text messages Display ABS MALFUNCTION VISIT WORKSHOP Possible cause/consequence Possible solution The ABS has detected a malfunction and has switched off. The ESP® and the BAS are also deactivated.  Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock during hard braking, reducing steering capability. The electro-hydraulic brake system is  Have the system checked at an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. still functioning normally but without the ABS available. Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident. DISPLAY DEFECTIVE VISIT WORKSHOP The ABS or the ABS display is malfunctioning.  Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock during hard braking, reducing steering capability.  Have the system checked at an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident. AIR CLEANER CHANGE CARTRIDGE The air filter is clogged. CONVEN. FUNCTIONS BATTERY PROTECTION: TEMPORARILY SHUT OFF  Have the air filter checked by an autho- rized Maybach Studio. VISIT WORKSHOP The battery for electrical consumers has insufficient voltage and can no longer supply the convenience functions such as seat ventilation*. As soon as the on-board voltage is sufficient, you will see the following message in the multifunction display: NOTE: CONVEN. FUNCTIONS AVAILABLE AGAIN. The electrical consumers are switched on again. 419 Practical hints What to do if … Display Possible cause/consequence Possible solution Distronic** is switched off because:  Clean if necessary the Distronic** cover in the UNAVAILABLE front bumper ( page 403).
the Distronic** cover in the front SEE OPERATORS MANUAL bumper is dirty.  Restart the vehicle. DISTRONIC CURRENTLY
the functionality is impaired due to heavy rain or thick fog. or Distronic** becomes operational again without restarting the engine if:
dirt comes off during driving (e.g. slush or snow)
the system recognizes full sensor availability (due to lessening rain or the road surface drying)
the message disappears from the multifunction display
you see the speed last stored blink in the multifunction display for 5 seconds. You can now use Distronic** normally. Warning! G Distronic** cannot take weather conditions into account. Switch off Distronic** or do not turn it on if the sensor is dirty or visibility is diminished as a result of snow, 420 rain or fog. The distance control may be impaired even before the system is able to detect a dirty sensor. The message DISTRONIC CURRENTLY UNAVAILABLE SEE OPERATORS MANUAL will be displayed in the multifunction display and Distronic** will be turned off. Practical hints What to do if … Display DISTRONIC ESP Possible cause/consequence Possible solution EXTERNAL MALFUNCTION REACTIVATE Distronic** is switched off and is tem-  Try activating Distronic** again later. porarily unavailable. DRIVE TO WORKSHOP Distronic** is malfunctioning or the display is malfunctioning. MALFUNCTION VISIT WORKSHOP  Visit an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. ® The ESP is deactivated because of a  Continue driving with added caution. malfunction.  Visit an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. The electro-hydraulic brake system is still functioning normally but without Failure to follow these instructions increases the ESP® available. the risk of accident. The ABS may still be operational. DISPLAY DEFECTIVE VISIT WORKSHOP The ESP® or the ESP® display is malfunctioning.  Continue driving with added caution.  Visit an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident. 421 Practical hints What to do if … Display ESP Possible cause/consequence UNAVAILABLE SEE OPERATORS MANUAL Possible solution ESP® The is deactivated because of in-  Synchronize the ESP®: With the vehicle staterrupted power supply. tionary and the engine running, turn the steering wheel completely to the left and The electro-hydraulic brake system is then to the right. still functioning normally but without the ESP® available. If the ESP® message does not go out: The ABS may still be operational.  Continue driving with added caution.  Visit an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident. ! When adjusting the ESP®, make sure you can turn the steering wheel in both directions as far as it will go without the wheels hitting any objects (e.g. a curb). 422 Practical hints What to do if … Display Possible cause/consequence MOVE SELECTOR LEVER TO PARK You have tried to turn off the engine  Place the gear selector lever in position P. with the KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button ( page 63) with the gear selector lever not in P. SRS FAULT VISIT WORKSHOP The system is malfunctioning. MALFUNCTION DRIVE TO WORKSHOP One or more main functions of the Tele Aid system are malfunctioning. TELE AID Possible solution  Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized Maybach Studio.  Have the Tele Aid system checked by an au- thorized Maybach Studio. 423 Practical hints What to do if … Display 50 MPH Canada: LIMIT TIRE FAILURE Possible cause/consequence Possible solution The maximum speed is limited to 50 mph (80 km/h).  Pull over immediately. Change the wheel ( page 466). There was a tire inflation pressure warning message.  Reactivate the tire inflation pressure moni- 80 KM/H TIRE PRES. MONITOR REACTIVATE AFTER CORRECTING PRESSURE The yellow warning lamp for the tire inflation pressure monitor lights up and you have not reactivated the system since the last tire inflation pressure check.  Switch on the ignition ( page 62). TIRE PRESSURE DISPLAY ONLY AVAILABLE WHEN IGNITION IS ON Warning! G Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. 424 tor after correcting the tire inflation pressure values ( page 377). You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire. Practical hints What to do if … Display Possible cause/consequence TIRE PRES. MONITOR REACTIVATED The tire inflation pressure monitor is using the current pressure values as the basis for monitoring. TIRE PRES. MONITOR CURRENTLY UNAVAILABLE The tire inflation pressure monitor is temporarily inoperative because  Remove the additional wheel sen-
an additional wheel sensor is in the vehicle
the maximum temperature of the wheel sensor has been exceeded As soon as the causes of the malfunction have been removed, the tire inflation pressure monitor automatically becomes active again.
a radio source is causing interference
unrecognized wheel sensors are installed sor from the vehicle. The tire inflation pressure monitor or the  Have the tire inflation pressure wheel sensor is malfunctioning. monitor checked by an authorized Maybach Studio. TIRE PRES. MONITOR NOT OPERATIONAL DRIVE TO WORKSHOP A wheel without proper sensor was installed. Warning! Possible solution G  Have the wheels checked. You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire. Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. 425 Practical hints What to do if … Symbol messages Display P AIRMATIC STOP, CAR TOO LOW Possible cause/consequence Possible solution The vehicle level is too low.  Wait until the vehicle level has been adjusted. The message then disappears. The vehicle level control is malfunctioning.  Stop and press the vehicle level control In addition, the following message apbutton to select a higher vehicle level pears: ( page 264). AIRMATIC VISIT WORKSHOP  Do not turn steering wheel too far to avoid damaging the front fenders.  Listen for scraping noises.  Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).  Visit a service center as soon as possi- ble. Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident. AIRMATIC VISIT WORKSHOP The Airmatic system has only limited oper-  Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph ation. (80 km/h). The display for Airmatic or the Airmatic system itself is malfunctioning. 426  Visit a service center as soon as possi- ble. Practical hints What to do if … Display P Possible cause/consequence AIRMATIC VEHICLE RISING Your vehicle is adjusting to your level selection. AIRMATIC VEHICLE RISING PLEASE WAIT The level is too low. Possible solution  Do not drive off. The Airmatic has not yet adjusted the vehicle level to the necessary height required for driving.  Wait until the message disappears from the multifunction display. You may then drive off. # BATTERY CHARGE STOP VEHICLE The battery, the alternator or the electri-  Stop the vehicle in a safe location cal system control unit is malfunctioning. as soon as it is safe to do so. Adjust driving to be consistent with reThe electro-hydraulic brake system reduced braking responsiveness. quires electrical energy and therefore has  Notify an authorized Maybach only limited operation. Considerably Studio. greater brake pedal force is required and the stopping distance is increased. Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of accident.  Read and observe messages about the electro-hydraulic brake system in the multifunction display. 427 Practical hints What to do if … Display # BATTERY CHARGE VISIT WORKSHOP Possible cause/consequence Possible solution The battery is no longer charging.  Stop immediately in a safe location Possible causes:
alternator malfunctioning
broken poly-V-belt Do not forget that the brake system requires electrical energy and may be operating with restricted capability. Considerably greater brake pedal force is required and the stopping distance is longer. or as soon as it is safe to do so and check the poly-V-belt. If it is broken:  Do not continue to drive. Other- wise the engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump which may result in damage to the engine. Notify an authorized Maybach Studio. If it is intact:  Drive immediately to the nearest authorized Maybach Studio. Adapt driving to be consistent with reduced braking responsiveness.  Read and observe messages about the electro-hydraulic brake system in the multifunction display. ! 428 RELEASE PARKING BRAKE You are driving with the parking brake engaged.  Release the parking brake ( page 77). Practical hints What to do if … Display Possible cause/consequence Possible solution 2 BRAKE PAD WEAR VISIT WORKSHOP The brake pads have reached their wear  Have the brake pads replaced as limit. soon as possible at an authorized Maybach Studio. T BRAKE MALFUNCTION STOP VEHICLE The electro-hydraulic brake system is in  Stop the vehicle in a safe location the emergency operation mode. Considas soon as it is safe to do so. erably greater brake pedal force is re Do not drive any further. quired and the stopping distance is  Prevent the vehicle from rolling increased. away by blocking wheels with The maximum speed is limited to 55 mph wheel chocks or another sizable, (90 km/h). heavy objects ( page 467).  Call for Roadside Assistance. ; (USA only) REDUCED BRAKE PERF. START ENGINE 3 INCR. STOPPING DIST. START ENGINE The battery has insufficient voltage and cannot supply sufficient power to the electro-hydraulic brake system.  Start the engine. The message disappears when sufficient voltage is available. (Canada only) Warning! G Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and possible death. Do not run the engine in confined areas (such as a garage) which are not properly ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas fumes are entering the vehicle while driving, have the cause determined and corrected immediately. If you must drive under these conditions, drive with at least one window fully open. ! Brake pad thickness must be visually inspected by a qualified technician at the intervals specified in the Maintenance Booklet. 429 Practical hints What to do if … Display ; Possible cause/consequence (USA only) REDUCED BRAKE PERF. VISIT WORKSHOP 3 INCR. STOPPING DIST. VISIT WORKSHOP (Canada only) Possible solution The electro-hydraulic brake system is in  Continue driving with added cauthe emergency operation mode. Considtion. erable brake pedal force is required and  Adjust driving to be consistent with the stopping distance is increased. reduced braking responsiveness.  Drive immediately to the nearest authorized Maybach Studio. Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of accident. BRAKES OVERHEATED DRIVE CAREFULLY The brake system is overheated due to an  Relieve the load on the brake sysexcessive load on the brakes. tem.  Drive more smoothly and think ahead to avoid unnecessary braking.  When driving down slopes, shift into a lower gear to use the engine’s braking power ( page 202).  Cautiously continue driving so that the air stream will cool down the brakes. SERVICE BRAKE VISIT WORKSHOP 430 There are malfunctions, but the electro-  Visit an authorized Maybach Studio hydraulic brake system is operating noras soon as possible. mally. Practical hints What to do if … Display ; (USA only) Possible cause/consequence Possible solution There is insufficient brake fluid in the res-  Risk of accident! Stop the vehicle in ervoir. a safe location and notify an authorized Maybach Studio. Do not add brake fluid! This will not solve the problem. BRAKE FLUID VISIT WORKSHOP 3 (Canada only) Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of accident. Warning! G Driving with the message BRAKE FLUID VISIT WORKSHOP displayed can result in an accident. Have your brake system checked immediately. If there is a malfunction in the electro-hydraulic brake system, we recommend that the vehicle be transported with all wheels off the ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly equipment. A tow bar must be used if circumstances do not permit the use of the recommended towing methods and the vehicle requires towing with all four wheels on the ground. Towing the vehicle with all four wheels on the ground is only permissible for distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). For more information, refer to “Towing the vehicle” ( page 478). If the electro-hydraulic brake system enters its emergency operation mode, the driver must apply significantly greater brake pedal pressure and depress the pedal much further than normal to obtain braking effect. If necessary, apply full pressure to the brake pedal. Brakes are only applied to the front wheels. Stopping distance is increased! Do not add brake fluid before checking the brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You can be seriously burned. ! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below, have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks. Low brake fluid in the reservoir may cause the braking system to fail! 431 Practical hints What to do if … Display B COOLANT CHECK LEVEL Possible cause/consequence Possible solution The coolant level is too low.  Add coolant ( page 361).  If you have to add coolant fre- quently, have the cooling system checked by an authorized Maybach Studio. Warning! G Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts. You can be seriously burned. ! Do not ignore the low engine coolant level warning. Extended driving with the message and symbol displayed may cause serious engine damage not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. Do not drive without a sufficient amount of coolant in the cooling system. The engine will overheat, causing major engine damage. 432 Practical hints What to do if … Display Ï COOLANT VISIT WORKSHOP Possible cause/consequence Possible solution The cooling fan for the coolant is malfunctioning.  Observe the coolant temperature gauge ( page 170).  Have the fan replaced as soon as possible. COOLANT STOP, ENGINE OFF The coolant is too hot.  Stop the vehicle in a safe location and turn off the engine.  Only start the engine again after the message disappears. You could otherwise damage the engine. Warning! G Driving when your engine is badly overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned. Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns and can occur just by opening the engine hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it. Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. During severe operating conditions, e.g. stop-and-go traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to approximately 248°F (120°C). ! The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature above 248°F (120°C). Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. 433 Practical hints What to do if … Display Ï COOLANT STOP, ENGINE OFF Possible cause/consequence Possible solution The poly-V-belt could be broken.  Stop the vehicle in a safe location and immediately turn off the engine.  Check the poly-V-belt. If it is broken:  Do not continue to drive. Other- wise the engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump which may result in damage to the engine. Notify an authorized Maybach Studio. If it is intact:  Restart the engine only after the message disappears from the multifunction display. Doing so could result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty.  Observe the coolant temperature gauge ( page 25).  Drive immediately to the nearest authorized Maybach Studio. 434 Practical hints What to do if … Display Possible cause/consequence Possible solution Î CRUISE CONTROL DRIVE TO WORKSHOP Cruise control or Distronic** is malfunctioning.  Have cruise control or Distronic** ± DISPLAY DEFECTIVE VISIT WORKSHOP Certain electronic systems are unable to relay information to the control system. The following systems may have failed:  Have the electronic systems VISIT WORKSHOP G DISPLAY DEFECTIVE VISIT WORKSHOP
Coolant temperature display
Tachometer
Cruise control display There may be a malfunction in the:
Fuel injection system
Ignition system
Exhaust system
Fuel system checked by an authorized Maybach Studio. checked by an authorized Maybach Studio.  Visit an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. The displays for several systems have mal-  Continue driving with added caufunctioned. Some systems themselves tion. may also have malfunctioned.  Visit an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of accident. V DOOR OPEN You are attempting to drive with one or  Close the doors. more doors open. 435 Practical hints What to do if … Display : ENGINE OIL LEVEL VISIT WORKSHOP Possible cause/consequence Possible solution The engine oil has dropped to a critical level.  Check the engine oil level ( page 357) and add oil as re- quired.  If you must add engine oil fre- quently, have the engine checked for possible leaks. There is water in the oil. When the message: ADD 1.0 QT. OIL AT FILLING STATION (Canada: 1.0 LITER) appears while the engine is running and at operating temperature, the engine oil level has dropped to approximately the minimum level. 436 When this occurs, the warning will first come on intermittently and then stay on if the oil level drops further. Visually check for oil leaks. If no obvious oil are noted, continue to drive to the nearest service station where the engine oil should be topped to the required level with an approved oil specified in the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet.  Have the oil checked. ! The engine oil level warnings should not be ignored. Extended driving with the symbol displayed could result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. Practical hints What to do if … Display : ADD 1.0 QT. OIL AT FILLING STATION Possible cause/consequence Possible solution The engine oil level is too low.  Add engine oil ( page 360) and check the engine oil level ( page 358). (Canada: 1.0 LITER) ENGINE OIL LEVEL REDUCE OIL LEVEL You have added too much engine oil.  Have oil siphoned or drained off. There is a risk of damaging the engine or Observe all legal requirements with the catalytic converter. respect to its disposal. ENGINE OIL LEVEL STOP, ENGINE OFF There is no oil in the engine. There is a danger of engine damage.  Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt as soon as possible.  Turn off the engine.  Add engine oil. OIL SENSOR MALFUNCT. VISIT WORKSHOP The measuring system is malfunctioning.  Have the measuring system checked by an authorized Maybach Studio. _ ENTRY POSITION DO NOT DRIVE Seat, mirrors and steering wheel have  Wait until the seat, mirrors and not yet moved to their preset driving posteering wheel have moved to their sitions. driving positions. Y HOOD OPEN You are driving with the hood open. The message will disappear.  Close the hood ( page 356). 437 Practical hints What to do if … Display F Possible cause/consequence Possible solution KEY CHECK BATTERY The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** batteries are discharged.  Replace the batteries ( page 457). KEY NOT RECOGNIZED The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** is not  Stop the vehicle in a safe location recognized while the engine is running as soon as it is safe to do so. because  Search for the SmartKey with
the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** is KEYLESS-GO**. not in the vehicle Otherwise the vehicle cannot be centrally locked nor can the engine
there is strong radio-frequency interbe started again after the engine is ference stopped. KEY NOT RECOGNIZED The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** is mo-  Change the position of the mentarily not recognized. SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** in the vehicle.  Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** in the starter switch if necessary. 438 KEY STILL IN VEHICLE The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** left in  Take the SmartKey with the vehicle was recognized while locking KEYLESS-GO** out of the vehicle. the vehicle from the outside. AUTOM. LIGHT ON REMOVE KEY SmartKey in starter switch position 1 or 2.  Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch. Practical hints What to do if … Display F . Possible cause/consequence Possible solution You have forgotten to remove the SmartKey.  Remove the SmartKey from the REPLACE KEY DRIVE TO WORKSHOP The SmartKey is malfunctioning.  Visit an authorized Maybach Studio LIGHT SENSOR DRIVE TO WORKSHOP The light sensor is malfunctioning. The headlamps switch on automatically. REMOVE KEY starter switch. as soon as possible.  In the control system, set lamp operation to manual ( page 191).  Switch on headlamps using the ex- terior lamp switch.  Visit an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. DISPLAY DEFECTIVE VISIT WORKSHOP The display for the lamps or the system is  Visit an authorized Maybach Studio malfunctioning. as soon as possible. TURN OFF LIGHTS You have removed the SmartKey from  Turn the exterior lamp switch the starter switch and opened the drivto M ( page 155). er’s door or removed the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** from the vehicle and left the headlamps on. ACTIVE HDLMP MALF. DRIVE TO WORKSHOP The active headlamps1 have malfunctioned several times in succession. ACTIVE HEADLAMPS UNAVAILABLE 1 The active ing. headlamps1 are malfunction-  Visit an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible.  Visit an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. If equipped. 439 Practical hints What to do if … Display . HIGH BEAM, LEFT CHECK LIGHT Possible cause/consequence Possible solution The left high beam flasher lamp is malfunctioning.  Replace the bulb as soon as possible ( page 459) or visit an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. 440 HIGH BEAM, RIGHT CHECK LIGHT The right high beam flasher lamp is mal-  Replace the bulb as soon as possible functioning. ( page 459) or visit an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. LOW BEAM, LEFT CHECK LIGHT The left low beam lamp is malfunctioning. LOW BEAM, RIGHT CHECK LIGHT The right low beam lamp is malfunction-  Visit an authorized Maybach Studio ing. as soon as possible. FRONT FOGLAMP, LEFT CHECK LIGHT The left front fog lamp is malfunctioning.  Replace the bulb as soon as possible ( page 459) or visit an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. FRONT FOGLAMP, RIGHT CHECK LIGHT The right front fog lamp is malfunction-  Replace the bulb as soon as possible ing. ( page 459) or visit an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. MIRROR TURN SIG., L CHECK LIGHT The left turn signal in the side mirror is malfunctioning. This message will only appear if all light emitting diodes have stopped working. MIRROR TURN SIG., R CHECK LIGHT The right turn signal in the side mirror is  Visit an authorized Maybach Studio malfunctioning. This message will only as soon as possible. appear if all light emitting diodes have stopped working.  Visit an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible.  Visit an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. Practical hints What to do if … Display . MARKER LIGHT, FL CHECK LIGHT Possible cause/consequence Possible solution The left front side marker lamp is malfunctioning.  Replace the bulb as soon as possible ( page 459) or visit an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. MARKER LIGHT, FR CHECK LIGHT The right front side marker lamp is malfunctioning.  Replace the bulb as soon as possible ( page 459) or visit an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. STANDING LIGHT, L CHECK LIGHT The left front standing lamps are malfunctioning.  Replace the bulb as soon as possible ( page 459) or visit an authorized STANDING LIGHT, R CHECK LIGHT The right front standing lamps are malfunctioning.  Replace the bulb as soon as possible ( page 459) or visit an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. Maybach Studio as soon as possible. 1 lamp1 is malfunction-  Replace the bulb as soon as possible ( page 459) or visit an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. CORNERING LAMP LEFT The left cornering ing. CORNERING LAMP RIGHT The right cornering lamp1 is malfunction-  Replace the bulb as soon as possible ing. ( page 459) or visit an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. FRONT TURN SIGNAL, L The left front turn signal lamp is malfunc-  Replace the bulb as soon as possible tioning. ( page 459) or visit an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. If equipped. 441 Practical hints What to do if … Display . FRONT TURN SIGNAL, R Possible cause/consequence Possible solution The right front turn signal lamp is malfunctioning.  Replace the bulb as soon as possible ( page 459) or visit an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. BRAKE LIGHT LEFT SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON The left brake lamp is malfunctioning. A  Visit an authorized Maybach Studio substitute bulb is being used. as soon as possible. BRAKE LIGHT RIGHT SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON The right brake lamp is malfunctioning. A substitute bulb is being used.  Visit an authorized Maybach Studio 3RD BRAKE LIGHT CHECK LIGHT The high mounted brake lamp is malfunctioning.  Visit an authorized Maybach Studio REAR FOGLIGHT CHECK LIGHT The rear fog lamp is malfunctioning.  Visit an authorized Maybach Studio LICENSE PLATE L, L CHECK LIGHT The left license plate lamp is malfunctioning. as soon as possible. as soon as possible. as soon as possible.  Replace the bulb as soon as possible ( page 459) or visit an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. LICENSE PLATE L, R CHECK LIGHT The right license plate lamp is malfunctioning.  Replace the bulb as soon as possible ( page 459) or visit an authorized REVERSE LIGHT, LEFT CHECK LIGHT The left reverse lamp is malfunctioning.  Visit an authorized Maybach Studio REVERSE LIGHT, RIGHT CHECK LIGHT The right reverse lamp is malfunctioning.  Visit an authorized Maybach Studio as soon as possible. Maybach Studio as soon as possible. 442 as soon as possible. Practical hints What to do if … Display Possible cause/consequence Possible solution STANDING LIGHT, L SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON The left rear standing lamps are malfunc-  Visit an authorized Maybach Studio tioning. A substitute bulb is being used. as soon as possible. STANDING LIGHT, R SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON The right rear standing lamps are malfunctioning. A substitute bulb is being used.  Visit an authorized Maybach Studio STOP LAMP VISIT WORKSHOP Brake lamp illumination is delayed or lamp is permanently on.  Visit an authorized Maybach Studio TAIL LIGHT, LEFT SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON The left tail lamp is malfunctioning. A substitute bulb is being used.  Visit an authorized Maybach Studio TAIL LIGHT, RIGHT SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON The right tail lamp is malfunctioning. A substitute bulb is being used.  Visit an authorized Maybach Studio REAR TURN SIGNAL, L SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON The left rear turn signal lamp is malfunc-  Visit an authorized Maybach Studio tioning. A substitute bulb is being used. as soon as possible. REAR TURN SIGNAL, R SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON The right rear turn signal lamp is malfunctioning. A substitute bulb is being used.  Visit an authorized Maybach Studio < SEAT BELT SYSTEM DRIVE TO WORKSHOP The seat belt system is malfunctioning.  Visit an authorized Maybach Studio K CLOSE SUNROOF You have opened the driver’s door with  Close the tilt/sliding sunroof the SmartKey removed from the starter ( page 237). switch and the sliding portion of the tilt/ sliding sunroof open. . as soon as possible. as soon as possible. as soon as possible. as soon as possible. as soon as possible. as soon as possible. 443 Practical hints What to do if … Display Possible cause/consequence Possible solution J CLOSE SUNROOF You have opened the driver’s door with  Close the tilt/sliding sunroof the SmartKey removed from the starter ( page 237). switch and the tilting portion of the tilt/ sliding sunroof open. _ STEERING GEAR OIL CHECK The steering oil has dropped to a critical  Visit an authorized Maybach Studio level. as soon as possible. L TELE AID BATTERY DRIVE TO WORKSHOP The emergency power battery for the  Have the Tele Aid system checked Tele Aid system is malfunctioning. If the by an authorized Maybach Studio. vehicle battery is also discharged, Tele Aid will not be operational. TELE AID NOT ACTIVATED You do not have a Tele Aid service contract or you have not extended your existing one. TANK OPEN CHECK FILLER CAP A loss of pressure has been detected in  Check the fuel cap ( page 353). the fuel system. The fuel cap may not be If it is not closed properly: closed properly or the fuel system may be  Close the fuel cap. leaky. If it is closed properly: A  Obtain a Tele Aid service contract or have your existing one extended in an authorized Maybach Studio.  Have the fuel system checked by an authorized Maybach Studio. Ê TRUNK OPEN This message will appear whenever the trunk is open.  Close the trunk. W WASHER FLUID CHECK LEVEL The fluid level has dropped to about 1/3 of total reservoir capacity.  Add washer fluid ( page 363). 444 Practical hints What to do if … Display H Possible cause/consequence Possible solution TIRE PRESSURE PLEASE CORRECT The pressure is low in one or more tires.  Check and correct tire inflation pressure as required ( page 375). TIRE PRESSURE CAUTION, TIRE PRES. One or more tires is deflating.  Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation around you.  Change the damaged wheel ( page 466).  Have the damaged wheel repaired or replaced at an authorized Maybach Studio. Warning! G Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire. 445 Practical hints What to do if … Display H Possible cause/consequence Possible solution The tire pressure in one or more tires is al-  Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, ready below the minimum value. avoiding abrupt steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic The tire pressure in one or more tires is situation around you. low. TIRE PRESSURE CHECK TIRES  Check the tires. If no damage visi- ble, check and correct tire inflation pressure as required.  If necessary, change the damaged wheel ( page 466).  Have the damaged wheel repaired or replaced at an authorized Maybach Studio. Warning! G Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire. 446 Practical hints What to do if … Display H TIRE PRESSURE, LF CAUTION, TIRE PRES. Possible cause/consequence Possible solution The left front tire is deflating.  Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation around you.  Change the wheel ( page 466).  Have the damaged wheel repaired or replaced at an authorized Maybach Studio. TIRE PRESSURE, LF CHECK TIRES The left front tire inflation pressure is low.  Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt.  Check the tires. If no damage visi- ble, check and correct tire inflation pressure as required ( page 375).  If necessary, change the wheel ( page 466).  Have the damaged wheel repaired or replaced at an authorized Maybach Studio. Warning! G You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire. Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. 447 Practical hints What to do if … Display H TIRE PRESSURE, RF CAUTION, TIRE PRES. Possible cause/consequence Possible solution The right front tire is deflating.  Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation around you.  Change the wheel ( page 466).  Have the damaged wheel repaired or replaced at an authorized Maybach Studio. TIRE PRESSURE, RF CHECK TIRES The right front tire inflation pressure is low.  Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt.  Check the tires. If no damage visi- ble, check and correct tire inflation pressure as required ( page 375).  If necessary, change the wheel ( page 466).  Have the damaged wheel repaired or replaced at an authorized Maybach Studio. Warning! G Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. 448 You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire. Practical hints What to do if … Display H TIRE PRESSURE, LR CAUTION, TIRE PRES. Possible cause/consequence Possible solution The left rear tire is deflating.  Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation around you.  Change the wheel ( page 466).  Have the damaged wheel repaired or replaced at an authorized Maybach Studio. TIRE PRESSURE, LR CHECK TIRES The left rear tire inflation pressure is low.  Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt.  Check the tires. If no damage visi- ble, check and correct tire inflation pressure as required ( page 375).  If necessary, change the wheel ( page 466).  Have the damaged wheel repaired or replaced at an authorized Maybach Studio. Warning! G You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire. Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. 449 Practical hints What to do if … Display H TIRE PRESSURE, RR CAUTION, TIRE PRES. Possible cause/consequence Possible solution The right rear tire is deflating.  Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation around you.  Change the wheel ( page 466).  Have the damaged wheel repaired or replaced at an authorized Maybach Studio. TIRE PRESSURE, RR CHECK TIRES The right rear tire inflation pressure is low.  Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt.  Check the tires. If no damage visi- ble, check and correct tire inflation pressure as required ( page 375).  If necessary, change the wheel ( page 466).  Have the damaged wheel repaired or replaced at an authorized Maybach Studio. Warning! G Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. 450 You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire. Practical hints Where will I find ...?  Where will I find ...? First aid kit The first aid kit is stored in the storage compartment under the front passenger seat. ! Vehicle jack, vehicle tool kit, luggage bowl, spare wheel The spare wheel, the vehicle tool kit and the luggage bowl are stored in the compartment underneath the trunk floor. To prevent damage, always disengage trunk floor handle from trunk edge and lower trunk floor before closing the trunk. The vehicle tool kit includes: 1 Tabs  Press tabs 1 together.  Fold the cover forward.  Remove first aid kit. i Check expiration dates and contents for completeness at least once a year and replace missing/expired items. 1 2 3 4 5 Wheel chock Spare wheel Luggage bowl Vehicle tool kit Vehicle jack
One pair of universal pliers
Two open-end wrenches
One hex-socket wrench
One interchangeable slot/Phillips screwdriver
One towing eye bolt
One wheel wrench
One alignment bolt
One fuse extractor
One fuse chart
Spare fuses  Lift up the trunk floor cover and en- gage trunk floor handle in upper edge of trunk. You can now remove the tools and accessories. 451 Practical hints Unlocking/locking in an emergency Unlocking the vehicle If you are unable to unlock the vehicle using the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO**, open the driver’s door and the trunk using the mechanical key. Removing the mechanical key Unlocking the driver’s door 1 Mechanical key locking tab 2 Mechanical key 1 Unlocking i Unlocking the driver’s door and/or the trunk with the mechanical key will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. To cancel the alarm:  Insert the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** in the starter switch. The alarm is canceled.  Move locking tab 1 in direction of arrow.  Slide mechanical key 2 out of the housing. 452  Insert the mechanical key into the driver’s door lock until it stops.  Turn the mechanical key counter- clockwise to position 1. The driver’s door is unlocked. Practical hints Unlocking/locking in an emergency Unlocking and opening the trunk ! A minimum height clearance of 6.2 ft (1.89 m) is required to open the trunk lid. The trunk lid swings open automatically. Always make sure there is sufficient overhead clearance. The trunk lid lock is located next to the handle above the rear license plate recess.  If necessary, lock the trunk with the mechanical key ( page 137). Except for the driver’s door, the vehicle should now be locked.  Turn the mechanical key back and re- move it from the trunk lid lock. Locking the vehicle If you cannot lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO**, do the following:  Close the front passenger door, the rear doors and the trunk. 1 Unlocking in an emergency 2 Handle  Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lid lock until it stops.  Turn the mechanical key counter-  Press the central locking switch on the center console ( page 139). 1 Locking  Check to see whether the locking  Insert the mechanical key into the knobs on the doors have moved down.  If necessary, push them down manu- ally. clockwise to position 1.  Remove the mechanical key out of the SmartKey ( page 452). The trunk unlocks.  Check whether the trunk is locked. driver’s door lock until it stops.  Turn the mechanical key clockwise to position 1. The driver’s door is locked.  Pull on handle 2. The trunk opens. 453 Practical hints Opening/closing in an emergency Power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 57) You can open or close the tilt/sliding sunroof manually should an electrical malfunction occur.  Remove the SmartKey from the start- The tilt/sliding sunroof roof drive is located behind the cover on the overhead control panel. KEYLESS-GO** button on the gear selector lever once ( page 84). er switch. Vehicles with SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO**:  Turn off the engine by pressing the  Open the driver’s door (this puts the starter switch in position 0, same as with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch). The driver’s door then can be closed again.  Pull cover 1 off at the location marked by the arrow. 1 Cover 2 Crank 454  Remove crank 2 from the Operator’s Manual pouch.  Insert crank 2 through hole.  Turn crank 2 clockwise to:
slide roof closed
raise roof at the rear  Turn crank 2 counterclockwise to:
slide roof open
lower roof at the rear i Turn crank 2 slowly and smoothly. The tilt/sliding sunroof must be synchronized after being operated manually ( page 239). Practical hints Opening/closing in an emergency Power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 62) Removing the T-handle crank The key for emergency operation is included in the vehicle tool kit. Operating the power tilt/sliding sunroof manually  Pull cover 2 off of the rear center in- The tilt/sliding sunroof drive is located behind cover 2 in the roof lining with the rear passenger compartment instruments.  Insert crank 1 inclined through hole. strument.  Turn crank 1 clockwise to:
slide roof closed
raise roof at the rear  Turn crank 1 counterclockwise to:
slide roof open
lower roof at the rear The tilt/sliding sunroof must be synchronized after being operated manually ( page 244). 1 Vehicle tool kit 2 T-handle crank 3 Pipe key  Open the trunk ( page 131). 1 T-handle crank 2 Cover  Join pieces of T-handle crank 1 together.  Take out vehicle tool kit ( page 451).  Open pouch.  Pull both parts of T-handle crank 2 out of pipe key 3. 455 Practical hints Replacing SmartKey batteries If the batteries in the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** are discharged, the vehicle can only be locked or unlocked using the mechanical key ( page 452). It is recommended to have the batteries replaced at an authorized Maybach Studio. Warning! G Batteries contain poisonous and corrosive substances. Therefore keep the batteries out of reach of children. If a battery is swallowed, seek medical help immediately. 456 Batteries contain materials that can harm the environment if disposed of improperly. Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of disposal. Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for recycling. i When inserting the batteries, make sure they are clean and free of lint. i When replacing batteries, always replace both batteries. The required replacement batteries are available at any Maybach Studio. Practical hints Replacing SmartKey batteries Replacement batteries: Lithium, type CR 2025 or equivalent.  Pull battery compartment 2 out of the housing in direction of arrow.  Remove the mechanical key out of the SmartKey ( page 452).  Using a lint-free cloth, insert new batteries 3 under the contact spring 4 with the plus (+) side facing up.  Return battery compartment 2 into the housing until it locks into place.  Slide mechanical key 1 back into the SmartKey ( page 452).  Check the operation of the SmartKey/ KEYLESS-GO**. 3 Battery 4 Contact spring 1 Mechanical key 2 Battery compartment  Remove the batteries 3.  Insert mechanical key 1 in direction of arrow in side opening.  Using mechanical key 1, push the gray slide to unlatch battery compartment 2. 457 Practical hints Replacing bulbs Safe vehicle operation depends on proper exterior lighting and signaling. It is therefore essential that all bulbs and lamp assemblies are in good working order at all times. Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely important. Have headlamps checked and readjusted at regular intervals and when a bulb has been replaced. See an authorized Maybach Studio for headlamp adjustment. 458 i i If the headlamps or front fog lamps are fogged up on the inside as a result of high humidity, driving the vehicle a distance with the lights on should clear up the fogging. Substitute bulbs will be brought into use when the following lamps malfunction:
Rear turn signal lamps
Brake lamps
Rear parking lamps
Tail lamps Practical hints Replacing bulbs Bulbs Front lamps Lamp Rear lamps Type 1 Additional turn signal and side marker lamp LED 2 Turn signal lamp SAE J573 2357 A 12.8 V-30CP Lamp 9 High mounted brake lamp Type LED a License plate lamp C 5 W 3 Side marker lamp W 5 W 4 Low beam and Xenon2 high beam (active D2S-35 W headlamps1) b Brake lamp Tail, parking and standing lamp LED LED Side marker lamp LED Backup lamp H 24 W H3 55 W Rear fog lamp, driver’s side LED 5 Fog lamp 6 Cornering lamp1 H3 55 W Turn signal lamp LED 7 Parking and standing lamp W 5 W Blue 8 High beam flasher H7-55 W 1 2 If equipped. Bi-Xenon headlamps: For safety reasons (high voltage), do not replace the Xenon bulb yourself. See an authorized Maybach Studio. 459 Practical hints Replacing bulbs Notes on bulb replacement Warning! G Keep bulbs out of reach of children. Bulbs and bulb sockets can get very hot. Allow the lamp to cool down before changing a bulb. Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. A bulb can explode if you
touch or move it when hot
drop the bulb
scratch the bulb Wear eye and hand protection. Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp and its components. We recommend that you have such work done by a qualified technician.

Use only 12-volt bulbs of the same type and with the specified watt rating. Switch lights off before changing a bulb to prevent short circuits. 460
Always use a clean lint-free cloth when handling bulbs.
Your hands should be dry and free of oil and grease.
If the newly installed bulb does not come on, visit an authorized Maybach Studio.
Have the LEDs and bulbs for the following lamps replaced by an authorized Maybach Studio:
Additional turn signal lamp and side marker lamp in the exterior rear view mirrors
Backup lamp
Bi-Xenon lamp
Fog lamps
Rear fog lamp
High mounted brake lamp
Brake lamp
Rear side marker lamp
Rear turn signal lamp
Tail lamp
Rear parking and standing lamp Replacing bulbs for front lamps Before you start to replace a bulb for a front lamp, do the following first:  Turn the exterior lamp switch to M ( page 155).  Open the hood ( page 356) (except for turn signal and side marker lamps). 1 Housing cover for cornering lamp, high beam flasher bulb, parking and standing lamp 2 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp 3 Bulb socket for side marker 4 Low beam and high beam (Bi-Xenon) housing cover Practical hints Replacing bulbs High beam flasher bulbs Parking and standing lamp bulb  Twist housing cover 1 ( page 460)  Twist housing cover 1 ( page 460) counterclockwise and pull out.  Twist bulb socket 5 counterclock- wise and pull out.  Push bulb into socket, turn counter- clockwise and remove.  Insert new bulb in socket, push in and twist clockwise. 5 Bulb socket for high beam flasher bulb 6 Bulb socket for parking and standing lamp 7 Bulb socket for cornering lamp  Reinsert bulb socket 5 in lamp and twist clockwise. counterclockwise and pull out.  Pull out bulb socket 6 with the bulb.  Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket 6.  Insert a new bulb in the socket.  Reinstall bulb socket 6.  Align housing cover 1 and twist clockwise.  Align housing cover 1 and twist clockwise. Low beam and high beam bulbs Warning! G Do not remove the cover for the Bi-Xenon headlamp. Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp and its components. We recommend that you have such work done by a qualified technician. 461 Practical hints Replacing bulbs Cornering lamps  Twist housing cover 1 ( page 460) counterclockwise and pull out.  Press bulb holder for cornering lamp 7 ( page 461) upward and to the left in direction of arrow.  The bulb holder disengages.  Remove bulb from lamp and pull white cable out of black cable connector.  Insert cable of new bulb into black ca- ble connector.  Insert new bulb into lamp and en- gage bulb holder for cornering lamp 7 into position.  Align housing cover 1 and twist clockwise. 462 Front turn signal and side marker lamp bulb  Turn the wheels so that the wheel at the housing you need to work on is turned inward. This will provide easier access to the lamp cover.  Secure the vehicle from moving by applying the parking brake and placing the gear selector lever in position P.  Make sure the engine and ignition are turned off. Warning! G Before reaching into the wheel housing, make sure you have secured the vehicle from moving by applying the parking brake and placing the gear selector lever in position P. Otherwise, the vehicle may move unexpectedly. Unexpected vehicle movement while you are working near the wheel housing may cause serious personal injury and/or an accident. 8 Cover in the wheel housing trim  Turn cover 8 counterclockwise and remove cover. Practical hints Replacing bulbs Front turn signal bulb Side marker lamp bulb  Twist bulb socket 2 ( page 460)  Twist bulb socket 3 ( page 460) counterclockwise and pull out. counterclockwise and pull out.  Push bulb into socket, turn counter- clockwise and remove.  Insert new bulb in socket, push in and twist clockwise.  Reinsert bulb socket 2 in lamp and twist clockwise.  Replace cover 8 ( page 462) and turn it clockwise. License plate lamp  Push bulb into socket, turn counter- clockwise and remove.  Insert new bulb in socket, push in and twist clockwise.  Reinsert bulb socket 3 in lamp and twist clockwise.  Replace cover 8 ( page 462) and turn it clockwise. 1 Screws 2 License plate lamp  Turn the exterior lamp switch to M ( page 155).  Loosen both screws 1.  Remove license plate lamp 2.  Replace the bulb.  Reinstall the license plate lamp 2.  Retighten the screws 1. 463 Practical hints Replacing wiper blades ! To avoid damage to the hood, the wiper arms should only be folded forward when in the vertical position.  With wiper arm in vertical position 1, turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0. Warning! Removing wiper blades  Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1.  Turn combination switch to wiper setting II ( page 80). G For safety reasons, switch off wipers and remove SmartKey from starter switch (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**: Make sure the vehicle’s on board electronics have status 0) before cleaning a wiper blades. Otherwise, the wiper motor could suddenly turn on and cause injury.  Fold the wiper arm forward. You should hear it snap into place.  Turn the wiper blade at a right angle to wiper arm. 1 Wiper arm vertical 464  Slide the wiper blade 2 sideways out of retainer. Practical hints Replacing wiper blades Installing wiper blades  Slide the wiper blade into the cutout on the wiper arm. !  Rotate the wiper blade into position Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm back. If released, the force of the impact from the tensioning spring could crack the windshield. parallel to wiper arm.  Fold the wiper arm back so that blade rests on windshield. Make sure you hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm back. Never open the hood when the wiper arm is folded forward. Do not allow the wiper arms to contact the windshield glass without a wiper blade inserted. Make certain that the wiper blades are properly installed. Improperly installed wiper blades may cause windshield damage. For your convenience, you should have this work carried out by an authorized Maybach Studio. 465 Practical hints Flat tire i Preparing the vehicle  Park the vehicle in a safe distance from moving traffic on a hard, flat surface when possible.  Turn on the hazard warning flashers. Open the door only when conditions are safe to do so.  Have any passenger exit the vehicle at a safe distance from the roadway.  Turn the steering wheel so that the front wheels are in a straight ahead position.  Set the parking brake.  Move the gear selector lever to P. Vehicles with SmartKey:  Turn off the engine ( page 84).  Remove the SmartKey from the start- er switch. Vehicles with SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO**:  Turn off the engine by pressing the KEYLESS-GO** button on the gear selector lever once ( page 85).  Open the driver’s door (this puts the starter switch in position 0, same as with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch). The driver’s door then can be closed again. 466 Mounting the spare wheel Warning! G If the spare tire is more than 6 years old or is not the same model as the regular tires, have the spare tire replaced with a new tire at the nearest Maybach Studio. Never operate the vehicle with more than one spare tire. Spare wheel Additional information for 57 S: The spare wheel rim is mounted with a full-sized tire of the same type as on the vehicle, and it is fully functional. The dimensions of the spare wheel are different from those of the road wheels. As a result, the vehicle handling characteristics change when driving with a mounted spare wheel. Adapt your driving style accordingly. When you replace the vehicle’s tires, you can use the spare wheel as a regular wheel if:
it is not more than 6 years old
rim and tire are the same model as the regular wheels The spare is for temporary use only. When driving with spare wheel mounted, do not exceed vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). For more information on spare wheel, see “Technical data” ( page 491). Practical hints Flat tire Removing the spare wheel Lifting the vehicle  Turn the luggage bowl counterclockwise ( page 451).  Remove the spare wheel. Storing the spare wheel  Place wheel chock 1 and another  Place spare wheel in wheel well and sizeable suitable object on the downhill side blocking both wheels of the axle not being worked on. secure it with luggage bowl.  Turn the luggage bowl clockwise to its stop. Preparing the vehicle 1 Wheel chock  Take vehicle tool kit tray and vehicle  Prevent the vehicle from rolling away jack out of trunk.  Take the spare wheel out of wheel well. Always try lifting the vehicle using the jack on a level surface. However, should circumstances require you to do so on a hill, place the wheel chock and the other sizeable, heavy object as follows: by blocking wheels with wheel chock 1 and another sizable suitable objects. When changing wheel on a level surface:  Place wheel chock 1 in front of and another sizeable suitable object behind the wheel that is diagonally opposite to the wheel being changed. 2 Two-piece wheel wrench  Take the two-piece wheel wrench 2 out of the vehicle tool kit tray. Assemble wheel wrench.  467 Practical hints Flat tire  Warning! G The tube openings are located directly behind the front wheel housings and in front of the rear wheel housings. The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jack support tube hole built into the vehicle. To help avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift the vehicle during a wheel change. Never get beneath the vehicle while it is supported by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from the area under the lifted vehicle. Always firmly set parking brake and block wheels before raising vehicle with jack. Do not disengage parking brake while the vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is always vertical (plumb line) when in use, especially on hills. Always try to use the jack on level surface. Make sure the jack arm is fully seated in the jack support tube hole. Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient capacity jackstands before working under the vehicle.  On wheel to be changed, loosen but do not yet remove the wheel bolts (approximately one full turn with wrench). 468  Take ratchet 5 out of vehicle tool kit.  Place ratchet 5 on jack 3 so that you can see the letters UP.  Crank ratchet 5 up and down until the tire is a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) off the ground. Warning! The jack is intended only for lifting the vehicle briefly for wheel changes. It is not suited for performing maintenance work under the vehicle. 3 Jack 4 Jack support tube hole 5 Ratchet  Insert jack 3 fully into tube hole 4 up to the stop. Warning! G G Insert the jack arm fully into the jack support tube hole up to the stop. Otherwise the vehicle may fall off the jack and cause personal injury or damage to the vehicle.
Never start the engine when the vehicle is raised.
Never lie down under the raised vehicle. Practical hints Flat tire Removing the wheel Mounting the new wheel  Clean contact surfaces of wheel and wheel hub. ! To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat against hub and hold it there while installing first wheel bolt. Warning! 6 Alignment bolt  Unscrew uppermost wheel bolt and remove.  Replace this wheel bolt with align- ment bolt 6 supplied in the tool kit.  Remove the remaining bolts. ! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt. This could result in damage to the bolt and wheel hub threads.  Remove the wheel. G Always replace wheel bolts that are damaged or rusted. Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts. Damaged wheel hub threads should be repaired immediately. Do not continue to drive under these circumstances! Contact an authorized Maybach Studio or call Roadside Assistance. Incorrect mounting bolts or improperly tightened mounting bolts can cause the wheel to come off. This could cause an accident. Make sure you are using the correct mounting bolts.  Guide the spare wheel onto the alignment bolt and push it on.  Insert wheel bolts and tighten them slightly.  Unscrew the alignment bolt, install last wheel bolt and tighten slightly. Warning! G Use only Genuine equipment Maybach wheel bolts. Other wheel bolts may come loose. Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the vehicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle could fall off the jack. 469 Practical hints Flat tire Lowering the vehicle  Place ratchet on jack so that you can see the letters DOWN.  Lower vehicle by cranking ratchet up and down until vehicle is resting fully on its own weight.  Remove the jack.  Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly, following the diagonal sequence illustrated (1 to 5), until all bolts are tight. Observe a tightening torque of 110 lb-ft (150 Nm). Warning! G Have the tightening torque checked after changing a wheel. The wheels could come loose if they are not tightened to a torque of 110 lb-ft (150 Nm).  Before storing the jack in the trunk, it should be fully collapsed, with handle folded in.  Place the wheel bolt wrench, chock, 1-5 470 Wheel bolts alignment bolt and jack back in the trunk. Replacing jack support tube cover  Slide tongue of cover under the up- per edge of the tube opening.  Applying even pressure, press cover until it snaps into place. Be careful not to damage the locking tabs or clamp the plastic retaining strap. ! You can also secure the damaged wheel down into the spare wheel well in the trunk. Do not activate the tire inflation pressure monitor ( page 375) until the depressurized tire is no longer in the vehicle. Practical hints Batteries  Batteries Your vehicle is equipped with two batteries:
The starter battery (located in the engine compartment)
The battery for electrical consumers (located in the trunk) Even though VRLA batteries do not require topping-up of the electrolyte level and cannot be opened to check the electrolyte level, the battery condition must be checked periodically by performing a battery conductance test. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for battery condition testing intervals. 4 Cover over positive terminal 5 Battery for electrical consumers 6 Negative terminal ! 1 Negative terminal 2 Starter battery 3 Cover over positive terminal The consumer battery located in the trunk is a valve-regulated lead acid (VRLA) battery, also referred to as “fleece” battery. Such batteries do not require topping-up of the electrolyte level. VRLA batteries therefore do not have cell caps and the battery cover is non-removable. Do not attempt to open the consumer battery as otherwise the battery will be damaged. As with any other battery, disconnect the consumer battery if you do not intend to operate your vehicle for an extended period of time to prevent battery discharge or connect an accessory battery charge unit expressly approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles to maintain the battery charge. Contact an authorized Maybach Studio for further information. 471 Practical hints Batteries Warning! G Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injury or death. Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries ( page 362). Never lean over batteries while connecting, you might get injured. Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately flush affected area with water and seek medical help if necessary. A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, which is flammable and explosive. Keep flames or sparks away from battery, avoid improper connection of jumper cables, smoking, etc. ! Never loosen or detach battery terminal clamps while the engine is running or the SmartKey is in the starter switch. Otherwise the alternator and other electronic components could be severely damaged. Have the battery checked regularly by an authorized Maybach Studio. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for maintenance intervals or contact an authorized Maybach Studio for further information. Warning! G Do not place metal objects on the battery as this could result in a short circuit. Use leak-proof battery only to avoid the risk of acid burns in the event of an accident. 472 Warning! G The electro-hydraulic brake system requires electrical power to operate. A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply or electrical system may impair brake system operation and switch it into its emergency operation mode. The same applies if battery is disconnected. To brake, the driver must then apply significantly greater brake pedal pressure and depress the pedal much further to obtain the expected braking effect. If necessary, apply full pressure to the brake pedal. Brakes are only applied to the front wheels. Stopping distance is increased! Adjust your driving style accordingly. For more information, refer to “Electro-hydraulic brake system” ( page 112). Practical hints Batteries Warning! G With a disconnected battery

you will no longer be able to turn the SmartKey in the starter switch and pressing the KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button ( page 63) on the gear selector lever will have no effect the gear selector lever will remain locked in position P Disconnecting the batteries ! Always disconnect the batteries in the order described below, even if you only want to charge the starter battery, for example. Otherwise, the vehicle’s electronics could be damaged. i Using the Maybach battery charger* ( page 306), it is only possible to charge or maintain the existing charge in the battery for electrical consumers, not the starter battery.  Depress parking brake firmly and move gear selector lever to position P.  Turn off the engine ( page 84).  Read and observe safety instructions and precautions ( page 471).  Remove trunk floor from right hand side of the trunk. The consumer battery is located in the trunk on the right hand side.  Read and observe safety instructions and precautions ( page 471).  Disconnect negative terminal from consumer battery.  Open hood. The starter battery is located in the engine compartment on the passenger side.  Read and observe safety instructions and precautions ( page 471).  Disconnect negative terminal of start- er battery.  Turn off all electrical consumers.  Remove cover from positive terminal.  Remove SmartKey from starter  Disconnect the positive lead of con- switch.  In vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**: Open sumer battery and of the starter battery. the driver‘s door.  Open the trunk ( page 131). 473 Practical hints Batteries Removing the batteries  Swing the bar up and remove bat- tery. Removing the consumer battery  Loosen the screws that hold the con- sumer battery in the trunk in place.  Remove battery’s support and brack- et.  Pull out the battery ventilation tube from the battery (depending on battery arrangement in your vehicle model, the ventilation tube is located either on the left or right side of the battery).  Take battery out of trunk. Removing the starter battery  Loosen the screw that holds the start- er battery in the engine compartment in place.  Pull out the battery ventilation tube from the battery (depending on battery arrangement in your vehicle model, the ventilation tube is located either on the left or right side of the battery). 474 the instructions of the battery charger manufacturer. Charging and reinstalling the batteries Warning!  Charge batteries in accordance with  Reinstall the charged battery. Follow G Never charge a battery while still installed in the vehicle unless the accessory battery charge unit* approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles is being used. Gases may escape during charging and cause explosions that may result in paint damage, corrosion or personal injury. An accessory battery charge unit* specially adapted for Maybach vehicles and tested and approved by us is available, permitting the charging of the battery for electrical consumers in its installed in its installed position. Contact an authorized Maybach Studio for information and availability. Charge battery in accordance with the separate instructions for the Maybach battery charger*. the previously described steps in reverse order. ! The batteries, their filler caps and the ventilation tubes must always be securely installed when the vehicle is in operation. Practical hints Batteries Reconnecting the batteries ! Always connect the batteries in the order described below. Otherwise, the vehicle’s electronics could be damaged. ! Never invert the terminal connections.  Reinstall carpet on the right hand side of the trunk.  Have a Maybach Studio check engine  Turn off all electrical consumers.  Install starter battery in the designat- ed location in the engine compartment.  Install consumer battery in the desig- nated location in the trunk.  Attach supports and brackets and tighten screws. control units for error messages and have them erased. i The following procedures must be carried out following any interruption of consumer battery power (e.g. due to reconnecting):
Set the clock. Refer to the separate COMAND and Rear-Cabin Audiovisual System operating instructions.
Synchronize the ESP® ( page 422).
Synchronize side windows ( page 235).
Synchronize tilt/sliding sunroof ( page 239) or ( page 244).  Connect positive lead of the consum- er battery and of the starter battery and fasten covers.  Connect negative lead of the starter battery in the engine compartment.  Connect negative lead of the con- Batteries contain materials that can harm the environment if disposed of improperly. Large 12-volt storage batteries contain lead. Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of disposal. Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for recycling. sumer battery in the trunk. 475 Practical hints Jump starting Warning! G Failure to follow these directions will cause damage to the electronic components, and can lead to a battery explosion and severe injury or death. Never lean over batteries while connecting or jump starting, you might get injured. Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately flush affected area with water, and seek medical help if necessary. If the starter battery is discharged, the engine can be started with jumper cables and the battery of another vehicle. Observe the following:
Jump starting should only be performed when the engine and catalytic converter are cold.
Do not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw out first.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, which is flammable and very explosive. Keep flames or sparks away from battery, avoid improper connection of jumper cables, smoking, etc. Attempting to jump start a frozen battery can result in it exploding, causing personal injury.
Read all instructions before proceeding.
! Do not tow-start the vehicle. 476 Only jump start from batteries with the same voltage rating (12 V). Jump starting with a more powerful battery could damage the vehicle‘s electrical system, which will not be covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. Use only jumper cables with sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. Always make sure the jumper cables are not on or near pulleys, fans or other parts that move when an engine is started or running. ! Jump starting should only be performed on the starter battery installed in the engine compartment. Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Do not attempt to start the engine using a battery quick charge unit. If engine does not run after several unsuccessful starting attempts, have it checked at the nearest authorized Maybach Studio. Excessive unburned fuel generated by repeated failed starting attempts may damage the catalytic converter and may present a fire risk. Make sure the jumper cables do not have loose or missing insulation. Make sure the cable clamps do not touch any other metal part while the other end is still attached to a battery. Practical hints Jump starting Warning!  Start engine of the vehicle with the G charged battery and run at idle speed. Keep flames or sparks away from battery. Do not smoke.  Connect negative terminal 1 of the charged battery with negative terminal 3 of the discharged battery with the jumper cable. Clamp cable to charged battery 1 first. Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries ( page 362). Jump starting should only be performed on the starter battery. The starter battery is located in the engine compartment on the passenger side.  Make sure the two vehicles do not touch.  Turn off all electrical consumers, ex- cept hazard warning flashers or work lights.  Apply parking brake.  Shift gear selector lever to position P.  Open hood ( page 356).  Start the engine of the disabled vehi- cle. 1 Negative terminal of charged battery 2 Positive terminal of charged battery 3 Negative terminal of discharged battery 4 Positive terminal of discharged battery  Connect positive terminal 2 of the charged battery with positive terminal 4 of the discharged battery with the jumper cable. Clamp cable to charged battery 2 first. ! Now you can again turn on the electrical consumers. Do not turn on the lights under any circumstances.  Remove the jumper cables first from negative terminals 3 and 1 and then from positive terminals 4 and 2. You can now turn on the lights.  Have the starter battery checked at the nearest authorized Maybach Studio. Never invert the terminal connections. 477 Practical hints Towing the vehicle We recommend that Maybach vehicles be transported with all wheels off the ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly equipment. far as necessary to have the vehicle moved to a safe location where the recommended towing methods can be employed. ! ! Do not tow-start the vehicle. If the vehicle is towed with the front axle raised, the engine must be shut off (SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1). Otherwise, the ESP® will immediately be engaged and will apply the rear wheel brakes. ! Use flatbed or wheel lift/dolly equipment with SmartKey in starter switch turned to position 0. Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Towing with sling-type equipment over bumpy roads will damage radiator and supports. To prevent damage during transport, do not tie down vehicle by its chassis or suspension parts. Switch off the tow-away alarm ( page 117) and the automatic central locking ( page 195). When circumstances do not permit the recommended towing methods, the vehicle may be towed with all wheels on the ground or front wheels raised only so 478 When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground, the gear selector lever must be in position N and the SmartKey must be in starter switch position 2. When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground or the front axle raised, the vehicle may be towed only for distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). ! To be certain to avoid a possibility of damage to the transmission, however, we recommend the drive shaft be disconnected at the rear axle drive flange for any towing beyond a short tow to a nearby garage. Warning! G If circumstances require towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground, always tow with a tow bar if:
the engine will not run
there is a malfunction in the electrohydraulic brake system
there is a malfunction in the power supply or in the vehicle’s electrical system as that will be necessary to adequately control the towed vehicle. Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground, make sure the SmartKey is in starter switch position 2. If the SmartKey is left in starter switch position 0 for an extended period of time, it can no longer be turned in the switch. In this case, the steering is locked. To unlock, remove SmartKey from starter switch and reinsert. Practical hints Towing the vehicle i To signal turns while being towed with the hazard warning flasher in use, switch on the ignition and activate the combination switch for the left or right turn signal in the usual manner – only the selected turn signal will operate. Upon canceling the turn signal, the hazard warning flasher will operate again. Warning! G The electro-hydraulic brake system requires electrical power to operate. A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply or electrical system may impair brake system operation and switch it into its emergency operation mode. To brake, the driver must then apply significantly greater brake pedal pressure and depress the pedal much further to obtain the expected braking effect. If necessary, apply full pressure to the brake pedal. Brakes are only applied to the front wheels. Stopping distance is increased! Adapt your driving style accordingly. For more information, refer to “Electro-hydraulic brake system” ( page 112). With the engine not running, there is no power assistance for the brake and steering system. In this case, it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly. ! To prevent the vehicle door locks from locking, deactivate the automatic central locking ( page 195). The vehicle should only be towed using the properly installed towing eye bolt. Never attach tow cable, tow rope or tow rod to the vehicle chassis, frame or suspension parts. i If the battery is disconnected or discharged:
the SmartKey will not turn in the starter switch. For information, see “Batteries” ( page 471) and “Jump starting” ( page 476)
the gear selector lever will remain locked in position P When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground, please note the following: With the automatic central locking activated and the SmartKey in starter switch position 2, or KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button ( page 63) in position 2, the vehicle doors lock if the left front wheel as well as the right rear wheel are turning at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more. 479 Practical hints Towing the vehicle Installing towing eye bolt Front of vehicle To remove cover: Rear of vehicle  Pry off cover 1 using lower recess.  Lift cover off to reveal the threaded hole for towing eye bolt. The towing eye bolt is supplied with the tool kit (located in the storage compartment under the trunk floor).  Screw towing eye bolt in to its stop and tighten with lug wrench. To reinstall cover:  Fit cover 1 and snap into place. 1 Cover on right side of front bumper 1 Cover on right side of rear bumper To remove cover:  Pry off cover 1 using lower recess.  Fold cover down to reveal the thread- ed hole for towing eye bolt. The towing eye bolt is supplied with the tool kit (located in the storage compartment under the trunk floor).  Screw towing eye bolt in to its stop and tighten with lug wrench. To reinstall cover:  Fit cover 1 and snap into place. 480 Practical hints Fuses  Fuses Fuses are designed to protect the electrical circuits in your vehicle from a short circuit. If a fuse is blown, the component(s) and systems secured by that fuse will stop operating. The following aids are available to help you replace fuses ( page 482):
Fuse chart
Spare fuses
Fuse extractor Warning! G Only use fuses approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles and which have the specified amperage for the system in question. Using other fuses may cause an overload and lead to a fire, or cause damage to electrical components and/or systems. ! Never attempt to repair or bridge a blown fuse. Have the cause determined and remedied by an authorized Maybach Studio. Your vehicle’s electrical fuses are located in various fuse boxes:
In the engine compartment on the passenger-side ( page 482)
In the engine compartment on the driver’s side ( page 482)
In the dashboard on the passenger-side ( page 483)
In the trunk on the driver’s side ( page 483) ! Keep the fuse boxes free by contamination and wetness. Otherwise, electrical parts or systems could be damaged. 481 Practical hints Fuses Aids for replacing fuses Fuse chart The fuse chart is located in the vehicle tool kit in the trunk ( page 451). The amperages of the fuses are also given there. Fuse boxes in engine compartment There are two fuse boxes located in the engine compartment on the driver’s and front passenger side in front of the firewall (dividing wall between engine compartment and passenger compartment). Spare Fuses Spare Fuses are located in the vehicle tool kit in the trunk ( page 451). 2 Fuse box cover, passenger-side Fuse extractor Opening The fuse extractor is located in the vehicle tool kit in the trunk ( page 451).  Take crank out of vehicle document pouch.  Loosen retaining screws with crank. 1 Fuse box cover, driver’s side  Remove cover from fuse box. Closing  Re-attach cover to fuse box.  Make sure the cover fits correctly.  Tighten retaining screws with crank. 482 Practical hints Fuses Fuse box in passenger compartment The fuse box is located in the dashboard on the front passenger-side. Opening  Open the passenger door.  Insert flat, blunt object as a lever into Fuse box in the trunk The fuse box is located in the trunk behind the left-hand trim panel. the edge of the cover 1 at the position indicated by the arrow.  Loosen cover 1 from dashboard using lever.  Using your hands, pull cover 1 out and remove. Closing  Hook cover 1 into the opening at the front. 1 Cover ! Do not use sharp objects such as a screw driver to open the fuse box cover 1 in the dashboard, as this could damage it.  Press cover 1 back on until it engag- es. 1 Locking knob 2 Trim panel Opening  Turn locking knob 1 90°.  Pull trim panel 2 upward and remove it. Closing  Attach trim panel 2 into the opening at the top.  Turn locking knob 1 90°. 483 484 Technical data Parts service Warranty coverage Identification labels Layout of poly-V-belt drive Engine Rims and tires Electrical system Main dimensions and weights Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. 485 Technical data Parts service The “Technical data” section provides the necessary technical data for your vehicle. All authorized Maybach Studios maintain a stock of Genuine Maybach Parts required for maintenance and repair work. In addition, strategically located parts distribution centers provide quick and reliable parts service. Genuine Maybach Parts are subjected to stringent quality inspections. Each part has been specifically developed, manufactured or selected for and adapted to Maybach vehicles. Therefore, Genuine Maybach Parts should be installed. 486 ! The use of non-Genuine Maybach Parts and accessories not authorized by us for use on Maybach vehicles could damage the vehicle, which is not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty, or could compromise the vehicle’s durability or safety. Technical data Warranty coverage  Warranty coverage Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the warranties printed in the Service and Warranty Information booklet. Your authorized Maybach Studio will exchange or repair any defective parts originally installed in the vehicle in accordance with the terms of the following warranties:
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Emission System Warranty
Emission Performance Warranty
California, Maine, Massachusetts, and Vermont Emission Control Systems Warranty Replacement parts and accessories are covered by the Maybach Parts and Accessories warranties, copies of which are available at any Maybach Studio. Loss of Service and Warranty Information Booklet Should you lose your Service and Warranty Information booklet, have an authorized Maybach Studio arrange for a replacement. It will be mailed to you. 487 Technical data Identification labels 1 Certification label, includes Paintwork code (on driver’s B pillar) 2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) (located in the trunk) 3 Engine number (engraved on engine) 4 VIN, visible (lower edge of windshield) 5 Emission control information label, includes both federal and California certification exhaust emission standards Vacuum line routing diagram label i When ordering parts, please specify vehicle identification and engine numbers. 488 Technical data Layout of poly-V-belt drive  Layout of poly-V-belt drive 1 Automatic belt tensioner 2 Power steering pump 3 Air conditioning compressor 4 Crankshaft 5 Coolant pump 6 Generator (alternator) 7 Idler pulley 8 Air conditioning compressor 9 Idler pulley a Idler pulley b Idler pulley 489 Technical data Engine Model Maybach 57 (240.078) 1 Maybach 57 S (240.079) 1 Maybach 62 (240.178) 1 Engine 285 285 Mode of operation 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection No. of cylinders 12 12 Bore 3.23 in (82.00 mm) 3.25 in (82.60 mm) Stroke 3.43 in (87.00 mm) 3.66 in (93.00 mm) 364.9 cu in (5980 cm3) Total piston displacement 336.4 cu in (5513 Compression ratio 9:1 9:1 Output acc. to SAE J 1349 543 hp/5250 rpm 2 604 hp/4800-5100 rpm 2 (405 kW/5250 rpm) (450 kW/4800-5100 rpm) 664 lb-ft/2300–3000 rpm 738 lb-ft/2000–4000 rpm Maximum torque acc. to SAE J 1349 1 2 cm3) (900 Nm/2300–3000 rpm) (1000 Nm/2000–4000 rpm) Maximum engine speed 5950 rpm 6100 rpm Firing order 1-12-5-8-3-10-6-7-2-11-4-9 1-12-5-8-3-10-6-7-2-11-4-9 Poly-V-belt 2713 mm 2713 mm The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Maybach Studio for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment. Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating. 490 Technical data Rims and tires  Rims and tires ! ! i Only use tires which have been and tested and approved for your vehicle by us for use on Maybach vehicles. Tires approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles are developed to provide best possible performance in conjunction with the driving safety systems on your vehicle such as ABS or ESP®. Tires specially developed for your vehicle and tested and approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles can be identified by finding the following on the tire’s sidewall: Using tires other than those approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles can have detrimental effects, such as Further information on tires and rims is available at any authorized Maybach Studio. A placard with the recommended tire inflation pressures is located on the driver’s door B-pillar ( page 368). Some vehicles may have supplemental tire inflation pressure information for driving at high speeds ( page 374) or for vehicle loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition ( page 384). If such information is provided, it can be found on the placard located on the inside of the fuel filler flap. The tire inflation pressure should be checked regularly and should only be adjusted on cold tires. Follow tire manufacturer’s maintenance recommendation included with vehicle.
MO = Maybach Original equipment tires Using tires other than those approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles may result in damage that is not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty.
poor handling characteristics
increased noise
increased fuel consumption Moreover, tires and rims not approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles may, under load, exhibit dimensional variations and different tire deformation characteristics that could cause them to come into contact with the vehicle body or axle parts. Damage to the tires or the vehicle may be the result. 491 Technical data Rims and tires Same size tires Maybach 57 Maybach 57 S Maybach 62 1 Summer tires (radial-ply tires) 275/50 R19 112W XL (Extra Load) 275/45 R20 110Y XL (Extra Load) Wheel offset 2.64 in (67 mm) 2.64 in (67 mm) Rims (light alloy) 8 J x 19 8.5 J x 20 Winter tires1 (radial-ply tires) 275/50 R19 112H XL (Extra Load) M+S. 275/50 R19 112H XL (Extra Load) M+S. Wheel offset 2.64 in (67 mm) 2.64 in (67 mm) Rims (light alloy) 8 J x 19 8 J x 19 Maybach 57 Maybach 57 S Not available as factory equipment. Spare wheel Maybach 62 Summer tire (radial-ply tire) 275/50 R19 112W XL (Extra Load) 275/50 R19 112W XL (Extra Load) Wheel offset 2.64 in (67 mm) 2.64 in (67 mm) Rim (light alloy) 8 J x 19 8 J x 19 492 Technical data Electrical system  Electrical system Generator (alternator) 14 V/350 A Starter motor 12 V/1.7 kW Starter battery 12 V/40 Ah Electrical consumer battery 12 V/95 Ah Spark plugs NGK IFR 6 Q-G Electrode gap 0.028 in (0.7 mm) Tightening torque 15–22 lb-ft (20–30 Nm) 493 Technical data Main dimensions and weights Main dimensions Model Maybach 57 Maybach 57 S Maybach 62 Overall vehicle length 225.5 in (5728 mm) 225.5 in (5728 mm) 242.7 in (6165 mm) Overall vehicle width (exterior rear view mirrors folded out) 84.0 in (2134 mm) 84.0 in (2134 mm) 84.0 in (2134 mm) Overall vehicle height 61.9 in (1572 mm) 61.3 in (1557 mm) 61.9 in (1573 mm) Wheelbase 133.5 in (3390 mm) 133.5 in (3390 mm) 150.7 in (3827 mm) Track, front 65.9 in (1675 mm) 65.9 in (1675 mm) 65.9 in (1675 mm) Track, rear 66.7 in (1695 mm) 66.7 in (1695 mm) 66.7 in (1695 mm) Weights Roof load maximum no roof load Trunk load maximum 220 lbs (100 kg) ! To avoid potential damage to the roof, solar panel* or electrotransparent roof*, roof rails and any roofmounted devices must not be used. 494 Technical data Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.  Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. Vehicle components and their respective lubricants must match. Therefore use only products and approved by us. Capacities Model Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. Engine with oil filter 10.5 US qt (10.0 l) Approved engine oils Automatic transmission 7.9 US qt (7.5 l) MB Automatic Transmission Fluid Rear axle 2.1 US qt (2.0 l) Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90 Power steering approx. 1.45 (1.65 l) MB Power Steering Fluid (Pentosin CHF 11S) Front wheel hubs approx. 0.35 oz (10 g) each High temperature roller bearing grease Cooling system approx. 18 US qt (17.0 l) MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze Low temperature cooling system Maybach 57 Maybach 57 S Maybach 62 approx. 2.3 US qt (2.2 l) approx. 2.59 US qt (2.45 l) approx. 2.3 US qt (2.2 l) MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze Fuel tank including a reserve of 29.1 US gal (110.0 l) 3.7 US qt (14.0 l) Premium unleaded gasoline: Minimum Posted Octane 91 (average of 96 RON/86 MON) Air conditioning system Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system 1 Please refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet, or inquire at your Maybach Studio. R-134a refrigerant and special PAG lubricant oil (never R-12) 7.1 US qt (6.7 l) MB Windshield Washer Concentrate 1 Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “MB Summerfit” and water for temperatures above freezing point or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “MB Summerfit” and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze for temperatures below freezing point. Follow suggested mixing ratios ( page 501). 495 Technical data Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. Engine oils Engine oils are specifically tested for their suitability in our engines and durability for our service intervals. Therefore, only use approved engine oils and oil filters required for vehicles with Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada vehicles). For a listing of approved engine oils and oil filters, refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet, or contact an authorized Maybach Studio. ! Using engine oils and oil filters of specification other than those expressly required for the Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada vehicles), or changing of oil and oil filter at change intervals longer than those called for by the Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada vehicles) will result in engine damage not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. 496 Please follow Maintenance System (U.S vehicles) or FSS (Canada vehicles) recommendations. Failure to do so could result in engine damage not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. Engine oil additives Do not blend oil additives with engine oil. They may damage the engine. Damage or malfunctions resulting from blending oil additives are not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. Air conditioning refrigerant R-134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG lubricating oil are used in the air conditioning system. Never use R-12 (CFC) or mineral-based lubricating oil. Otherwise damage to the system will occur. Brake fluid During vehicle operation, the boiling point of the brake fluid is continuously reduced through the absorption of moisture from the atmosphere. Warning! G Under extremely strenuous operating conditions, this moisture content can lead to the formation of bubbles in the system, thus reducing the system’s efficiency. Therefore, the brake fluid must be replaced regularly. Refer to your vehicle’s Maintenance Booklet for replacement interval. Only brake fluid approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles is recommended. Your authorized Maybach Studio will provide you with additional information. Technical data Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. ! Premium unleaded gasoline Warning! G Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous. It burns violently and can cause serious injury. Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid inhaling fumes and skin contact, extinguish all smoking materials. Never allow sparks, flame or smoking materials near gasoline! To maintain the engine’s durability and performance, premium unleaded gasoline must be used. If premium unleaded is not available and low octane fuel is used, follow these precautions:
Have the fuel tank only partially filled with unleaded regular and fill up with premium unleaded as soon as possible.
Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceleration.
Do not exceed an engine speed of 3000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded with a light load such as two persons and no luggage.
Do not exceed 2/3 of maximum accelerator pedal position if the vehicle is fully loaded or operating in mountainous terrain. Fuel requirements Use only premium unleaded fuel
The octane number (posted at the pump) must be 91 min. It is an average of both the Research (R) octane number and the Motor (M) octane number: (R+M)/2. This is also known as the ANTI-KNOCK INDEX. Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates such as ethanol, IPA, IBA and TBA can be used provided the ratio of any one of these oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed 10%; MTBE must not exceed 15%. The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents. Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is not allowed. Gasohol, which contains 10% ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline, can be used. These blends must also meet all other fuel requirements, such as resistance to spark knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc. 497 Technical data Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. Gasoline additives A major concern among engine manufacturers is carbon build-up caused by gasoline. We recommend only the use of quality gasoline containing additives that prevent the build-up of carbon deposits. After an extended period of using fuels without such additives, carbon deposits can build up especially on the intake valves and in the combustion area, leading to engine performance problems such as:
Warm-up hesitation
Unstable idle
Knocking/pinging
Misfire
Power loss 498 In areas where carbon deposits may be encountered due to lack of availability of gasolines which contain these additives, we recommend only the use of additives approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles. Refer to Factory Approved Service Products Pamphlet for a listing of approved product(s). Follow directions on product label. Do not blend other fuel additives with fuel. This only results in unnecessary costs and may be harmful to the engine operation. Damage or malfunction resulting from poor fuel quality or from blending additional fuel additives other than those tested and approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles listed in the Factory Approved Service Products Pamphlet are not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. Technical data Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. Coolants The engine coolant is a mixture of water and anticorrosion/antifreeze, which provides:
Corrosion protection
Freeze protection
Boiling protection (by increasing the boiling point) The cooling system was filled at the factory with a coolant providing freeze protection to approximately –22°F (–30°C) and corrosion protection. If the antifreeze mixture is effective to –22°F (–30°C), the boiling point of the coolant in the pressurized cooling system is reached at approximately 266°F (130°C). The coolant solution must be used year round to provide the necessary corrosion protection and increase in the boil-over protection. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for replacement interval. Coolant system design and coolant used determine the replacement interval. The replacement interval published in the Maintenance Booklet is only applicable if MB 325.0 anticorrosion/antifreeze solution or other products approved by us for use on Maybach vehicles of equal specification (see Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet) are used to renew the coolant concentration or bring it back up to the proper level. To provide important corrosion protection, the solution must be at least 45% anticorrosion/antifreeze [equivalent to freeze protection to approximately –22°F (–30°C)]. If you use a solution that is more than 55% anticorrosion/antifreeze [freeze protection to approximately –49°F (–45°C)], the engine temperature will increase due to the lower heat transfer capability of the solution. Therefore, do not use more than this amount of anticorrosion/antifreeze. If the coolant level is low, water and MB 325.0 anticorrosion/antifreeze should be used to bring it up to the proper level (have cooling system checked for signs of leakage). Please make sure the mixture is in accordance with label instructions. The water in the cooling system must meet minimum requirements, which are usually satisfied by normal drinking water. If you are not sure about the water quality, consult an authorized Maybach Studio. 499 Technical data Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. Anticorrosion/antifreeze Your vehicle contains a number of aluminum parts. The use of aluminum components in motor vehicle engines necessitates that anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant used in such engines be specifically formulated to protect the aluminum parts. (Failure to use such anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant will result in a significantly shortened service life). Therefore, the following product is strongly recommended for use in your vehicle: MB 325.0 anticorrosion/ antifreeze agent. concentration checked. The coolant is also regularly checked each time you bring your vehicle to an authorized Maybach Studio for service. The anticorrosion/antifreeze quantities listed in the table below are in relation to total filling capacity. Before the start of the winter season (or once a year in hot southern regions), you should have the anticorrosion/antifreeze Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity Approximately freeze protection All models (main cooling system) –35°F (–37°C) –49°F (–45°C) 9.0 US qt (8.5 l) 9.9 US qt (9.4 l) Maybach 57, Maybach 62 (low temperature cooling system) 1.16 US qt (1.1 l) 1.27 US qt (1.2 l) Maybach 57 S (low temperature cooling system) 1.37 US qt (1.3 l) 500 1.27 US qt (1.2 l) Technical data Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. Windshield and headlamp washer system Both the windshield and headlamp washer systems are supplied from the windshield washer fluid reservoir. The windshield and headlamp washer fluid reservoir has a capacity of approximately 7.1 US qt (6.7 l).  Refill the reservoir with MB Wind- shield Washer Concentrate and water (or concentrate and commercially available pre-mixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze, depending on ambient temperatures). Warning! Windshield and headlamp washer fluid mixing ratio For temperatures above freezing point, use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “MB Summerfit” and water:
G Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may ignite and burn. You can be seriously burned. 1 part “MB Summerfit” to 100 parts water (1.34 floz [40 ml] “MB Summerfit” to 1 gallon [4.0 l] water) For temperatures below freezing point, use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “MB Summerfit” and commercially available pre-mixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze:
1 part “MB Summerfit” to 100 parts solvent (1.34 floz [40 ml] “MB Summerfit” to 1 gallon [4.0 l] solvent) 501 502 Technical terms ABS (Antilock Brake System) Prevents the wheels from locking up during braking so that the vehicle can continue to be steered. Accessory weight ( page 390) ADS (Adaptive Damping System) Automatically adapts the optimum suspension damping to prevailing driving conditions. Airmatic DC (Airmatic Dual Control) Automatically selects the optimum suspension tuning and ride height for your vehicle. Airmatic consists of three components:
Adaptive Damping System (->ADS)
Stiffness of spring
Vehicle level control Air pressure ( page 390) Alignment bolt Metal pin with thread. The centering pin is an aid used when changing a tire to align the wheel with the wheel hub. Aspect ratio ( page 390) BabySmartTM air bag deactivation system This system detects if a special system compatible child restraint seat is installed on the front passenger seat. The system will automatically deactivate the passenger front air bag when such a seat is properly installed (PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp located in the center console comes on and remains illuminated). BabySmartTM compatible child seats Special restraint system for children. The sensor system for the passenger seat prevents deployment of the passenger front air bag if a BabySmartTM compatible child seat is installed. See an authorized Maybach Studio for availability. Bar ( page 390) BAS (Brake Assist System) System for potentially reducing braking distances in emergency braking situations. The system is activated when it senses an emergency based on how fast the brake is applied. Bead ( page 390) 503 Technical terms Bi-Xenon headlamps Headlamps which use an electric arc as a light source and produce a more intense light than filament headlamps. Bi-Xenon headlamps produce low beam and high beam. CAN system (Controller Area Network) Data bus network serving to control vehicle functions such as door locking or windshield wiping. Cockpit All instruments, switches, buttons and indicator/warning lamps in the passenger compartment needed for vehicle operation and monitoring. Cold tire inflation pressure ( page 390) 504 COMAND (Cockpit Management and Data System) Information and operating center for vehicle sound and communications systems, including the radio and navigation system, as well as other equipment (CD changer, telephone, etc.). Control system The control system is used to call up vehicle information and to change component settings. Information and messages appear in the multifunction display. The driver uses the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel to navigate through the system and to adjust settings. Cruise control Driving convenience system that automatically maintains the vehicle speed set by the driver. Curb weight ( page 390) Distronic** A driving convenience cruise control system which helps the driver maintain a pre-selected speed:
If there is no vehicle directly ahead, the system operates in the same way as conventional ->cruise control.
If a slower moving vehicle is ahead, Distronic will reduce your vehicle speed to the extent permitted by reduced throttle and up to 20% braking power to maintain the preset minimum following distance. DOT (Department of Transportation) ( page 390) Technical terms ELCODE (Electronic Code System) System that electronically checks whether a person entering or driving the vehicle is authorized to do so. It is part of the Maybach anti-theft protection program. Electro-hydraulic brake system Electronically controlled hydraulic braking system for increased braking safety and comfort. Engine number The number set by the manufacturer and placed on the cylinder block to uniquely identify each engine produced. Engine oil viscosity Measurement for the inner friction (viscosity) of the oil at different temperatures. The higher the temperature an oil can tolerate without becoming thin, or the lower the temperature it can tolerate without becoming viscous, the better the viscosity. ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Improves vehicle handling and directional stability. ETD (Emergency Tensioning Device) Device which deploys in certain frontal and rear collisions exceeding the system’s threshold to tighten the seat belts. ->SRS FSS (Canada vehicles) (Flexible Service System) Maintenance service indicator in the multifunction display that informs the driver when the next vehicle maintenance service is due. FSS evaluates engine temperature, oil level, vehicle speed, engine speed, distance driven and the time elapsed since your last maintenance service, and calls for the next maintenance service accordingly. GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) ( page 390) Gear range Number of gears which are available to the automatic transmission for shifting. The automatic gear shifting process can be adapted to specific operating conditions using the gear selector lever. GPS (Global Positioning System) Satellite-based system for relaying geographic location information to and from vehicles equipped with special receivers. Employs DVD digital maps for navigation. GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) ( page 390) GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) ( page 391) 505 Technical terms Instrument cluster The displays and indicator/warning lamps in the driver’s field of vision, including the tachometer, speedometer and fuel gauge. KEYLESS-GO** System for entering and operating the vehicle with only carrying the SmartKey along. Locking knob Knob on the door which indicates whether the door is locked or unlocked. Pushing the locking knob down on an individual door from inside will lock that door. Kickdown Depressing the accelerator past the point of resistance shifts the transmission down to the lowest possible gear. This very quickly accelerates the vehicle and should not be used for normal acceleration needs. Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) Maintenance service indicator in the multifunction display that informs the driver when the next vehicle maintenance service is due. The Maintenance System in your vehicle tracks distance driven and the time elapsed since your last maintenance service, and calls for the next maintenance service accordingly. Kilopascal (kPa) ( page 391) Maximum load rating ( page 391) Maximum loaded vehicle weight ( page 391) Maximum tire inflation pressure ( page 391) 506 Maybach Assistance Center Maybach customer service center which can help with any questions about
operating the vehicle
Maybach products
Maybach services Maybach Relationship Manager Your personal contact person at Maybach Studios for any questions you might have regarding your Maybach. Technical terms Memory function Used to store three individual seat, steering wheel and mirror positions. Multifunction steering wheel Steering wheel with buttons for operating the control system. MON (Motor Octane Number) The Motor Octane Number for gasoline as determined by a standardized method. It is an indication of a gasoline’s ability to resist undesired detonation (knocking). The average of both the MON (Motor Octane Number) and ->RON (Research Octane Number) is posted at the pump, also known as ANTI-KNOCK INDEX. Normal occupant weight ( page 391) Multifunction display The display field in the instrument cluster used to present information provided by the control system. Overspeed range Engine speeds within the red marking on the tachometer dial. Avoid this engine speed range, as it may result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Maybach Limited Warranty. Parktronic System which uses visual and acoustic signals to assist the driver during parking maneuvers. PAS (Parking Assist System) The PAS is an optical parking aid. It shows you the area behind the vehicle on the ->COMAND display. In addition, the PAS contains guide lines to help you with reverse parking and parallel parking. Poly-V-belt drive Drives engine-components (alternator, AC compressor, etc.) from the engine. Power train Collective term designating all components used to generate and transmit motive power to the drive axles, including:
Engine
Clutch/torque converter
Transmission
Transfer case
Drive shaft
Differential
Axle shafts/axles Production options weight ( page 391) Program mode selector switch Used to switch the automatic transmission between standard operation S and comfort operation C. 507 Technical terms PSI (Pounds per square inch) ( page 391) Recommended tire inflation pressure ( page 391) REST (Residual engine heat utilization) Feature that uses the engine heat stored in the coolant to heat the vehicle interior for a short time after the engine has been turned off. Restraint systems Seat belts, belt tensioners, air bags and child restraint systems. As independent systems, their protective functions complement one another. Rim ( page 391) 508 RON (Research Octane Number) The Research Octane Number for gasoline as determined by a standardized method. It is an indication of a gasoline’s ability to resist undesired detonation (knocking). The average of both the ->MON (Motor Octane Number) and RON (Research Octane Number) is posted at the pump, also known as ANTI-KNOCK INDEX. Shift lock When the vehicle is parked, this lock prevents the transmission gear selector lever from being moved out of position P without SmartKey turned/ KEYLESS-GO** start/stop button pressed and brake pedal depressed. Sidewall ( page 391) SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) Card provided by the GSM telephone service provider. Necessary for accessing a mobile communication network. SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Seat belts, emergency tensioning device and air bags. Though independent systems, they are closely interfaced to provide effective occupant protection. Tele Aid System (Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand) The Tele Aid system consists of three types of response: automatic and manual emergency, roadside assistance and information. Tele Aid is initially activated by completing a subscriber agreement and placing an acquaintance call. The Tele Aid system is operational provided that the vehicle’s battery is charged, properly connected, not damaged and cellular and GPS coverage is available. Technical terms Telematics A combination of the terms “telecommunications” and “informatics”. Tightening torque Force times lever arm (e.g. a lug wrench) with which threaded fasteners such as wheel bolts are tightened. TIN (Tire Identification Number) ( page 392) Tire load rating ( page 392) Tire ply composition and material used ( page 392) Treadwear indicators ( page 392) Vehicle maximum load on the tire ( page 392) Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards ( page 392) VIN (Vehicle Identification Number) The number set by the manufacturer and placed on the body to uniquely identify each vehicle produced. Vehicle capacity weight ( page 392) Vehicle level control The ground clearance of the vehicle is automatically controlled according to a selected setting and speed. The driver can set the ground clearance manually, for example, on very rough roads. Voice control system Voice control system for car phones, portable cell phones and audio systems (radio, CD, etc.). Tire speed rating ( page 392) Traction ( page 392) Tread ( page 392) 509 510 Index A ABS 503 Indicator lamp 25, 107, 411 Messages in display 419 ABS/ESP® Warning lamp 410 Accelerator position, Automatic transmission 201 Accessory weight 390 Accident 82 Active headlamps 155 Messages in display 439 Adaptive Damping System see ADS Additional turn signals 459 ADS 263, 503 Air cleaner see Air filter Air conditioning refrigerant 495, 496 Air conditioning system see Automatic climate control Air conditioning, Cooling 221, 231 Air distribution 216, 230 Air filter Message in display 419 Air pressure 390 Air recirculation mode 218 Air vents 213, 223, 225 Grille with storage box 282 Air volume 216, 231 Airbags 89 BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system 101, 503 Children 90 Front 93 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp 101, 416 Safety guidelines 92 Side impact 94 Window curtain 94 Airmatic DC 263, 503 Messages in display 426 Setting vehicle level 264 Suspension tuning 263 Alarm system see Anti-theft alarm system Alignment bolt (vehicle tool kit) 451, 469, 503 Anticorrosion/antifreeze 495, 499, 500 Antiglare, Rear view mirrors 206 Antilock Brake System see ABS Anti-theft alarm systems 115 Immobilizer 115 Indicator lamp 116 Tow-away alarm 117 Aquaplaning see Hydroplaning Armrest 290 Ashtrays 298 Aspect ratio 390 Audio menu 179 Auto-dimming, Rear view mirrors 206 Automatic central locking 138 Activating/deactivating, Control system 195 Automatic climate control 212 Air conditioning refrigerant 495, 496 Air conditioning, Cooling 221, 231 Air distribution 216, 230 Air recirculation mode 218 Air vents 213, 223, 225 Air volume 216, 231 Charcoal filter 219 Control panel, Front 214 Control panel, Rear 228 Front defroster 217 Maximum cooling MAXCOOL 217 Overview of front passenger compartment 213 Overview of rear passenger compartment Maybach 57 224 Maybach 62 226 Rear window defroster 211 Residual engine heat and ventilation 222 Setting the temperature 216, 229 Automatic headlamp mode 156 511 Index Automatic lighting control, Interior lighting 162 Automatic locking when driving 138 Automatic transmission 197 Accelerator position 201 Driving tips 201 Emergency operation, Limp-Home Mode 205 Gear ranges 202 Gear selector lever position 75, 197, 199 Gear shifting malfunctions 205 Kickdown 201 Manual (One-touch) gearshifting 204 Program mode selector switch 28, 29 Shift program mode selector switch 203 Transmission fluid level 360 Warning sounds (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO**) 85 AUX sockets 290, 292 512 B BabySmartTM Airbag deactivation system 101, 503 Compatible child seats 101, 503 Self-test 101 Backrest Multicontour seats 148 Power seats 66, 142, 143, 147 Backrest supports Lumbar region 149 Shoulder region 149 Backup lamps Replacing bulbs 459 Bar 390 BAS 108, 503 Batteries, SmartKey Checking battery condition 122 Replacing 456 Batteries, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** Checking battery condition 128 Replacing 456 Batteries, vehicle 362, 471 Charge socket (Battery for electrical consumers) 306 Charging 474 Disconnecting 473 For electrical consumers 471 For starter 471 Jump starting 476 Reconnecting 475 Reinstalling 474 Removing 474 Bead 390 Beverage holder see Cup holder Bi-Xenon headlamps see Headlamps Bottle holder 296 Brake Assist System see BAS Brake fluid 496 Brake warning lamp 414 Checking 355 Message in display 431 Brake lamp High mounted 459 Messages in display 442 Replacing bulbs 459 Brake pads Message in display 429 Brake warning lamp 25, 414 Brakes 344 Warning lamp 414 Break-in the vehicle 342 Bulbs, replacing see Replacing bulbs Index C California retail buyers and lessees, important notice for 11 Can holder see Cup holder CAN system 504 Capacities and recommended fuel/ lubricants 495 Cargo area see Trunk Cargo tie-down hooks 280 Carpet, Cleaning and care of 406 Catalytic converter 351 CD changer Compartment for 290, 292 Central locking Automatic 195 Locking/unlocking from inside 139 Central locking/unlocking switches 139, 140 Certification label 488 Champagne flute holder 296 Setting down champagne flutes 297 Charcoal filter 219 Children in the vehicle 98 Airbags 90 BabySmartTM compatible child seat 101 Blocking of rear window operation 105 Indicator lamp, PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF 101 Infant and child restraint systems 98 LATCH-type child seat anchors 103 Override switch 105 Tether attachment points 102 Cigarette lighter 299 Clock 172 In the rear 33, 35, 37, 39 Instrument cluster 25 See separate operating instructions Cloth upholstery, Cleaning and care of 407 Cockpit 22, 504 COMAND see separate operating instructions Combination switch 79, 80, 159 Control system 173, 504 Control system menus Audio menu 179 Distronic** menu 184 Navigation menu 184 Settings 187 Standard display 178 Telephone 181 Trip computer 185 Vehicle status message memory 186 Control system submenus Convenience 195 Instrument cluster 190 Lighting 191 Vehicle Controller Area Network see CAN system Convenience submenu Setting automatic locking 195 Coolant 361, 499 Adding 361 Anticorrosion/antifreeze mixing ratio and quantity 500 Capacities 495, 500 Checking coolant level 361 Messages in display 432, 433 Temperature 352 Temperature gauge 25, 170 Warning lamp 433 513 Index Cornering lamp Messages in display 441 Replacing bulbs 459, 462 Courtesy lighting 168 Cruise control 248, 504 Cruise control lever 256 Cup holder 27, 295 Rear Cleaning 406 Curb weight 390, 504 Curtains Partition curtain* 314 Rear side windows* 309 Rear window 307 D Daytime running lamp mode 157 Setting 191 Deep water see Standing water Defrosting, Rear 211 Delayed switch-off Exterior lamps 193 Interior lighting 194 Department of Transportation see DOT Difficulties While driving 82 While starting 76 Digital clock see Clock Digital speedometer 178 514 Dimensions, Vehicle 494 Direction of rotation, Tires 367 Displays Digital speedometer 178 Maintenance service indicator 396 Messages in display 419 Multifunction display 173 Outside temperature 25, 171 Showing malfunctions 187 Symbol messages 426 Text messages 419 Vehicle status messages 417 Vehicle system settings, Control system 187 Distance to empty (Range), Trip computer 186 Distronic** 251, 504 Activating 256 Cleaning system sensor 403 Deactivating 258 Distance warning function** 259 Driving hints 260 Menu 184, 255 Messages in display 421 Sensor cover 403 Warning and indicator lamps 254 Warning sounds 254 Door Closing the rear doors automatically from the inside (Maybach 62) 130 Entry lamps 168 Inside door handle 130 Inside door handle, Front 31 Inside door handle, Rear (Maybach 57) 57 Inside door handle, Rear (Maybach 62) 58 Locking, SmartKey 86 Locking, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** 86 Message in display 435 Opening from inside 130 Power closing assist for doors 138 Remote door unlock (Tele Aid) 333 Unlocking the driver’s door, Mechanical key 452 Unlocking, SmartKey 60 Unlocking, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** 61 Door control panel In the rear Maybach 57 57 Maybach 62 58 Index Door handle Lock button (KEYLESS-GO**) 86 DOT 390 Drink holder see Cup holder Drinking and driving 343 Driving 72 Abroad 350 Hydroplaning 347 In winter 349 Instructions 343 Problems 82 Safety systems 107 Systems 248 Through standing water Tips, Automatic transmission 201 With Distronic** 260 Driving safety systems ABS 107 BAS 108 Electro-hydraulic brake system 112 ESP® 109, 505 Driving systems Airmatic DC 263 Cruise control 248 Distronic** 251 Parktronic 267 Vehicle level control 264 DVD player Compartment for 41, 45, 47, 290, 292 Storage compartment for 43 E Easy-entry/exit feature 69, 196 ELCODE 505 Electrical fuses see Fuses Electrical outlets see Power outlets Electrical system, Technical data 493 Electro-hydraulic brake system 505 Messages in display 429, 430 Self-check 113 Warning lamp 112 Electronic Stability Program see ESP® Electrotransparent roof lighting* 167 Electrotransparent roof* 245 Cleaning 408 Lowering panel 408 Making opaque/transparent 246, 247 Opening/closing screen 246, 247 Operating from the cockpit 245 Operating from the rear 246 Operating the screen 30, 245 Emergency calls Tele Aid calls 327 Emergency operation (Limp-Home Mode) 205 Emergency operations Locking/unlocking the vehicle 452 Power tilt/sliding sunroof, Manual operation 454 Remote door unlock 333 Trunk, Releasing from inside 136 Trunk, unlocking 453 Emergency tensioning device see ETD Emergency, In case of Battery, Jump starting 476 First aid kit 451 Flat tire, Changing 466 Fuses 481 Hazard warning flasher 161 Instrument cluster, Indicator lamps 410 Roadside Assistance 12 Roadside Assistance (Tele Aid) 330 Towing the vehicle 478 Emission control 351 Emission control information label 488 Emission control system warranties 10 515 Index Engine Belt layout 489 Cleaning 401 Compartment 356 Malfunction indicator lamp 25, 415 Number 490, 505 Oils 496 Starting with KEYLESS-GO** 63 Starting with SmartKey 62 Tachometer 25 Technical data 490 Turning off with KEYLESS-GO** 85 Turning off with SmartKey 84 Engine coolant see Coolant Engine oil 357, 496 Adding 360 Additives 496 Changing 496 Checking level 357, 358 Consumption 357 Display messages 437 Filler neck 360 Messages in display 359, 437 Recommended engine oils and oil filters 496 Viscosity 505 Engine oil level see Oil level 516 ESP® 109, 505 Messages in display 410 Warning lamp 25, 109, 410 ETD 97, 505 Safety guidelines 92 Exterior rear view mirrors 70, 206, 209 Parking position 154, 208 External communication (special order equipment) 317 F Filler neck, Engine oil 360 First aid kit 451 Flat tire 466 Jacking up the vehicle 467 Lowering the vehicle 470 Mounting the spare wheel 466 Preparing the vehicle 466, 467 Speed limitation 378 Flexible Service System see FSS Fluids Automatic transmission fluid 360 Brake fluid 496 Capacities 495 Engine coolant 361, 495 Engine oil 357, 495, 496 Power steering fluid 495 Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system 495, 501 Fog lamps 158, 459 Messages in display 440 Replacing bulbs 459 Folding table* 41, 43, 302 Front airbags 93 Front lamps see headlamps Front passenger front airbag 93 Front passenger front airbag off indicator lamp 101 Front seat head restraints see Head restraints FSS (Canada vehicles) 396, 505 Fuel 354 Additives 498 Capacity, Fuel tank 495 Filling the tank 353 Fuel filler flap and cap 353 Fuel reserve warning lamp 25, 410 Premium unleaded gasoline 354 Requirements, Octane rating 497 Fuel filler flap 353 Locking 353 Unlocking 353 Fuel reserve warning lamp 25, 410 Fuel tank Capacity 495 Filler flap 353 Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. Capacities 495 Index Fuse box 483 Fuses 481 Aids for replacing fuses 481 Fuse box in engine compartment 482 Fuse box in passenger compartment 483 Fuse box in trunk 483 Fuse chart 451 Fuse extractor 451 Replacing 482 Spare fuses 451 G Garage door opener 30, 335 Gasoline see Fuel GAWR 390 Gear range 505 Automatic transmission 202 Limiting 202 Shifting into optimal 204 Gear selector lever 75, 197 Cleaning 406 Lock 75 Message in display 423 Position 199 Position indicator 198 Global Positioning System see GPS Glove box 223, 283 Good visibility 206 GPS 326, 505 Gross Axle Weight Rating see GAWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating see GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight see GVW GVW 390 GVWR 391 H Hands-free microphone 30 Hard plastic trim items, Cleaning 406 Hazard warning flasher 161 Head restraints Adjusting 142, 143 Front seat 67 Rear seats 141 Headlamp cleaning system 23, 206, 355, 363 Headlamp switch-off delay see Delayed switch-off, Exterior lamps Headlamps 156 Automatic headlamp mode 156 Bi-Xenon 459, 504 Cleaning lenses 402 Cleaning system 206, 363, 501 High beam see High beam flasher High beam see High beam headlamps Messages in display 439, 440, 441, 442, 443 Replacing bulbs 460 Switch 78 Headliner and shelf below rear window, Cleaning and care of 407 Headliner lamps and pillar uplights* 167 Lighting 51, 52 Headphone jacks 41, 43, 45, 47, 290, 292 Headphones Storage compartments In rear doors 285, 286 Heated seats 150 Heated steering wheel 318 Lever 23 Height adjustments Vehicle level 264 High beam flasher 159 High beam headlamps Indicator lamp 25 Messages in display 440 Switching 79 Switching on 159 High mounted brake lamp 459 Hood 356 Message in display 437 Opening 356 Horn 23 517 Index HVAC see Automatic climate control Hydroplaning 347 I Identification labels 488 Identification Number, Vehicle (VIN) 488 Ignition 62, 75 Immobilizer 115 Indicator lamps see Lamps, indicator and warning Infant and child restraint systems see Children in the vehicle Inflation pressure see Tires Inside door handle 130 Instrument cluster 24, 169, 506 Cleaning 405 Illumination brightness 169 Lamps 410 Messages in display see Multifunction display Instrument lighting see Instrument cluster, Illumination brightness Instrument panel see Instrument cluster Instruments and controls see Cockpit Interior lighting Delayed switch-off 194 Front 162 Rear 163 518 Interior rear view mirror 70 Auto-dimming 206 Interior storage spaces see Storage compartments J Jack 451, 468 Jacking up the vehicle 467 Jump starting 476 K Key, Mechanical 452 Key, SmartKey 60, 120 Battery check lamp 123, 128 Changing the batteries 456 Factory setting 122 Locking/unlocking 60 Locking/unlocking, Global setting 122 Locking/unlocking, Selective setting 122 Loss of 124 Messages in display 439 Opening and closing the power tilt/ sliding sunroof 236 Opening and closing the power windows 236 Opening the trunk 123 Positions in starter switch 62 Remote control 120 Starting the engine 75 Turning off the engine 84 Key, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** Locking/unlocking, Global setting 127 Key, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** 124, 506 Battery check lamp 128 Factory setting 127 Locking the vehicle 129 Locking/unlocking, Global setting 127 Locking/unlocking, Selective setting 127 Loss of 129 Messages in display 438 Opening and closing the power tilt/ sliding sunroof 236 Opening and closing the power windows 236 Opening the trunk 129 Remote control 124 Starting the engine 63 Turning off the engine 85 Kickdown 201, 506 Kilopascal 391 Index L Labels 488 Certification 488 Emission control information 488 Vacuum line routing diagram label 488 Lamp sensor Message in display 439 Lamps, exterior Message in display 439 Rear 459 Lamps, indicator and warning ABS 25, 411 Anti-theft alarm systems 116 Battery (SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO**) 128 Battery (SmartKey) 123 Brakes 25, 414 CHECK ENGINE 415 Coolant 432 Distronic** 25, 254, 411 Electro-hydraulic brake system 112 Engine diagnostics 415 Engine malfunction 25, 415 ESP® 25, 109, 410 Fog lamps 155 Fuel reserve 410 High beam headlamp 25 Instrument cluster 410 Parking lamps 155 Parktronic 269 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF 27, 416 Restraint system 25 Seat belt telltale 25 Seat belts 412 SRS 89 Tire inflation pressure 25, 412, 445 Tow away alarm 116 Turn signals 25 Language, Setting 190 LATCH-type child seat anchors see Children in the vehicle Leather upholstery, Cleaning and care of 407 Level control Airmatic DC 266 Level control system Airmatic DC 263 License plate lamp Messages in display 442 Replacing bulbs 459, 463 Light alloy wheels, Cleaning 405 Light sensor 439 Lighter see Cigarette lighter Lighting, Exterior and interior 155 Limp-Home Mode 205 Loading see Vehicle loading Locator lighting 157 Lock button Door handle 86 SmartKey 120 SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** 124 Trunk 129 Locking knob 130, 506 Loss of Service and Warranty Information Booklet 487 SmartKey 124 SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** 129 Low beam headlamps 155 Messages in display 440 Replacing bulbs 459 Switching on 78 Lowering Vehicle 470 Lubricants 495 519 Index M Maintenance 12, 396 Calling up service indicator display 397 Clearing service indicator message 397 FSS (Canada vehicles) 396 Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) 396 Resetting service indicator 398 Service indicator 396 Service term exceeded 397 Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) 396, 506 Manual headlamp mode see Headlamps Massage function (PULSE, Multicontour seats) 149 Maximum load rating, Tires 391 Maximum loaded vehicle weight 391 Maximum tire inflation pressure 391 Maybach Assistance Center 506 Maybach battery charger* 306 Maybach Relationship Manager 506 Maybach 62 with partition* Storage pocket 39, 290 Maybach 62 without partition* Storage pocket 290 520 Mechanical key 452 Loss of 124, 129 Memory function 152, 507 Menus see Control system menus Messages in display see Multifunction display messages Microphone External communication 317 Hands-free 30 Mirrors 70 Adjusting 70 Auto-dimming 206 Exterior rear view mirror parking position 208 Exterior rear view mirrors 70 Interior rear view mirror 70 Mobile phone see Telephone MON 354, 507 Motor Octane Number see MON MP3-CD operation Selecting tracks 180 Multicontour seats 148, 149 Multifunction display 25, 26, 173, 174, 178, 507 Selecting language 190 Standard display 177, 178 Multifunction display messages 419 ABS 419 Air filter 419 Airmatic DC 426 Battery 419, 427, 428 Brake fluid 431 Brake lamps 442 Brake pads 429 Check engine 415 Coolant 433 Coolant level 432 Cruise control 435 Distronic** 421 Doors 435 Electro-hydraulic brake system 429, 430 Engine oil 358, 436, 437 Engine oil level 437 ESP® 421, 422 Fog lamps 440, 442 Fuel cap 444 Gear selector lever 423 Headlamps 439, 440, 441, 442, 443 Hood 437 Parking brake 428 Power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 57) 443 Seat belts 443 SmartKey 439 SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** 438 Steering oil 444 Tele Aid 423 Index Tires 424–425, 445–450 Trunk 444 Washer fluid 444 Multifunction steering wheel 23, 26, 174, 507 Button operation 174 N Navigation system Operating 184 See separate COMAND operating instructions Navigation system DVD drive 293 Neutral gear position 75, 199 New vehicle break-in 342 Night security illumination 157, 193 Non-smokers equipment* 301 Normal occupant weight 391 Number, vehicle identification (VIN) 488 O Occupant distribution 391 Occupant safety 88 Airbags 89 Children and airbags 90 Children in the vehicle 98 Fastening the seat belts 72 Infant and child restraint systems 102 LATCH-type child seat anchors 103 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp 101 Seat belts 72, 94 Odometer 25, 173 Oil see Engine oil One-touch gearshifting 204 Operating safety 16 Ornamental moldings, Cleaning 402 Outside microphone 317 Outside temperature indicator 25, 33, 35, 37, 39, 171 Overdue maintenance service 397 Overhead control panel 30 Overspeed range, engine 507 P Paintwork, Cleaning 400 Panic alarm 106 Panic button 106 Parking 83, 346 Parking Assist System (PAS) 272, 507 Camera 272, 404 Cleaning of the camera lens 404 Parallel parking 276 Parallel parking button 28, 29 Reverse parking (back-in parking) 275 Switching on 274 Parking brake 83 Message in display 428 Parking lamps 155 Messages in display 441, 443 Replacing bulbs 459, 461 Parking position Exterior rear view mirrors 154, 208 Gear position 75, 199 Parktronic 267, 507 Activating/deactivating 270 Cleaning system sensors 403 Malfunctioning 271 Minimum distance 268 Range of the sensors 267 Sensors 267 Warning indicator 23, 41, 43, 45, 47, 269 Warning sound 271 Partition* 312 Opening/Closing 313 Parts service 486 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF Indicator lamp 27, 101, 416 Passenger compartment 350 Fuse box 483 Interior rear view mirror 70 Passenger safety see Occupant safety Passenger seat Adjusting from the rear 57 521 Index Pedals 343 Plastic and rubber parts, Cleaning 405 Poly-V-belt drive 489, 507 Layout 489 Power assistance 344 Power closing assist for doors and trunk lid 138 Power folding exterior rear view mirrors 208 Power outlets 305 Power tilt/sliding sunroof 237 Message in display 443 Power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 57) Message in display 443 Opening/closing 237 Opening/closing in an emergency 454 Stopping 239 Synchronizing 239 Power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 62) Message in display 443 Opening/closing 240, 242 Opening/closing in an emergency 455 Operating from cockpit 241 Operating from the rear passenger compartment 242 Stopping 242, 244 Synchronizing 244 522 Power train 507 Power washer 400 Power windows 233 Cleaning 404 Operating 233 Rear door window, Blocking operation 105 Synchronizing 235 Practical hints 410 Premium unleaded gasoline 497 Problems While driving 82 With vehicle 17 Product information 9 Production options weight 391 Program mode selector switch 507 Automatic shift program 203 PSI 391 PULSE function (Massage function) 149 Push-start see Tow-start R Radial-ply tires Summer tires 492 Radio Selecting stations 179 Selecting stations, Satellite radio (USA only) 179 Radio transmitters 350 Range (distance to empty) 186 Reading lamps Front 162 Rear 163 Rear bench seat Maybach 57 with rear center seat* 44 Maybach 62 with rear center seat* 46 Rear center console 48 Maybach 57 48, 49 Maybach 62 with electrotransparent roof* 54, 55 Maybach 62 with power tilt/sliding sunroof 51, 52 Rear door windows Blocking operation 105 Rear fog lamp see Fog lamps Rear lamps see Tail lamps Rear passenger compartment Control panel 32 Maybach 57 32, 34 Maybach 62 36 Maybach 62 with partition* 38 Maybach 62 without partition* 36 Rear seat head restraints see Head restraints Index Rear seats 141 Adjusting Head restraint tilt 141 Adjustment 141 Extending and retracting rear seat head restraints 145 Rear view mirrors see Mirrors Rear window curtain 307 Rear window defroster 211 Recommended tire inflation pressure 391 Recovery services, Stolen vehicle (Tele Aid) 334 Refrigerant, Air conditioning 496 Refrigerator** 303 Cleaning 400 Controlling temperature 304 Opening 304 Rear center armrest 290 Switching on/off 304 Refueling 353 Regular checks 355 Remote control SmartKey 120 SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** 124 Remote door unlock 333 Remote rear door closing 131 Remote trunk opening/closing switch 132 Replacing bulbs 458 Additional turn signals 460 Backup bulbs 460 Brake lamp 460 Cornering lamp 462 Fog lamps 460 Front turn signal bulb 463 High beam flasher bulb 461 High mounted brake lamp 460 License plate lamp 463 Parking lamps 461 Side marker bulb 463 Standing lamps 461 Turn signal lamps 459 Reporting safety defects 18 Research Octane Number see RON Reset button, In instrument cluster 169, 188 Residual engine heat and ventilation 222, 508 REST see Residual engine heat and ventilation Restraint system See Children in the vehicle See SRS Reverse gear position 75, 199 Rims 391, 492 Rims (light alloy) 492 Roadside Assistance 12, 330 RON 354, 508 Rubber parts, Cleaning 405 S Safety Driving safety systems 107 Occupant 88 Reporting defects 18 Safety belts see Seat belts Satellite radio (USA only) 179 Seat belts 94 Children in the vehicle 98 Cleaning 407 Fastening 72 Force limiter 97 Message in display 443 Proper use of 74, 96 Safety guidelines 92 Telltale 25, 412 Warning sounds 94 Seating capacity 369 523 Index Seats 65 Adjustment 66 Adjustment, Rear seat (Maybach 57) 141 Adjustment, Rear seat (Maybach 62) 143 Heating 150 Memory function 153 Multicontour 148 Setting from rear 147 Ventilation* 151 Securing cargo 280 Self-test BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system 101 Tele Aid 326 Service and warranty information 10 Service intervals see Maintenance, Service indicator Service life, Tires 365 Service see Maintenance Service system see FSS (Canada vehicles) or Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) Service, Parts 486 Settings Control system menus 177 Control system submenus 177 Factory, SmartKey 122 Factory, SmartKey with 524 KEYLESS-GO** 127 Individual, SmartKey 122 Individual, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** 127 Individual, Vehicle 187 Resetting all, Control system 188 Selective, SmartKey 122 Selective, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** 127 Shelf below rear window, Cleaning and care of 407 Shift lock 508 Shift program mode 203 Shifting Gear selector lever positions 199 Into optimal gear range (automatic transmission) 204 Side impact airbags 94 Side marker lamps 459 Cleaning lenses 402 Messages in display 441 Replacing bulbs 459, 463 Side windows see Power windows Sidewall 391 SmartKey see Key, SmartKey SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** see Key, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO** Snow chains 395 Snow tires 395 Solar panel* 232 Spare fuses 451 Spare wheel 492 Mounting 466 Speed limitation With flat tire 378 Speed settings Cruise control 250 Distronic** 256, 257 Speedometer 25, 253 In the rear 33, 35, 37, 39 SRS 88, 508 Indicator lamp 25, 413 Message in display 423 Standing lamps 155 Replacing bulbs 459 Standing water, Driving through 350 Starter battery 471 Starter switch 23 Positions 62 Starting difficulties, Engine 76 Starting, Engine 74 Steering column 68 Steering gear oil Message in display 444 Index Steering wheel 68 Adjusting 68 Buttons 174 Cleaning 406 Heated 318 Stolen Vehicle Recovery services 334 Stopping Power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 57) 239 Power tilt/sliding sunroof (Maybach 62) 242 Windows 235 Storage compartment/drawer Between the front seats (Maybach 62 with partition*) 287 Storage compartments 282 Armrest, Front 301 Between rear seats 290 For wireless surround sound headphones 285, 286 Between the front seats (Maybach 62 with partition*) 287 Compartment for the front telephone 284 For CD changer 290, 292 For DVD player 290, 292 Front doors 285 Glove box 283 Rear center armrest 301 Rear center console 287 Rear doors, Maybach 57 285 Rear doors, Maybach 62 286 Refrigerator** 290 Telephone 284, 290 Under the driver’s seat 286 With navigation system DVD drive 293 Storage pocket Maybach 62 with partition* 39, 290 Maybach 62 without partition* 290 Storing tires 366 Submenus see Control system submenus Summer opening feature 235 Sun visors 210 Sunroof see Power tilt/sliding sunroof Supplemental Restraint System see SRS Symbols used in this operator’s manual 15 T Tachometer 25, 171 Overspeed range 171 Tail lamps Cleaning lenses 402 Messages in display 443 Replacing bulbs 459 Tar stains 400 Technical data Air conditioning refrigerant 496 Brake fluid 496 Capacities fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. 495 Coolant 495, 499 Electrical system 493 Engine 490 Engine oil additives 496 Engine oils 495, 496 Fuel requirements 495, 497 Gasoline additives 498 Main dimensions and weights 494 Premium unleaded gasoline 495, 497 Rims and tires 491 Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system 495 Windshield washer system 501 525 Index Tele Aid 325, 508 Call priority 333 Emergency calls 327 Hands-free microphone 30 Information 331 Initiating an emergency call manually 328 Messages in display 423 Remote door unlock 333 Roadside Assistance 330 SOS button 328 Stolen Vehicle Recovery services 334 System self-check 326 Telematics 509 Telephone 319 Answering/ending a call 183 Compartment in the front 284, 320 Compartment in the rear 290, 292, 323 Hands-free microphone 30 In the front 320 In the rear 323 Operation 319 Phone book 182 Redialing 183 Telephone cradle Changing 322 526 Temperature Interior temperature 229 Outside indicator 171 Tether attachment points see Children in the vehicle Tie-down hooks, Trunk 280 Tightening torque, Wheel bolts 470 Tilt/sliding sunroof see Power tilt/sliding sunroof TIN 392 Tire and Loading Information Placard 368 Tire and loading terminology 390 Tires 364 Care and maintenance 365 Chains 395 Checking tire inflation pressure 375 Cleaning 366 Direction of rotation 367 Driving instructions 347 Important notes, Tire inflation pressure 374 Inflation pressure 375 Information placard 369 Inspection 365 Load rating 392 Messages in display 424–425, 445– 450 Ply composition and material used 392 Problems under-/overinflation 379 Retreads 364 Rims and tires 491 Rotating 393 Service life 365 Sizes 491 Snow 394 Spare wheel 451, 466 Speed rating 348, 382, 392, 394 Storing 366 Temperature 374, 389 Terminology 390 Tire Identification Number see TIN Traction 348 Tread 392 Tread depth 366, 395 Treadwear indicators 392 Vehicle maximum load on 392 Wear pattern 393 Winter 395 Tools 451 Top tether Children in the vehicle 102 Tow-away alarm 117 Towing eye bolt 451 Towing the vehicle 478 Tow-start 478 Index Traction 203, 392 Transmission gear selector lever see Gear selector lever Transmission see Automatic transmission Traveling abroad 350 Tread 392 Tread depth 366 Treadwear indicators 392 Trip computer 185 Trip odometer 171 Trunk Closing 132, 133 Emergency release 136 Fuse box 483 Lighting 168 Message in display 444 Opening 131, 132 Power closing assist for trunk lid 138 Tie-down hooks 280 Valet locking 137 Trunk lid see Trunk Tumbler holder see Cup holder Turn signal lamps Cleaning lenses 402 Messages in display 442 Replacing bulbs 463 Turning off engine 84 Two-way intercom* 315 Adjusting volume 316 Operating 316 Switching on/off 316 U Umbrella 293 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards 392 Units, Settings Speedometer 190 Unleaded gasoline, Premium 354, 495, 497 Upholstery, Cleaning and care of 407 Useful features 281 V Vacuum line routing diagram label 488 Valet locking 137 Vanity mirror In the rear 281 In the sun visor 281 Opening/closing 281 Vehicle Batteries 471 Breaking-in the vehicle 342 Care 399 Control system, Settings menu 187 Dimensions 494 Locking/unlocking 60, 86, 120 Locking/unlocking in an emergency 452, 453 Lowering 470 Modifications and alterations, Operating safety 16 Towing 478 Washing 401 Weights 494 Vehicle capacity weight 392 Vehicle Identification Number see VIN Vehicle jack 451, 468 Vehicle level Setting Automatic 266 Vehicle level control see Airmatic DC Vehicle lighting 155, 355 Vehicle loading 280 Cargo tie-down hooks 280 Instructions 280 Load limit 370 Terminology 368, 390 Vehicle maximum load on the tire 392 Vehicle Recovery services, Stolen (Tele Aid) 334 Vehicle status message memory 186 Vehicle tool kit 451 Vehicle washing 401 VIN 509 527 Index Voice control system 509 Hands-free microphone 30 Lever 23 W Warning lamps see Lamps, indicator and warning Warning sounds Distance warning function** 259 Distronic** 254 Exterior lamps 156 Parking brake 77, 414 Parktronic 271 Seat belt telltale 94 Turning off the engine 84 Warranty coverage 10, 487 Washer fluid see Windshield washer fluid Washing the vehicle 399 Wear pattern, Tires 393 Weights, Vehicle 494 Wheel Bolts 470 Change 466 Removing 469 Sizes 381, 492 Spare 451, 466 Tightening torque 470 Tires and wheels 364 528 Window curtain airbags 94 Windows see Power windows Windshield Cleaning 81 Cleaning wiper blades 404 Defogging 217 Windshield washer fluid 363 Message in display 444 Mixing ratio 501 Refilling 363, 501 Wiping 81 Windshield wipers 23, 80 Cleaning wiper blades 404 Replacing wiper blades 464 Winter driving 394 Snow chains 395 Tires 395 Winter driving instructions 349 Winter tires 395 Wood trims, Cleaning 407 X Xenon headlamp see Headlamps Service and Literature Your authorized Maybach Studio has trained technicians and original Maybach parts to service your vehicle properly. For expert advice and quality service, contact your authorized Maybach Studio. If you are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle, please contact your authorized Maybach Studio. We consider this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle. For further information you can find us on the Maybach web-site www.maybach-manufaktur.com or www.maybach.ca. G Warning! To help avoid personal injury, be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs. Improper or incomplete service or the use of incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its equipment, which may in turn result in personal injury. If you have questions about carrying out any type of service, turn to the advice of an authorized Maybach Studio. We reserve the right to modify the technical details of the vehicle as given in the data and illustrations of this Operator’s Manual. Reprinting, translation and copying, even of excerpts, is not permitted without our prior authorization in writing. Press time August 22, 2005 GSP/TIP Printed in Germany